US20190075676A1 - Communications bladed panel systems - Google Patents
Communications bladed panel systems Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20190075676A1 US20190075676A1 US16/180,628 US201816180628A US2019075676A1 US 20190075676 A1 US20190075676 A1 US 20190075676A1 US 201816180628 A US201816180628 A US 201816180628A US 2019075676 A1 US2019075676 A1 US 2019075676A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- blade
- chassis
- implementations
- panel system
- port
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/44—Mechanical structures for providing tensile strength and external protection for fibres, e.g. optical transmission cables
- G02B6/4439—Auxiliary devices
- G02B6/444—Systems or boxes with surplus lengths
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K7/00—Constructional details common to different types of electric apparatus
- H05K7/14—Mounting supporting structure in casing or on frame or rack
- H05K7/1485—Servers; Data center rooms, e.g. 19-inch computer racks
- H05K7/1487—Blade assemblies, e.g. blade cases or inner arrangements within a blade
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/24—Coupling light guides
- G02B6/36—Mechanical coupling means
- G02B6/38—Mechanical coupling means having fibre to fibre mating means
- G02B6/3807—Dismountable connectors, i.e. comprising plugs
- G02B6/3897—Connectors fixed to housings, casing, frames or circuit boards
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/24—Coupling light guides
- G02B6/42—Coupling light guides with opto-electronic elements
- G02B6/4201—Packages, e.g. shape, construction, internal or external details
- G02B6/4274—Electrical aspects
- G02B6/428—Electrical aspects containing printed circuit boards [PCB]
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/24—Coupling light guides
- G02B6/42—Coupling light guides with opto-electronic elements
- G02B6/4292—Coupling light guides with opto-electronic elements the light guide being disconnectable from the opto-electronic element, e.g. mutually self aligning arrangements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/44—Mechanical structures for providing tensile strength and external protection for fibres, e.g. optical transmission cables
- G02B6/4439—Auxiliary devices
- G02B6/444—Systems or boxes with surplus lengths
- G02B6/4452—Distribution frames
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G02—OPTICS
- G02B—OPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
- G02B6/00—Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
- G02B6/44—Mechanical structures for providing tensile strength and external protection for fibres, e.g. optical transmission cables
- G02B6/4439—Auxiliary devices
- G02B6/444—Systems or boxes with surplus lengths
- G02B6/4453—Cassettes
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
- G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F13/00—Interconnection of, or transfer of information or other signals between, memories, input/output devices or central processing units
- G06F13/38—Information transfer, e.g. on bus
- G06F13/40—Bus structure
- G06F13/4063—Device-to-bus coupling
- G06F13/409—Mechanical coupling
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04Q—SELECTING
- H04Q1/00—Details of selecting apparatus or arrangements
- H04Q1/02—Constructional details
- H04Q1/023—Constructional details using sliding mechanisms for accessing the interior of the apparatus
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04Q—SELECTING
- H04Q1/00—Details of selecting apparatus or arrangements
- H04Q1/02—Constructional details
- H04Q1/03—Power distribution arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04Q—SELECTING
- H04Q1/00—Details of selecting apparatus or arrangements
- H04Q1/02—Constructional details
- H04Q1/06—Cable ducts or mountings specially adapted for exchange installations
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04Q—SELECTING
- H04Q1/00—Details of selecting apparatus or arrangements
- H04Q1/02—Constructional details
- H04Q1/08—Frames or mounting racks for relays; Accessories therefor
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04Q—SELECTING
- H04Q1/00—Details of selecting apparatus or arrangements
- H04Q1/02—Constructional details
- H04Q1/13—Patch panels for monitoring, interconnecting or testing circuits, e.g. patch bay, patch field or jack field; Patching modules
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04Q—SELECTING
- H04Q1/00—Details of selecting apparatus or arrangements
- H04Q1/02—Constructional details
- H04Q1/15—Backplane arrangements
- H04Q1/155—Backplane arrangements characterised by connection features
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K5/00—Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus
- H05K5/0026—Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus provided with connectors and printed circuit boards [PCB], e.g. automotive electronic control units
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K7/00—Constructional details common to different types of electric apparatus
- H05K7/14—Mounting supporting structure in casing or on frame or rack
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K7/00—Constructional details common to different types of electric apparatus
- H05K7/14—Mounting supporting structure in casing or on frame or rack
- H05K7/1401—Mounting supporting structure in casing or on frame or rack comprising clamping or extracting means
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K7/00—Constructional details common to different types of electric apparatus
- H05K7/14—Mounting supporting structure in casing or on frame or rack
- H05K7/1485—Servers; Data center rooms, e.g. 19-inch computer racks
- H05K7/1488—Cabinets therefor, e.g. chassis or racks or mechanical interfaces between blades and support structures
- H05K7/1489—Cabinets therefor, e.g. chassis or racks or mechanical interfaces between blades and support structures characterized by the mounting of blades therein, e.g. brackets, rails, trays
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K7/00—Constructional details common to different types of electric apparatus
- H05K7/14—Mounting supporting structure in casing or on frame or rack
- H05K7/1485—Servers; Data center rooms, e.g. 19-inch computer racks
- H05K7/1488—Cabinets therefor, e.g. chassis or racks or mechanical interfaces between blades and support structures
- H05K7/1491—Cabinets therefor, e.g. chassis or racks or mechanical interfaces between blades and support structures having cable management arrangements
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K5/00—Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus
- H05K5/02—Details
- H05K5/0204—Mounting supporting structures on the outside of casings
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H05—ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
- H05K—PRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
- H05K5/00—Casings, cabinets or drawers for electric apparatus
- H05K5/02—Details
- H05K5/0217—Mechanical details of casings
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T29/00—Metal working
- Y10T29/49—Method of mechanical manufacture
- Y10T29/49002—Electrical device making
-
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y10—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC
- Y10T—TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER US CLASSIFICATION
- Y10T29/00—Metal working
- Y10T29/49—Method of mechanical manufacture
- Y10T29/49826—Assembling or joining
Definitions
- communications devices can be used for switching and connecting communications signal transmission paths in a communications network. Some such communications devices are installed in one or more equipment racks to permit organized, high-density installations to be achieved in limited space available for equipment.
- NMS Network management systems
- NMS systems are typically aware of logical communication links that exist in a communications network, but typically do not have information about the specific physical layer media (e.g., the communications devices, cables, couplers, etc.) that are used to implement the logical communication links. Indeed, NMS systems typically do not have the ability to display or otherwise provide information about how logical communication links are implemented at the physical layer level.
- the present disclosure relates to communications panels which provide a higher density of connections within a given floor space, provide improved cable management structures, and provide physical layer management capabilities.
- One or more communications devices for providing such connections can be bundled into compact operational units, known as blades.
- One aspect of the present disclosure relates to a communications panel system including one or more blades mounted to a chassis.
- the blades are configured to move separately relative to the chassis.
- the blades are each configured to provide physical layer information (PLI) functionality and physical layer management (PLM) functionality.
- PLI physical layer information
- PLM physical layer management
- FIG. 1 is a diagram of a portion of an example communications and data management system in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure
- FIG. 2 is a block diagram of one implementation of a communications management system that includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure
- FIG. 3 is a block diagram of one high-level example of a port and media reading interface that are suitable for use in the management system of FIG. 2 in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure
- FIGS. 4-24 provide an example connector assembly implemented as a bladed panel system configured to support PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure
- FIGS. 25-44 provide another example connector assembly implemented as a bladed panel system configured to support PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure
- FIGS. 45-49 illustrate one example chassis of a bladed panel system suitable for receiving one or more blades in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure
- FIGS. 50-51 illustrate another example chassis of a bladed panel system suitable for receiving one or more blades in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure
- FIGS. 52-53 illustrate another example chassis of a bladed panel system suitable for receiving one or more blades in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure
- FIGS. 54-56 illustrate an example blade suitable for receipt in any of the chasses shown in FIGS. 25-51 in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure
- FIGS. 57-62 illustrate one example blade including a coupler arrangement that connects incoming media segments terminated at LC-type connectors to outgoing media segments terminated at LC-type connectors;
- FIGS. 63-66 illustrate another example blade including a coupler arrangement that connects incoming media segments terminated at MPO-type connectors to outgoing media segments terminated at MPO-type connectors;
- FIGS. 67-71 illustrate one example blade including a coupler arrangement that connects incoming media segments terminated at MPO-type connectors to outgoing media segments terminated at LC-type connectors;
- FIGS. 72-74 illustrate one example labeling assembly suitable for use with any of the blades disclosed herein;
- FIGS. 75 and 76 illustrate one example bladed panel system in which a plurality of blades is mounted within an example chassis with a top blade shown in a closed position relative to the chassis, a middle blade shown in a first extended position relative to the chassis, and a bottom blade shown in a second extended position relative to the chassis;
- FIGS. 77-79 show rear perspective views of a bladed panel system including management structures at the rear of the chassis and the rear of the blades;
- FIGS. 80-90 illustrate an example bladed panel system in which at least one chassis and at least one bracket are mounted to a frame to facilitate management of the outgoing media segments as blades are moved relative to the chassis;
- FIG. 91 is a front perspective view of an example chassis and backplane with a top of the chassis removed so that the interior of the chassis and a blade positioned in the chassis are visible;
- FIGS. 92-94 are enlarged views of the interior of the chassis shown in FIG. 91 to illustrate an example latching arrangement by which a blade may be latched into the closed position relative to the chassis;
- FIGS. 95-98 illustrate an example latching arrangement by which a blade may be latched in at least the first extended position relative to the chassis
- FIGS. 99-113 show another example latching arrangement that is configured to secure blade in at least the first extended position relative to chassis
- FIGS. 114-117 show another example latching arrangement that is configured to secure a blade in at least the first extended position relative to a chassis
- FIGS. 118-127 show another example bladed chassis system including an example chassis that is configured to receive one or more blades having another example latching arrangement that is configured to secure each blade in at least the first extended position relative to a chassis;
- FIG. 128 is a perspective view of an example smart blade including a circuit board arrangement, a connection system, a blade processor, and a smart coupler arrangement in accordance with aspects of the disclosure;
- FIG. 129A is a cross-sectional view of an example smart coupler including a media reading interface that is contacting a storage device of an LC-type fiber optic connector received at a respective port of the smart coupler in accordance with aspects of the disclosure;
- FIG. 129B is a perspective view of an example smart coupler including media reading interfaces that are configured to contact storage devices of MPO-type fiber optic connectors received at the port of the smart coupler in accordance with aspects of the disclosure;
- FIG. 130A is a perspective view of the example LC-type fiber optic connector of FIG. 129A ;
- FIG. 130B is an exploded, perspective view of an example MPO-type fiber optic connector that is suitable for receipt at a port of the smart coupler shown in FIG. 129B ;
- FIGS. 131-135 show an example connection system that enables a smart blade to remain connected to a chassis backplane when the smart blade moves relative to the chassis in accordance with aspects of the disclosure
- FIGS. 136-142 show another example connection system that enables a smart blade to remain connected to a chassis backplane when the smart blade moves relative to the chassis in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- FIGS. 143-150 illustrate one example bladed panel system including a “passive” chassis and a plurality of “passive” blades in accordance with aspects of the disclosure.
- the present disclosure is directed to bladed distribution panel systems for use in communications networks.
- the bladed distribution panel systems include one or more bladed distribution modules that are configured to connect together two or more cables.
- Certain types of bladed distribution modules include one or more first cable ports at which terminated ends of first cables (e.g., patch cables) can be plugged and one or more second cable ports at which terminated ends of second cables (e.g., distribution cables) can be plugged.
- Opposite ends of the first cables can connect together ports of two or more bladed distribution modules.
- Opposite ends of the second cables can connect the bladed distribution modules to a larger communications network as will be described in more detail herein. Communications signals pass through the bladed distribution modules between the first cables and the second cables.
- PLI (physical layer information) cables also may be routed to the bladed distribution modules.
- the PLI cables may provide power (e.g., electrical power) to the bladed distribution modules.
- the PLI cables may carry additional data signals between the bladed distribution modules and a data network as will be described in more detail herein.
- the data network is different from the communications network to which the second cables connect.
- a “cable” refers to a physical medium that is capable of carrying one or more data signals along its length.
- suitable cables include fiber cables, electrical cables, and hybrid cables.
- a fiber optic cable includes one or more optical fibers that are configured to carry optical signals along their length.
- the fibers in a fiber optic cable may be buffered and/or jacketed (e.g., individually or as a group).
- Certain types of fiber optic cables may be terminated with one or more connectors (e.g., SC, LC, FC, LX.5, or MPO connectors).
- An electrical cable includes one or more conductors (e.g., wires) that are configured to carry electrical signals along their length.
- the conductors in an electrical cable may be insulated (e.g., individually or as a group).
- Non-limiting examples of electrical cables include CAT-5, 6, and 7 twisted-pair cables, DS1 line, and DS3 line.
- Certain types of electrical cables may be terminated with one or more connectors or connector assemblies (e.g., RJ jacks and plugs, DSX jacks and plugs, BNC connectors, F connectors, punch-down terminations, or bantam jacks and plugs).
- a hybrid cable includes a combination of one or more wires and one or more optical fibers that may be insulated/jacketed.
- FIG. 1 is a diagram of a portion of an example communications and data management system 100 .
- the example system 100 shown in FIG. 1 includes a part of a communications network 101 along which communications signals S 1 pass.
- the network 101 can include an Internet Protocol network. In other implementations, however, the communications network 101 may include other types of networks.
- the communications network 101 includes connected network components (e.g., connector assemblies, inter-networking devices, internet working devices, servers, outlets, and end user equipment (e.g., computers)).
- communications signals S 1 pass from a computer, to a wall outlet, to a port of communication panel, to a first port of an inter-networking device, out another port of the inter-networking device, to a port of the same or another communications panel, to a rack mounted server.
- the communications signals S 1 may follow other paths within the communications network 101 .
- the portion of the communications network 101 shown in FIG. 1 includes first and second connector assemblies 130 , 130 ′ at which communications signals S 1 pass from one portion of the communications network 101 to another portion of the communications network 101 .
- connector assemblies 130 , 130 ′ include, for example, rack-mounted connector assemblies (e.g., patch panels, distribution units, and media converters for fiber and copper physical communication media), wall-mounted connector assemblies (e.g., boxes, jacks, outlets, and media converters for fiber and copper physical communication media), and inter-networking devices (e.g., switches, routers, hubs, repeaters, gateways, and access points).
- the first connector assembly 130 defines at least one port 132 configured to communicatively couple at least a first media segment (e.g., cable) 105 to at least a second media segment (e.g., cable) 115 to enable the communication signals S 1 to pass between the media segments 105 , 115 .
- the at least one port 132 of the first connector assembly 130 may be directly connected to a port 132 ′ of the second connector assembly 130 ′.
- the port 132 is directly connected to the port 132 ′ when the communications signals S 1 pass between the two ports 132 , 132 ′ without passing through an intermediate port. For example, plugging a first terminated end of a patch cable into the port 132 and a second terminated end of the patch cable into the port 132 ′ directly connects the ports 132 , 132 ′.
- the port 132 of the first connector assembly 130 also may be indirectly connected to the port 132 ′ of the second connector assembly 130 ′.
- the port 132 is indirectly connected to the port 132 ′ when the communications signals S 1 pass through an intermediate port when traveling between the ports 132 , 132 ′.
- the communications signals S 1 may be routed over one media segment from the port 132 at the first connector assembly 130 , to a port of a third connector assembly at which the media segment is coupled, to another media segment that is routed from the port of the third connector assembly to the port 132 ′ of the second connector assembly 130 ′.
- Non-limiting examples of media segments include optical cables, electrical cables, and hybrid cables.
- the media segments may be terminated with electrical plugs, electrical jacks, fiber optic connectors, fiber optic adapters, media converters, or other termination components.
- each media segment 105 , 115 is terminated at a plug or connector 110 , 120 , respectively, which is configured to communicatively connect the media segments 105 , 115 .
- the port 132 of the connector assembly 130 can be configured to align ferrules of two fiber optic connectors 110 , 120 .
- the port 132 of the connector assembly 130 can be configured to electrically connect an electrical plug with an electrical socket (e.g., a jack).
- the port 132 can include a media converter configured to connect an optical fiber to an electrical conductor.
- the connector assembly 130 does not actively manage (e.g., is passive with respect to) the communications signals S 1 passing through port 132 .
- the connector assembly 130 does not modify the communications signal S 1 carried over the media segments 105 , 115 .
- the connector assembly 130 does not read, store, or analyze the communications signal S 1 carried over the media segments 105 , 115 .
- the communications and data management system 100 also provides physical layer information (PLI) functionality as well as physical layer management (PLM) functionality.
- PLI functionality refers to the ability of a physical component or system to identify or otherwise associate physical layer information with some or all of the physical components used to implement the physical layer of the system.
- PLM functionality refers to the ability of a component or system to manipulate or to enable others to manipulate the physical components used to implement the physical layer of the system (e.g., to track what is connected to each component, to trace connections that are made using the components, or to provide visual indications to a user at a selected component).
- physical layer information refers to information about the identity, attributes, and/or status of the physical components used to implement the physical layer of the communications system 100 .
- physical layer information of the communications system 100 can include media information, device information, and location information.
- media information refers to physical layer information pertaining to cables, plugs, connectors, and other such physical media.
- the media information is stored on or in the physical media, themselves.
- the media information can be stored at one or more data repositories for the communications system, either alternatively or in addition to the media, themselves.
- Non-limiting examples of media information include a part number, a serial number, a plug or other connector type, a conductor or fiber type, a cable or fiber length, cable polarity, a cable or fiber pass-through capacity, a date of manufacture, a manufacturing lot number, information about one or more visual attributes of physical communication media (e.g., information about the color or shape of the physical communication media or an image of the physical communication media), and an insertion count (i.e., a record of the number of times the media segment has been connected to another media segment or network component).
- Media information also can include testing or media quality or performance information. The testing or media quality or performance information, for example, can be the results of testing that is performed when a particular segment of media is manufactured.
- device information refers to physical layer information pertaining to the communications panels, inter-networking devices, media converters, computers, servers, wall outlets, and other physical communications devices to which the media segments attach.
- the device information is stored on or in the devices, themselves.
- the device information can be stored at one or more data repositories for the communications system, either alternatively or in addition to the devices, themselves.
- the device information can be stored in the media segments attached thereto.
- Non-limiting examples of device information include a device identifier, a device type, port priority data (that associates a priority level with each port), and port updates (described in more detail herein).
- location information refers to physical layer information pertaining to a physical layout of a building or buildings in which the network 101 is deployed. Location information also can include information indicating where each communications device, media segment, network component, or other component is physically located within the building. In accordance with some aspects, the location information of each system component is stored on or in the respective component. In accordance with other aspects, the location information can be stored at one or more data repositories for the communications system, either alternatively or in addition to the system components, themselves.
- one or more of the components of the communications network 101 are configured to store physical layer information pertaining to the component as will be disclosed in more detail herein.
- the connectors 110 , 120 , the media segments 105 , 115 , and/or the connector assemblies 130 , 130 ′ may store physical layer information.
- each connector 110 , 120 may store information pertaining to itself (e.g., type of connector, data of manufacture, etc.) and/or to the respective media segment 105 , 115 (e.g., type of media, test results, etc.).
- the media segments 105 , 115 or connectors 110 , 120 may store media information that includes a count of the number of times that the media segment (or connector) has been inserted into port 132 .
- the count stored in or on the media segment is updated each time the segment (or plug or connector) is inserted into port 132 .
- This insertion count value can be used, for example, for warranty purposes (e.g., to determine if the connector has been inserted more than the number of times specified in the warranty) or for security purposes (e.g., to detect unauthorized insertions of the physical communication media).
- One or more of the components of the communications network 101 can read the physical layer information from one or more media segments retained thereat.
- one or more network components includes a media reading interface that is configured to read physical layer information stored on or in the media segments or connectors attached thereto.
- the connector assembly 130 includes a media reading interface 134 that can read media information stored on the media cables 105 , 115 retained within the port 132 .
- the media reading interface 134 can read media information stored on the connectors or plugs 110 , 120 terminating the cables 105 , 115 , respectively.
- the physical layer information read by a network component may be processed or stored at the component.
- the first connector assembly 130 shown in FIG. 1 is configured to read physical layer information stored on the connectors 110 , 120 and/or on the media segments 105 , 115 using media reading interface 134 .
- the first connector assembly 130 may store not only physical layer information about itself (e.g., the total number of available ports at that assembly 130 , the number of ports currently in use, etc.), but also physical layer information about the connectors 110 , 120 inserted at the ports and/or about the media segments 105 , 115 attached to the connectors 110 , 120 .
- the physical layer information obtained by the media reading interface may be communicated (see PLI signals S 2 ) over the network 101 for processing and/or storage.
- the communications network 101 includes a data network (e.g., see network 218 of FIG. 2 ) along which the physical layer information is communicated. At least some of the media segments and other components of the data network may be separate from those of the communications network 101 to which such physical layer information pertains.
- the first connector assembly 130 may include a plurality of “normal” ports (e.g., fiber optic adapter ports) at which connectorized media segments (e.g., optical fibers) are coupled together to create a path for communications signals S 1 .
- the first connector assembly 130 also may include one or more PLI ports 136 at which the physical layer information (see PLI signals S 2 ) are passed to components of the data network (e.g., to one or more aggregation points 150 and/or to one or more computer systems 160 ).
- the physical layer information may be communicated over the communications network 101 just like any other signal, while at the same time not affecting the communication signals S 1 that pass through the connector assembly 130 on the normal ports 132 .
- the physical layer information may be communicated as one or more of the communication signals S 1 that pass through the normal ports 132 of the connector assemblies 130 , 130 ′.
- a media segment may be routed between the PLI port 136 and one of the “normal” ports 132 .
- the media segment may be routed between the PLI port 136 and a “normal” port of another connector assembly.
- the physical layer information may be passed along the communications network 101 to other components of the communications network 101 (e.g., to another connector assembly, to one or more aggregation points 150 and/or to one or more computer systems 160 ).
- the network 101 By using the network 101 to communicate physical layer information pertaining to it, an entirely separate data network need not be provided and maintained in order to communicate such physical layer information.
- each connector assembly 130 includes at least one PLI port 136 that is separate from the “normal” ports 132 of the connector assembly 130 .
- Physical layer information is communicated between the connector assembly 130 and the communications network 101 through the PLI port 136 .
- Components of the communications network 101 may be connected to one or more aggregation devices 150 and/or to one or more computing systems 160 .
- the connector assembly 130 is connected to a representative aggregation device 150 , a representative computing system 160 , and to other components of the network 101 (see looped arrows) via the PLI port 136 .
- some types of physical layer information pertaining to media segments can be obtained by the connector assembly 130 from a user at the connector assembly 130 via a user interface (e.g., a keypad, a scanner, a touch screen, buttons, etc.). For example, physical layer information pertaining to media that is not configured to store such information can be entered manually into the connector assembly 130 by the user.
- the connector assembly 130 can provide the physical layer information obtained from the user to other devices or systems that are coupled to the communications network 101 and/or a separate data network.
- some or all physical layer information can be obtained by the connector assembly 130 from other devices or systems that are coupled to the communications network 101 and/or a separate data network.
- physical layer information pertaining to media that is not configured to store such information can be entered manually into another device or system (e.g., at the connector assembly 130 , at the computer 160 , or at the aggregation point 150 ) that is coupled to the network 101 and/or a separate data network.
- some types of non-physical layer information also can be obtained by one network component (e.g., a connector assembly 130 , an aggregation point 150 , or a computer 160 ) from other devices or systems that are coupled to the communications network 101 and/or a separate data network.
- the connector assembly 130 may pull non-physical layer information from one or more components of the network 101 .
- the non-physical layer information can be obtained by the connector assembly 130 from a user at the connector assembly 130 .
- the connector assembly 130 is configured to modify (e.g., add, delete, and/or change) the physical layer information stored in or on the segment of physical communication media 105 , 115 (i.e., or the associated connectors 110 , 120 ).
- the media information stored in or on the segment of physical communication media 105 , 115 can be updated to include the results of testing that is performed when a segment of physical media is installed or otherwise checked. In other implementations, such testing information is supplied to the aggregation point 150 for storage and/or processing.
- the modification of the physical layer information does not affect the communications signals S 1 passing through the connector assembly 130 .
- FIG. 2 is a block diagram of one example implementation of a communications management system 200 that includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality.
- the management system 200 comprises a plurality of connector assemblies 202 .
- the management system 200 includes one or more connector assemblies 202 connected to an IP network 218 .
- the connector assemblies 202 shown in FIG. 2 illustrate various example implementations of the connector assemblies 130 , 30 ′ of FIG. 1 .
- Each connector assembly 202 includes one or more ports 204 , each of which is used to connect two or more segments of physical communication media to one another (e.g., to implement a portion of a logical communication link for communication signals S 1 of FIG. 1 ). At least some of the connector assemblies 202 are designed for use with segments of physical communication media that have physical layer information stored in or on them. The physical layer information is stored in or on the segment of physical communication media in a manner that enables the stored information, when the segment is attached to a port 204 , to be read by a programmable processor 206 associated with the connector assembly 202 .
- Each programmable processor 206 is configured to execute software or firmware that causes the programmable processor 206 to carry out various functions described below.
- Each programmable processor 206 also includes suitable memory (not shown) that is coupled to the programmable processor 206 for storing program instructions and data.
- the programmable processor 206 determines if a physical communication media segment is attached to a port 204 with which that processor 206 is associated and, if one is, to read the identifier and attribute information stored in or on the attached physical communication media segment (if the segment includes such information stored therein or thereon) using the associated media reading interface 208 .
- each of the ports 204 of the connector assemblies 202 comprises a respective media reading interface 208 via which the respective programmable processor 206 is able to determine if a physical communication media segment is attached to that port 204 and, if one is, to read the physical layer information stored in or on the attached segment (if such media information is stored therein or thereon).
- a single media reading interface 208 may correspond to two or more ports 204 .
- the programmable processor 206 associated with each connector assembly 202 is communicatively coupled to each of the media reading interfaces 208 using a suitable bus or other interconnect (not shown).
- each connector assembly 202 includes its own respective programmable processor 206 and its own respective network interface 216 that is used to communicatively couple that connector assembly 202 to an Internet Protocol (IP) network 218 .
- IP Internet Protocol
- the ports 204 of the connector assemblies 202 also connect to the IP network 218 . In other implementations, however, only the network interfaces 216 couple to the IP network 218 .
- a group of connector assemblies 202 are physically located near each other (e.g., in a rack, rack system, or equipment closet). Each of the connector assemblies 202 in the group includes its own respective programmable processor 206 . However, in the second connector assembly configuration 212 , some of the connector assemblies 202 (referred to here as “interfaced connector assemblies”) include their own respective network interfaces 216 while some of the connector assemblies 202 (referred to here as “non-interfaced connector assemblies”) do not. The non-interfaced connector assemblies 202 are communicatively coupled to one or more of the interfaced connector assemblies 202 in the group via local connections.
- the non-interfaced connector assemblies 202 are communicatively coupled to the IP network 218 via the network interface 216 included in one or more of the interfaced connector assemblies 202 in the group.
- the total number of network interfaces 216 used to couple the connector assemblies 202 to the IP network 218 can be reduced.
- the non-interfaced connector assemblies 202 are connected to the interfaced connector assembly 202 using a daisy chain topology (though other topologies can be used in other implementations and embodiments).
- a group of connector assemblies 202 are physically located near each other (e.g., within a rack, rack system, or equipment closet). Some of the connector assemblies 202 in the group (also referred to here as “master” connector assemblies 202 ) include both their own programmable processors 206 and network interfaces 216 , while some of the connector assemblies 202 (also referred to here as “slave” connector assemblies 202 ) do not include their own programmable processors 206 or network interfaces 216 . Each of the slave connector assemblies 202 is communicatively coupled to one or more of the master connector assemblies 202 in the group via one or more local connections.
- the programmable processor 206 in each of the master connector assemblies 202 is able to carry out the PLM functions for both the master connector assembly 202 of which it is a part and any slave connector assemblies 202 to which the master connector assembly 202 is connected via the local connections. As a result, the cost associated with the slave connector assemblies 202 can be reduced.
- the slave connector assemblies 202 are connected to a master connector assembly 202 in a star topology (though other topologies can be used in other implementations and embodiments).
- a group of connector assemblies (e.g., distribution modules) 202 are housed within a common chassis or other enclosure.
- Each of the connector assemblies 202 in the configuration 215 includes their own programmable processors 206 .
- the programmable processors 206 in the connector assemblies 202 are “slave” processors 206 .
- Each of the slave programmable processors 206 in the group is communicatively coupled to a common “master” programmable processor 217 (e.g., over a backplane included in the chassis or enclosure).
- the master programmable processor 217 is coupled to a network interface 216 that is used to communicatively couple the master programmable processor 217 to the IP network 218 .
- each slave programmable processor 206 is configured to manage the media reading interfaces 208 to determine if physical communication media segments are attached to the port 204 and to read the physical layer information stored in or on the attached physical communication media segments (if the attached segments have such information stored therein or thereon).
- the physical layer information is communicated from the slave programmable processor 206 in each of the connector assemblies 202 in the chassis to the master processor 217 .
- the master processor 217 is configured to handle the processing associated with communicating the physical layer information read from by the slave processors 206 to devices that are coupled to the IP network 218 .
- the communications management system 200 includes functionality that enables the physical layer information captured by the connector assemblies 202 to be used by application-layer functionality outside of the traditional physical-layer management application domain. That is, the physical layer information is not retained in a PLM “island” used only for PLM purposes but is instead made available to other applications.
- the management system 200 includes an aggregation point 220 that is communicatively coupled to the connector assemblies 202 via the IP network 218 .
- the aggregation point 220 includes functionality that obtains physical layer information from the connector assemblies 202 (and other devices) and stores the physical layer information in a data store.
- the aggregation point 220 can be used to receive physical layer information from various types of connector assemblies 202 that have functionality for automatically reading information stored in or on the segment of physical communication media.
- the aggregation point 220 and aggregation functionality 224 can be used to receive physical layer information from other types of devices that have functionality for automatically reading information stored in or on the segment of physical communication media. Examples of such devices include end-user devices—such as computers, peripherals (e.g., printers, copiers, storage devices, and scanners), and IP telephones—that include functionality for automatically reading information stored in or on the segment of physical communication media.
- the aggregation point 220 also can be used to obtain other types of physical layer information.
- the aggregation point 220 also obtains information about physical communication media segments that is not otherwise automatically communicated to an aggregation point 220 .
- This information can be provided to the aggregation point 220 , for example, by manually entering such information into a file (e.g., a spreadsheet) and then uploading the file to the aggregation point 220 (e.g., using a web browser) in connection with the initial installation of each of the various items.
- a file e.g., a spreadsheet
- Such information can also, for example, be directly entered using a user interface provided by the aggregation point 220 (e.g., using a web browser).
- the aggregation point 220 also includes functionality that provides an interface for external devices or entities to access the physical layer information maintained by the aggregation point 220 . This access can include retrieving information from the aggregation point 220 as well as supplying information to the aggregation point 220 .
- the aggregation point 220 is implemented as “middleware” that is able to provide such external devices and entities with transparent and convenient access to the PLI maintained by the access point 220 .
- the aggregation point 220 aggregates PLI from the relevant devices on the IP network 218 and provides external devices and entities with access to such PLI, the external devices and entities do not need to individually interact with all of the devices in the IP network 218 that provide PLI, nor do such devices need to have the capacity to respond to requests from such external devices and entities.
- a network management system (NMS) 230 includes PLI functionality 232 that is configured to retrieve physical layer information from the aggregation point 220 and provide it to the other parts of the NMS 230 for use thereby.
- the NMS 230 uses the retrieved physical layer information to perform one or more network management functions.
- the NMS 230 communicates with the aggregation point 220 over the IP network 218 .
- the NMS 230 may be directly connected to the aggregation point 220 .
- an application 234 executing on a computer 236 also can use the API implemented by the aggregation point 220 to access the PLI information maintained by the aggregation point 220 (e.g., to retrieve such information from the aggregation point 220 and/or to supply such information to the aggregation point 220 ).
- the computer 236 is coupled to the IP network 218 and accesses the aggregation point 220 over the IP network 218 .
- one or more inter-networking devices 238 used to implement the IP network 218 include physical layer information (PLI) functionality 240 .
- the PLI functionality 240 of the inter-networking device 238 is configured to retrieve physical layer information from the aggregation point 220 and use the retrieved physical layer information to perform one or more inter-networking functions.
- Examples of inter-networking functions include Layer 1, Layer 2, and Layer 3 (of the OSI model) inter-networking functions such as the routing, switching, repeating, bridging, and grooming of communication traffic that is received at the inter-networking device.
- the aggregation point 220 can be implemented on a standalone network node (e.g., a standalone computer running appropriate software) or can be integrated along with other network functionality (e.g., integrated with an element management system or network management system or other network server or network element). Moreover, the functionality of the aggregation point 220 can be distribute across many nodes and devices in the network and/or implemented, for example, in a hierarchical manner (e.g., with many levels of aggregation points).
- the IP network 218 can include one or more local area networks and/or wide area networks (e.g., the Internet). As a result, the aggregation point 220 , NMS 230 , and computer 236 need not be located at the same site as each other or at the same site as the connector assemblies 202 or the inter-networking devices 238 .
- power can be supplied to the connector assemblies 202 using conventional “Power over Ethernet” techniques specified in the IEEE 802.3af standard, which is hereby incorporated herein by reference.
- a power hub 242 or other power supplying device located near or incorporated into an inter-networking device that is coupled to each connector assembly 202 ) injects DC power onto one or more power cables (e.g., a power wire included in a copper twisted-pair cable) used to connect each connector assembly 202 to the IP network 218 .
- FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of one example connection system 1800 including a connector assembly 1810 configured to collect physical layer information from at least one segment of physical communications media.
- the example connector assembly 1810 of FIG. 3 is configured to connect segments of optical physical communications media in a physical layer management system.
- the connector assembly 1810 includes a fiber optic adapter defining at least one connection opening 1811 having a first port end 1812 and a second port end 1814 .
- a sleeve (e.g., a split sleeve) 1803 is arranged within the connection opening 1811 of the adapter 1810 between the first and second port ends 1812 , 1814 .
- Each port end 1812 , 1814 is configured to receive a connector arrangement as will be described in more detail herein.
- a first example segment of optical physical communication media includes a first optical fiber 1822 terminated by a first connector arrangement 1820 .
- a second example segment of optical physical communication media includes a second optical fiber 1832 terminated by a second connector arrangement 1830 .
- the first connector arrangement 1820 is plugged into the first port end 1812 and the second connector arrangement 1830 is plugged into the second port end 1814 .
- Each fiber connector arrangement 1820 , 1830 includes a ferrule 1824 , 1834 through which optical signals from the optical fiber 1822 , 1832 , respectively, pass.
- the ferrules 1824 , 1834 of the connector arrangements 1820 , 1830 are aligned by the sleeve 1803 when the connector arrangements 1820 , 1830 are inserted into the connection opening 1811 of the adapter 1810 . Aligning the ferrules 1824 , 1834 provides optical coupling between the optical fibers 1822 , 1832 .
- each segment of optical physical communication media e.g., each optical fiber 1822 , 1832
- carries communication signals e.g., communications signals S 1 of FIG. 1 ).
- the aligned ferrules 1824 , 1834 of the connector arrangements 1820 , 1830 create an optical path along which the communication signals (e.g., signals S 1 of FIG. 1 ) may be carried.
- the first connector arrangement 1820 may include a storage device 1825 that is configured to store physical layer information (e.g., an identifier and/or attribute information) pertaining to the segment of physical communications media (e.g., the first connector arrangement 1820 and/or the fiber optic cable 1822 terminated thereby).
- the connector arrangement 1830 also includes a storage device 1835 that is configured to store information (e.g., an identifier and/or attribute information) pertaining to the second connector arrangement 1830 and/or the second optic cable 1832 terminated thereby.
- each of the storage devices 1825 , 1835 is implemented using an EEPROM (e.g., a PCB surface-mount EEPROM). In other implementations, the storage devices 1825 , 1835 are implemented using other non-volatile memory device. Each storage device 1825 , 1835 is arranged and configured so that it does not interfere or interact with the communications signals communicated over the media segments 1822 , 1832 .
- the adapter 1810 is coupled to at least a first media reading interface 1816 . In certain implementations, the adapter 1810 also is coupled to at least a second media interface 1818 . In some implementations, the adapter 1810 is coupled to multiple media reading interfaces. In certain implementations, the adapter 1810 includes a media reading interface for each port end defined by the adapter 1810 . In other implementations, the adapter 1810 includes a media reading interface for each connection opening 1811 defined by the adapter 1810 . In still other implementations, the adapter 1810 includes a media reading interface for each connector arrangement that the adapter 1810 is configured to receive. In still other implementations, the adapter 1810 includes a media reading interface for only a portion of the connector arrangement that the adapter 1810 is configured to receive.
- At least the first media reading interface 1816 is mounted to a printed circuit board 1815 .
- the first media reading interface 1816 of the printed circuit board 1815 is associated with the first port end 1812 of the adapter 1810 .
- the printed circuit board 1815 also can include the second media reading interface 1818 .
- the second media reading interface 1818 is associated with the second port end 1814 of the adapter 1810 .
- the printed circuit board 1815 of the connector assembly 1810 can be communicatively connected to one or more programmable processors (e.g., processors 216 of FIG. 2 ) and/or to one or more network interfaces (e.g., network interfaces 216 of FIG. 2 ).
- the network interface may be configured to send the physical layer information (e.g., see signals S 2 of FIG. 1 ) to a physical layer management network (e.g., see communications network 101 of FIG. 1 or IP network 218 of FIG. 2 ).
- one or more such processors and interfaces can be arranged as components on the printed circuit board 1815 .
- one or more such processor and interfaces can be arranged on separate circuit boards that are coupled together.
- the printed circuit board 1815 can couple to other circuit boards via a card edge type connection, a connector-to-connector type connection, a cable connection, etc.
- the first media reading interface 1816 is configured to enable reading (e.g., by the processor) of the information stored in the storage device 1825 .
- the information read from the first connector arrangement 1820 can be transferred through the printed circuit board 1815 to a physical layer management network, e.g., network 101 of FIG. 1 , network 218 of FIG. 2 , etc.
- the second media reading interface 1818 is configured to enable reading (e.g., by the processor) of the information stored in the storage device 1835 .
- the information read from the second connector arrangement 1830 can be transferred through the printed circuit board 1815 or another circuit board to the physical layer management network.
- the storage devices 1825 , 1835 and the media reading interfaces 1816 , 1818 each comprise three (3) leads—a power lead, a ground lead, and a data lead.
- the three leads of the storage devices 1825 , 1835 come into electrical contact with three (3) corresponding leads of the media reading interfaces 1816 , 1818 when the corresponding media segment is inserted in the corresponding port.
- a two-line interface is used with a simple charge pump.
- additional leads can be provided (e.g., for potential future applications).
- the storage devices 1825 , 1835 and the media reading interfaces 1816 , 1818 may each include four (4) leads, five (5) leads, six (6) leads, etc.
- FIGS. 4-24 provide an example connector assembly implemented as a first bladed panel system 1000 suitable for mounting to a communications equipment rack.
- the bladed panel system 1000 includes a chassis 1010 configured to receive one or more communications blades 1100 .
- the bladed panel system 1000 is configured to connect segments of communications media 1200 carrying communications signals (e.g., signals 51 of FIG. 1 ).
- communications signals e.g., signals 51 of FIG. 1
- media segments 1200 routed to the rear of the chassis 1010 will be referred to herein as “incoming” media segments 1211 ( FIG. 17 ) and the media segments 1200 routed to the front of the chassis 1010 will be referred to herein as “outgoing” media segments 1212 ( FIG. 21 ).
- each media segment 1211 , 1212 may carry incoming signals, outgoing signals, or both.
- Each blade 1100 includes one or more communications couplers 1150 , each coupler defining one or more ports for connecting segments 1211 , 1212 of physical communications media, which carry communications signals.
- each coupler 1150 includes front and rear ports.
- the couplers 1150 on an example blade 1100 can include fiber optic adapters for connecting optical fibers.
- the couplers 1150 on another example blade 1100 can include communications sockets (e.g., electrical jacks) for connecting electrical plugs (e.g., terminating coaxial cables, twisted pair cables, etc.) to other electrical plugs (e.g., via corresponding sockets), terminated wires (e.g., via insulation displacement contacts), or printed circuit boards (e.g., via contact pins).
- the couplers 1150 on an example blade 1100 can include transceivers for managing wireless communications signals.
- the couplers 1150 on an example blade 1100 can include some combination of the above couplers or other types of communications couplers.
- the example bladed panel system 1000 includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality.
- the couplers 1150 on each blade 1100 include one or more media reading interfaces that are configured to read physical layer information stored on or in physical media segments 1200 .
- each coupler 1150 can include a media reading interface 1305 that communicatively connects to a storage device 1230 positioned on or in a physical media segment 1200 .
- FIGS. 5 and 6 show an example physical media segment 1200 implemented as a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC-type fiber optic connector) 1220 configured to terminate at least one optical fiber 1210 ( FIG. 4 ).
- FIG. 6 shows an example coupler 1150 implemented as a fiber optic adapter 1300 that is suitable for receiving media segments, such as the fiber optic connector 1220 of FIG. 5 .
- other types of connectors, plugs, adapters, and sockets can be utilized.
- the fiber optic connector 1220 includes a body 1221 enclosing an optical ferrule 1222 through which an optical fiber 1210 extends.
- the body 1221 also defines a depression or cavity 1224 in which a storage device 1230 can be positioned.
- the storage device 1230 includes memory circuitry arranged on a printed circuit board 1231 . Electrical contacts 1232 also are arranged on the printed circuit board for interaction with the media reading interface 1305 of the coupler 1150 .
- the storage device 1230 includes an EEPROM circuit arranged on the printed circuit board 1231 . In other embodiments, however, the storage device 1230 can include any suitable type of non-volatile memory.
- the memory circuitry is arranged on the non-visible side of the printed circuit board 1231 .
- the fiber optic adapter 1300 includes a body 1301 defining at least one port 1302 in which a sleeve 1303 is configured to receive and align the ferrules 1222 of two fiber optic connectors 1220 . Accordingly, communications data signals (e.g., signals 51 of FIG. 1 ) carried by an optical fiber terminated by a first of the fiber optic connectors 1220 can be transmitted to an optical fiber terminated by a second of the fiber optic connectors 1220 .
- communications data signals e.g., signals 51 of FIG. 1
- the fiber optic adapter 1300 can define a single port 1302 that is configured to optically couple together two fiber optic connectors 1220 .
- the fiber optic adapter 1300 can define multiple (e.g., two, three, four, eight, twelve, etc.) ports 1302 that are each configured to optically couple together two fiber optic connectors 1220 .
- each port 1302 is configured to communicatively couple together a fiber optic connector 1220 with a media converter (not shown) to convert the optical data signals into electrical data signals, wireless data signals, or other such data signals.
- the coupler 1150 includes an electrical termination block that is configured to receive punch-down wires, electrical plugs (e.g., for electrical jacks), or other types of electrical connectors.
- Each fiber optic adapter 1300 also includes at least one media reading interface 1305 to enable physical layer information to be read from the storage devices 1230 of the connectors 1220 mounted at the adapter 1300 .
- the media reading interface 1305 also can write physical layer information to the storage device 1230 (e.g., add new information, delete information, or change/update information).
- the adapter 1300 can include a media reading interface 1305 associated with each port 1302 .
- the adapter 1300 can include a media reading interface 1305 associated with each connection end of a port 1302 .
- each media reading interface 1305 is formed from one or more contact members 1310 .
- the adapter body 1301 defines slots 1304 configured to receive the one or more contact members 1310 (see FIG. 6 ).
- portions of the contact members 1310 extend into the port 1302 to engage the electrical contacts 1232 of the storage member 1230 mounted to the fiber optic connector 1220 .
- Other portions of the contact members 1310 are configured to engage contacts on a printed circuit board associated with (e.g., positioned on top of) the fiber optic adapter 1300 .
- a processor or other such equipment also can be electrically coupled to the printed circuit board. Accordingly, such a processor can communicate with the memory circuitry on the storage device 1230 via the contact members 1310 and the printed circuit board.
- the example blades 1100 shown in FIG. 7 each include a processor 1140 coupled to a printed circuit board (PCB) 1120 . Couplers 1150 also are mounted (or electrically connected) to the PCB 1120 . Accordingly, the processor 1140 on each blade 1100 can communicate with the media reading interfaces 1305 on the couplers 1150 to manage (e.g., read, store, update, process, etc.) any physical layer information associated with media segments inserted at the couplers 1150 . In some implementations, the blade processor 1140 does not modify, monitor, or otherwise interact with communications signals propagating over media segments received at the couplers 1150 . In certain implementations, the blade processor 1140 is isolated from the signals carried over the media segments. In other implementations, however, each blade 1100 can include an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) that can be controlled via a remote host in place of a processor 1140 .
- ASIC application-specific integrated circuit
- FIG. 7 shows two example communications blades 1100 exploded out from an example chassis 1010 .
- Each blade 1100 includes a base 1110 and a support member 1115 .
- the base 1110 defines a generally planar surface and the support member 1115 extends upwardly from a front end of the planar base 1110 .
- the base 1110 includes tabs 1105 defining a riding section 1106 and an engagement section 1107 ( FIG. 12 ).
- the communications couplers e.g., fiber optic adapters, electrical plugs, etc.
- 1150 mount to the support member 1115 of the blade 1100 (see FIG. 7 ).
- the PCB 1120 mounts to the base 1110 .
- the PCB 1120 mounts substantially parallel to the base 1110 .
- a central processing unit (e.g., a processor) 1140 also can be mounted to the base 1110 and electrically coupled to the PCB 1120 .
- the central processing unit 1140 mounts directly to the PCB 1120 as will be discussed in more detail herein.
- the chassis 1010 includes opposing side walls 1011 interconnected by opposing major surfaces 1012 (see FIGS. 4 and 7 ) to form a housing 1013 defining an interior 1014 .
- the chassis housing 1013 defines an open front and an open rear (see FIG. 7 ).
- one or both of the front and rear can be at least partially closed.
- a management module 1050 also can be mounted to the chassis 1010 to organize one or more of the media segments.
- Mounting members 1008 are mounted to the opposing side walls 1011 to facilitate mounting the chassis housing 1013 to a communications rack.
- the mounting members 1008 are L-shaped flanges having first sections that attach to the side walls 1011 and second sections that extend generally parallel with an open end face of the chassis housing 1013 .
- other types of mounting members 1008 can be used to mount the chassis housing 1013 to a rack.
- other types of mounting equipment can be used (e.g., to mount the chassis housing 1013 to shelves).
- Guides 1015 can be provided within the interior 1014 of the chassis housing 1013 .
- the guides 1015 enable the blades 1100 to move relative to the chassis housing 1013 .
- each blade 1100 is configured to move separately from the other blades 1100 .
- the blades 1100 are configured to travel along the connector insertion direction.
- the blades 1100 may be configured to travel in a forward-rearward direction.
- the guides 1015 enable each blade 1100 to move between at least a first position, in which the blade 1100 is positioned within the interior 1014 of the chassis housing 1013 , and a second position, in which at least a portion of the blade 1100 protrudes outwardly from the interior 1014 of the chassis housing 1013 .
- moving a blade 1100 to the second position can facilitate access to the communications couplers 1150 mounted to the blade 1100 .
- the guides 1015 are implemented as slides 1020 configured to facilitate sliding movement of the blades 1100 .
- FIGS. 8-10 illustrate one example slide member 1020 suitable for use as a guide 1015 .
- the slide member 1020 includes a body 1021 from which mounting pegs 1022 extend.
- the mounting pegs 1022 are configured to be received within openings defined in the sides 1011 of the chassis housing 1013 (see FIG. 11 ).
- the slide body 1021 defines a longitudinally extending slot or channel 1024 along a length of the slide body 1021 .
- the channel 1024 is sized and configured to receive at least a side edge of the planar base 1110 of the blade 1100 .
- the sides of the body 1021 defining the channel 1024 have ramped end portions 1025 to facilitate insertion of the base 1110 into the channel 1024 .
- the slides 1020 can be configured to facilitate lateral sliding of the blades 1100 .
- the slides 1020 are mounted to the opposing side walls 1011 of the chassis 1010 to enable the blades 1100 to slide forwardly and rearwardly relative to the chassis 1010 .
- the slides 1015 are mounted to the chassis housing 1013 in a generally parallel, vertically spaced configuration. In other implementations, however, the slides 1015 can be configured to enable the blades 1100 to slide side-to-side or diagonally. In still other implementations, other types of guides 1015 are used to facilitate other types of blade movement.
- the chassis housing 1013 and the blades 1100 are configured to inhibit removal of the blades 1100 from the chassis housing 1013 .
- the chassis housing 1013 can define one or more stops configured to interact with tabs 1105 on the blade 1100 to inhibit movement of the blade 1100 in one or more directions.
- the stops can be positioned on the side walls 1011 of the chassis 1010 adjacent the guides 1015 .
- at least one stop can be provided for each guide 1015 .
- each blade 1100 When a blade 1100 is inserted into one of the guides 1015 , an edge of the blade base 1110 slides into the channel 1024 of the slide 1015 .
- the riding section 1106 of each tab 1105 seats on top of the slide body 1021 and the engagement section 1107 extends upwardly from the riding section 1106 to interact with the stops positioned along the side wall 1011 of the chassis housing 1013 .
- each blade 1100 includes two tabs 1105 , each extending outwardly from the base 1110 at a rear of the blade 1100 .
- the tabs 1105 can extend outwardly from a front of the base 1110 or from somewhere between the front and rear of the base 1110 .
- the tabs 1105 can seat on the bottom of the slide body 1021 .
- an example chassis housing 1010 can include a forward stop 1017 and a rearward stop 1018 associated with each guide 1015 .
- the forward stop 1017 is configured to inhibit forward movement of a blade 1100 beyond a set pull-out distance to maintain the blade 1100 at least partially within the chassis housing 1010 (e.g., see FIG. 11 ). Accordingly, the blade 1100 can be partially pulled out of the chassis housing 1013 through the open front to provide access to components mounted on the blade 1100 .
- the forward stop 1017 is positioned to enable the blade 1100 to be pulled out of the chassis housing interior 1014 at least sufficient to provide access to the outgoing physical media segments 1212 received at a front of the communications couplers 1150 . Indeed, in some example implementations, the forward stop 1017 is positioned to enable the blade 1100 to be pulled out of the chassis housing interior 1014 at least sufficient to provide access to the incoming physical media segments 1211 received at a rear of the communications couplers 1150 (see FIG. 17 ). In some example implementations, the forward stop 1017 is positioned to enable the blade 1100 to be pulled out of the chassis housing interior 1014 at least sufficient to provide access to the processor 1140 mounted to the blade 1100 . In one example implementation, the blade 1100 can be pulled out about three (3) inches.
- the rearward stop 1018 is configured to inhibit rearward movement of the blade 1100 to inhibit the blade 1100 from exiting the chassis housing 1010 through the open rear of the chassis housing 1010 (e.g., see FIG. 12 ). Accordingly, the rear stop 1018 prevents the blade 1100 from being unintentionally pushed too far rearward and into the cable manager module 1050 . In some example implementations, the rearward stop 1018 is positioned to inhibit even a rear portion of the blade 1100 from exiting the interior 1014 of the chassis housing 1013 through the rear end of the chassis housing 1013 .
- the chassis housing 1013 is configured to enable insertion of the blades 1100 optionally through either the open front or through the open rear of the chassis housing 1013 .
- the chassis housing 1013 is configured to enable the user to choose whether to insert each blade 1100 from the front or from the rear.
- each stop 1017 , 1018 defines a ramp on one side and a shoulder on the other. To facilitate insertion, the ramp of the rearward stops 1018 faces the rear end of the chassis housing 1013 and the ramp of the forward stop 1017 faces the open front of the chassis housing 1013 .
- the blades 1100 can be secured in one or more positions.
- the chassis housing 1013 includes retention features to secure each blade 1100 in an extended position and/or a retracted position.
- the retention feature includes a dimple extending inwardly from the side walls 1011 .
- the retention feature includes a spring-mounted ball extending into the chassis 1010 .
- other types of retention features can be utilized.
- a blade 1100 When a blade 1100 is mounted to the chassis housing 1013 , the blade 1100 is communicatively connected to a network (e.g., see network 218 of FIG. 2 ) for management of any physical layer information associated with the physical media segments 1200 attached to the blade 1100 .
- a backplane 1400 ( FIG. 14 ) is mounted to the chassis housing 1013 to facilitate connecting the blade 1100 to the management network.
- the printed circuit boards 1120 on each blade 1100 communicatively couple (e.g., electrically couple) to a printed circuit board 1410 on the backplane 1400 via connector ports 1430 .
- the backplane 1400 also includes a network port 1440 via which the backplane 1400 connects to the network ( FIG. 13 ).
- the backplane 1400 is mounted at the open rear of the chassis housing 1013 .
- FIG. 13 shows a rear view of the chassis housing 1013 in which multiple blades 1100 have been mounted. A rear portion of a backplane 1400 to which the blades 1100 are connected is visible.
- the backplane 1400 includes a bracket 1420 that attaches the printed circuit board 1410 to the chassis housing 1013 .
- the network port 1440 is mounted to a rear side of the printed circuit board 1410 of the backplane 1400 .
- the network port 1440 includes a Power Over Ethernet electrical socket configured to receive DC power source input from the network. In other implementations, however, other types of ports 1440 can be utilized.
- FIGS. 14-16 illustrate one example implementation of connecting blades 1100 to a backplane 1400 .
- the blades are represented by panels 1100 ′ without differentiating the PCB 1120 from the base 1110 .
- the guides 1015 are shows mounted to a generic side wall. Accordingly, details pertaining to the connection between the blades and the backplane 1400 are visible.
- a blade can be connected to the backplane 1400 using an electrical cable 1450 extending from a first end to a second end.
- a first electrical connector 1452 is attached to and terminates the first end of the cable 1450 and a second electrical connector 1454 is attached to and terminates the second end of the cable 1450 .
- Each of the connectors 1452 , 1454 is configured to plug into a mating socket on a printed circuit board.
- the first connector 1452 is configured to plug into (and electrically communicate with) the printed circuit board 1120 on the blade 1100 .
- the second connector 1454 is configured to plug into (and electrically communicate with) the printed circuit board 1410 on the backplane 1400 .
- the cable 1450 is sufficiently long to form an at least partial loop (e.g., half loop) 1455 at a location between the first and second connectors 1452 , 1454 .
- an at least partial loop e.g., half loop
- the second connector 1454 remains attached to the backplane 1400 . Accordingly, the PCBs 1120 mounted to the blades 1100 (and components mounted thereto, e.g., the processor 1140 ) can remain coupled to the data management network even when the blades 1100 are moved relative to the chassis housing 1013 .
- a user wants to add, remove, or replace a physical media segment 1200 on a blade 1100 , then the user can slide the blade 1100 to a forward (i.e., or rearward) extended position to access the desired segment 1200 , coupler port, or other component (e.g., processor 1140 ) without disconnecting the remaining components on the blade 1100 from the data management network.
- a forward i.e., or rearward
- the blade 1100 can slide the blade 1100 to a forward (i.e., or rearward) extended position to access the desired segment 1200 , coupler port, or other component (e.g., processor 1140 ) without disconnecting the remaining components on the blade 1100 from the data management network.
- moving the blade 1100 to the extended position and removing a media segment attached to one of the couplers 1150 does not disconnect the storage devices 1230 of the other physical media segments 1200 mounted to the blade 1100 from the network.
- the processors 1140 mounted to the blades 1100 can be added, removed, or replaced without completely removing the blade 1100 from the chassis 1010 or disconnecting the PCB 1120 from the network.
- a blade processor 1140 and the PCB section to which it attaches can be accessed by sliding the blade 1100 from the first blade position within the chassis interior 1014 to the second blade position in which a front of the blade 1100 extends through the open front of the chassis 1010 (e.g., see FIG. 17 ).
- the blade processor 1140 includes a connector or socket that is configured to mate with a complementary socket or connector on the blade PCB 1120 .
- the blade processor 1140 can be secured to the blade PCB 1120 using one or more mezzanine connectors 1142 .
- the blade processor 1140 is secured to the blade PCB 1120 using two mezzanine connectors 1142 .
- the blade processor 1140 can be secured to the PCB 1120 using other types of connectors (e.g., contact pins).
- each blade processor 1140 includes a display arrangement 1145 .
- each blade processor 1140 includes at least one light emitting diode (LED) 1146 .
- a blade processor 1140 can actuate an LED 1146 to identify the processor 1140 .
- a user can be directed to a particular blade 1100 by actuating the LED 1146 on the processor 1140 .
- a blade processor 1140 can actuate any additional LEDs 1146 on the blade 1100 to indicate a status (e.g., an error) of the blade 1100 , of the processor 1140 , or of any of the physical segments 1200 attached to the blade 1100 .
- each chassis 1010 is configured to receive a first blade 1100 having a master processor 1140 and one or more additional blades 1100 having a slave processor 1140 .
- Each slave processor is configured to read any physical layer data through the corresponding media reading interfaces at the direction of the master processor.
- the master processor coordinates the slave processors and provides the network connection for the chassis 1010 .
- the master processor also includes a user port 1144 through which a user can obtain physical layer information from the master processor and/or can write physical layer data to the master processor for distribution to one or more physical media storage devices.
- a user port 1144 is shown in FIG. 18 .
- the user port 1144 is a USB connector port.
- other types of ports e.g., ports suitable for connecting to a cell phone, Smartphone, PDA, laptop, or other mobile computing device
- only the blade 1100 having the master processor includes multiple LEDs 1146 , which provide status indicia for the entire chassis.
- each blade 1100 is configured to facilitate media segment management and tracking.
- some example implementations of a blade 1100 include a fascia 1116 fastened (e.g., screwed, welded, riveted, etc.) to the support member 1115 of the blade 1100 .
- the fascia 1116 includes indicia for identifying particular ones of the couplers 1150 or sets of the couplers 1150 (e.g., duplex couplers).
- each fascia 1116 includes a number printed above each coupler port. In other implementations, other types of indicia (letters, colors, etc. also can be used).
- fascia 1116 can include segment management structures.
- a fascia 1116 can include retention tabs or fingers 1118 extending forwardly of the fascia 1116 .
- the fingers 1118 are configured to route communications cables (e.g., optical fibers, optical fiber cables, electrical conductors, electrical cables, etc.) away from the couplers 1150 along a cable routing path (e.g., see FIG. 21 ).
- a management module 1050 can be mounted to the chassis 1010 to organize one or more of the media segments.
- Example management modules 1050 have a storage area 1055 and segment ports 1057 .
- the storage area 1055 is configured to store any excess length of one or more physical media segments.
- the storage area 1055 enables the blades 1100 to be moved relative to the chassis 1010 without unplugging incoming cables 1211 from the blades 1100 .
- slack cable length may tighten or loosen around cable spools 1056 positioned at the storage area 1055 as the blade 1100 is moved forward and rearward relative to the chassis 1010 .
- the segment ports 1057 are configured to route physical media segments onto and off the management module 1050 .
- the management module 1050 is attached to a rear side of the chassis 1010 . Accordingly, the management module 1050 is configured to receive and direct media segments plugged into the rear sides of the couplers 1150 . For example, each physical media segment plugged into the rear side of the couplers 1150 can be routed rearwardly from the couplers 1150 , through the storage area 1055 , and out the segment ports 1057 .
- the management module 1050 includes a base 1051 having opposing side walls 1052 .
- the base 1051 can include a rearward lip 1060 to aid in retaining the physical media segments on the module 1050 .
- Spools 1056 are mounted at the storage area 1055 , which is located on the base 1051 .
- Grommets 1058 and seals 1059 are arranged at the segment ports 1057 , which are located on the side walls 1052 .
- the management module 1050 is configured to removably attach to the chassis housing 1013 .
- the side walls 1052 of the module 1050 include support flanges 1053 and fastening brackets 1054 .
- the support flanges 1053 define L-shaped members, which are oriented in an outwardly (sideways) facing direction. In other example embodiments, the module support flange 1053 also could be oriented in a downwardly pointing direction.
- the fastening brackets 1054 define through-holes.
- the chassis housing 1013 includes complementary features including a support flange 1003 and a fastening bracket 1004 ( FIG. 22 ).
- the support flange 1003 of the chassis housing 1013 is oriented in an upwardly pointing direction. In other example embodiments, the chassis support flange 1003 also could be oriented in an outwardly (sideways) facing direction.
- the fastening brackets 1004 define through-holes.
- the support flanges 1053 of the management module 1050 is seated on the support flange 1003 of the chassis housing 1013 .
- Engaging the support flanges 1053 , 1003 with each other positions the brackets 1054 , 1004 to align the through-holes.
- a fastener e.g., a screw, a bolt, a rivet, etc.
- the management module 1050 can be welded, glued, or otherwise secured to the chassis 1010 .
- One or more chasses 1010 are provided, for example, on an equipment rack.
- One or more blades 1100 are installed in each chassis 1010 .
- Circuit boards on each blade 1100 may be connected to a backplane 1400 of the chassis 1010 (e.g., by sliding the blade into the chassis 1010 towards the backplane 2014 ).
- a processor 1140 on each blade 1100 is connected to the backplane 1400 via the circuit boards.
- Incoming cables 1211 are connected to each blade 1100 after the blade 1100 has been inserted into the chassis 1010 .
- a technician may secure the incoming cables 1211 at the management region 1050 at the rear of the chassis 1010 .
- the incoming cables 1211 include optical fibers separately terminated by a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC-type connector).
- the incoming cables 1211 include one or more multi-fiber cables, each of which is terminated by a multi-fiber connector (e.g., an MPO-type connector).
- the technician plugs connectorized ends of the incoming cables 1211 into the rear ports of the blade 1100 .
- the technician may feed connectorized ends of the incoming cables 1211 from the rear of the chassis 1010 , over the base 1110 of the blade 1100 , toward the adapters 1151 .
- the technician may subsequently access the adapters 1151 through an open top of the blade 1100 at the front of the chassis 1010 (see FIG. 17 ).
- the technician may access the adapters 1151 with the blade 1100 in the first or second extended position.
- the technician can unplug a dust plug from one of the rear ports of the adapters 1151 and insert one of the connectorized ends into the rear port from the front of the chassis 1010 .
- outgoing cables 1212 can be installed at the front ports of the blade 1100 without disconnecting the blade 1100 from the backplane 1400 .
- the outgoing cables 1212 include optical fibers separately terminated by a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC-type connector).
- the outgoing cables 1212 include one or more multi-fiber cables, each of which is terminated by a multi-fiber connector (e.g., an MPO-type connector).
- the technician may plug the connectors 1220 of the outgoing cables 1212 into the front ports of the adapters 1151 when the blade 1100 is in the closed or first extended position.
- the connectors 1220 of the outgoing fibers 1212 may be plugged into the front adapter ports while the blade 1100 is in any desired position.
- the technician also routes the fibers 1220 through the retention fingers 1118 at the front of the blade 1100 .
- FIGS. 25-44 provide another example connector assembly implemented as a bladed panel system 2000 suitable for mounting to a communications equipment rack.
- the bladed panel system 2000 includes a chassis 2010 configured to receive one or more communications blades 2100 .
- the bladed panel system 2000 is configured to connect segments of communications media 2200 carrying communications signals (e.g., signals 51 of FIG. 1 ).
- communications signals e.g., signals 51 of FIG. 1
- media segments 2200 routed to the rear of the chassis 2010 will be referred to herein as “incoming” media segments 2210 ( FIG. 40 ) and the media segments 2200 routed to the front of the chassis 2010 will be referred to herein as “outgoing” media segments 2220 ( FIG. 41 ).
- each media segment 2210 , 2220 may carry incoming signals, outgoing signals, or both.
- the chassis housing 2010 is substantially similar to the chassis housing 1010 shown in FIGS. 4 and 7 , including opposing side walls 2011 interconnected by opposing major surfaces 2012 to form a housing 2013 defining an interior 2014 .
- the chassis housing 2013 defines an open front and an open rear (see FIG. 27 ). In other implementations, one or both of the front and rear can be at least partially closed.
- the chassis housing 2013 includes mounting members 2008 and guides 2015 that enable the blades 2100 to move relative to the chassis housing 2013 .
- the blades 2100 may be configured to move along a connector insertion direction (e.g., forwardly and rearwardly).
- the chassis housing 2013 also includes forward stops 2017 and rearward stops 2018 to inhibit removal of the blades 2100 from the chassis housing 2013 .
- a management module 2050 ( FIG. 26 ) also can be mounted to the chassis 2010 to organize one or more of the media segments.
- the management module 2050 also is configured to enable the blades 2100 to be moved relative to the chassis 2010 without unplugging incoming cables 2210 from the blades 2100 .
- slack cable length may tighten or loosen around cable spools 2056 positioned at a storage area 2055 of the management module 2050 as the blade 2100 is moved forward and rearward relative to the chassis 2010 .
- the management module 2050 may be substantially similar to the management module 1050 shown in FIGS. 22-24 , including a base 2051 having opposing side walls 2052 .
- the base 2051 can include a rearward lip 2060 to aid in retaining the physical media segments on the module 2050 .
- Spools 2056 are mounted at the storage area 2055 , which is located on the base 2051 .
- Grommets 2058 and seals 2059 are arranged at the segment ports 2057 , which are located at the rear of the management module 2050 .
- the example bladed panel system 2000 includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality.
- the chassis 2010 includes a backplane 2400 to facilitate connecting the blades 2100 to a data management network (e.g., an Internet Protocol network).
- the backplane 2400 includes a printed circuit board 2410 including connector ports 2430 , via which blades 2100 connect to the backplane 2400 , and a network port (not shown) via which the backplane 2400 connects to the network.
- the printed circuit board 2410 is supported by bracket 2420 , which couples to the chassis housing 2010 .
- FIGS. 28-30 illustrate one example implementation of a blade module 2100 .
- Each blade 2100 includes one or more communications couplers 2150 , each coupler 2150 defining one or more ports for connecting segments of physical communications media, which carry communications signals.
- the couplers 2150 include media reading interfaces that are configured to read physical layer information from storage devices on or in a connectorized media segments plugged into the couplers 2150 .
- Adapter 1300 of FIG. 6 is one example implementation of a coupler 2150 .
- Connector 1220 of FIG. 5 is one example implementation of a connectorized end 1220 of a media segment. Additional examples of couplers and connectorized media segments are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/303,961; 61/413,828; 61/437,504; and U.S. Pat. No. 8,690,593 incorporated by reference above.
- the blade 2100 includes a base 2110 configured to ride within the guides 2015 of the chassis housing 2010 .
- a support member 2115 extends upwardly from a front end of the base 2110 .
- Communications couplers (e.g., fiber optic adapters, electrical plugs, etc.) 2150 mount to the support member 2115 .
- a printed circuit board (PCB) arrangement 2120 which is discussed in greater detail herein, and a processor (e.g., a microprocessor) 2140 also are mounted to the blade 2100 .
- the blade processor 2140 does not modify, monitor, or otherwise interact with communications signals propagating over media segments received at the couplers 2150 .
- the blade processor 2140 is isolated from the signals carried over the media segments. Rather, the blade processor 2140 is configured to manage data signals stored in memory devices of the media segments.
- each blade 2100 includes outwardly extending tabs 2105 that are configured to ride within the chassis guides 2015 and to interact with the stops 2017 , 2018 .
- the tabs 2105 can define a riding section 2106 and an engagement section 2107 that function the same as the riding and engagement sections 1106 , 1107 of tabs 1105 discussed above.
- the base 2110 also can include an outwardly extending tab 2108 to facilitate moving the blade 2100 along the guides 2015 .
- the tab 2108 can define a forwardly extending handle with which a user can manipulate movement of the blade 2100 .
- each blade 2100 is configured to move separately from the other blades 2100 .
- the guides 2015 enable each blade 2100 to move between at least a first position, in which the blade 2100 is positioned within the interior 2014 of the chassis housing 2013 (e.g., FIG. 31 ), and a second position, in which at least a portion of the blade 2100 protrudes outwardly from the interior 2014 of the chassis housing 2013 (e.g., FIG. 32 ).
- the guides 2015 are implemented as slides configured to facilitate sliding movement of the blades 2100 . In the example shown, the slides 2015 are mounted to the opposing side walls 2011 of the chassis 2010 to enable the blades 2100 to slide forwardly and rearwardly relative to the chassis 2010 .
- the blades 2100 can be secured in one or more positions. Securing a blade 2100 in a particular position can facilitate access to the communications couplers 2150 and/or a processor 2140 mounted to the blade 2100 . For example, securing the blade 2100 in position inhibits the removal of the blade 2100 when adding, removing, or replacing blade couplers 2150 and/or the blade processor 2140 .
- the chassis housing 2013 includes retention features (e.g., as described above with respect to chassis housing 1013 ) to secure each blade 2100 in an extended position and/or a retracted position.
- the communications couplers 2150 of each blade can remain coupled to the data management network (e.g., via the backplane 2400 ) even when the blade 2100 is moved relative to the chassis housing 2013 (e.g., to a position in which at least part of the blade 2100 extends outwardly from the chassis interior 2014 ).
- the communications couplers 2150 are connected to the backplane 2400 via the PCB arrangement 2120 of the blade and the PCB 2020 of the chassis.
- the PCB arrangement 2120 of each blade 2100 can include at least a first printed circuit board 2122 and a second printed circuit board 2124 .
- the communications couplers 2150 are coupled to first printed circuit board 2122 and the backplane 2400 is coupled to the second printed circuit board 2124 .
- the second printed circuit board 2124 is connected to the backplane 2400 via a card edge connection 2125 ( FIG. 29 ).
- the second printed circuit board 2124 can be connected to the backplane 2400 via other types of connections (e.g., a plug/socket connection, a cable connection, a wireless connection, etc.).
- the printed circuit boards 2122 , 2124 are configured to move relative to each other.
- the second printed circuit board 2124 is configured to slide within a guide arrangement 2160 mounted to the blade base 2110 .
- the guide arrangement 2160 includes opposing guides 2161 bordered by stops 2162 at opposite ends.
- the second printed circuit board 2124 includes arms 2127 that are configured to slide within channels 2163 defined by the guides 2161 .
- the stops 2162 at the ends of the guides 2161 inhibit removal of the second printed circuit board 2124 from the guides 2161 .
- the first printed circuit board 2122 is connected to the second printed circuit board 2124 using an electrical cable 2450 , which extends from a first end to a second end.
- a first electrical connector 2452 is attached to and terminates the first end of the cable 2450 and a second electrical connector 2454 is attached to and terminates the second end of the cable 2450 .
- the first connector 2452 is electrically coupled (e.g., via contact pins) to the first printed circuit board 2122 and the second connector 2452 is electrically coupled (e.g., via contact pins) to the second printed circuit board 2124 .
- the cable 2450 is sufficiently long to enable the second printed circuit board 2124 to move along the guide channels 2163 relative to the first printed circuit board 2122 without disconnecting from the first printed circuit board 2122 .
- the cable 2450 can form a half loop 2455 at a location between the first and second connectors 2452 , 2454 .
- the cable 2450 straightens out to extend over the distance between the printed circuit boards 2122 , 2124 .
- the guide arrangement 2160 can be configured so that the second printed circuit board 2124 is located at the first end of the guides 2161 when the blade 2100 is located in the first position within the interior 2014 of the chassis 2010 .
- the guide arrangement 2160 also can be configured so that the second printed circuit board 2124 is located at the second end of the guides 2161 when the blade 2100 is located in the second position protruding outwardly from the interior 2014 of the chassis 2010 .
- the first connector 2452 of the corresponding cable 2450 moves with the blade 2100 .
- the second connector 2454 remains attached to the backplane 2400 .
- a user wants to add, remove, or replace a physical media segment 1200 on a blade 2100 , then the user can slide the blade 2100 to a forwardly extended position to access the desired segment 1200 or coupler port without disconnecting the storage devices 1230 of the remaining physical media segments 1200 mounted to the blade 2100 from the data management network.
- the amount of force necessary to overcome the retention feature 2016 is sufficient to overcome the connection between the second printed circuit board 2124 and the backplane 2400 .
- the force necessary to overcome the retention feature 2016 is sufficient to disconnect a card edge connection between the second printed circuit board 2124 and the backplane 2400 .
- moving a blade 2100 to a position at least partially outside the chassis 2010 facilitates access to components on the blade 2100 .
- moving the blade to such an extended position can facilitate access to a processor 2140 mounted to the blade.
- the processors 2140 mounted to the blades 2100 can be added, removed, or replaced without completely removing the blade 2100 from the chassis 2010 .
- the blade processor 2140 includes a connector or socket that is configured to mate with a complementary socket or connector on the first printed circuit board 2122 of the blade 2100 .
- the blade processor 2140 can be secured to the first printed circuit board 2124 using a snap-fit connection (see FIGS. 33 and 36 ).
- the blade processor 2140 can be secured to the first printed circuit board 2122 using other types of connectors (e.g., cable, mezzanine, etc.).
- the backplane 2400 of the chassis 2010 connects to the data network via a chassis processor 2600 .
- the chassis processor 2600 functions as the interface between the panel system 2000 and the data management network.
- the chassis processor 2600 manages the blade processors 2140 .
- the chassis processor 2600 can instruct each of the blade processors 2140 to determine which communications couplers 2150 have media segments inserted therein, to obtain physical layer information from the media segments, and to forward the physical layer information to the chassis processor 2600 for storage and/or transmission to the data network.
- the chassis processor 2600 has a master/slave relationship with the blade processors 2140 .
- the chassis processor 2600 is configured to mount to the chassis housing 2013 .
- the chassis processor 2600 can mount to a support structure 2070 extending outwardly from a top, rear of the chassis housing 2013 (e.g., see FIG. 35 ).
- the support structure 2070 includes a top 2071 and side walls 2072 defining an interior that is sized and configured to receive the chassis processor 2600 .
- Support flanges 2073 which extend outwardly from the side walls 2072 , define through openings 2074 .
- the chassis processor 2600 includes a base 2610 and a fascia 2612 extending generally perpendicular to the base 2610 .
- the fascia 2612 defines openings through which fasteners 2615 (e.g., set screws) can extend.
- the fasteners 2615 also extend through the openings defined in the support flanges 2073 of the support structure 2070 to secure the chassis processor 2600 to the support structure 2070 .
- the chassis processor 2600 includes a printed circuit board 2620 mounted to the base 2610 (e.g., using fasteners 2614 ).
- the printed circuit board 2620 of the chassis processor 2600 is configured to connect to the printed circuit board 2410 of the backplane 2400 (e.g., via a card edge connection, via a plug/socket connection, via a cable connection, etc.).
- Memory e.g., an EEPROM chip
- Physical layer information obtained by the communications couplers 2150 can be stored in the memory of the chassis processor 2600 .
- the fascia 2612 of the chassis processor 2600 includes one or more indicators (e.g., light emitting diodes) 2650 (e.g., see FIG. 35 ).
- the indicators 2650 can display status information (e.g., error information, power information, network connection information, etc.).
- a first network port 2630 is electrically connected to the printed circuit board 2620 of the chassis processor 2600 .
- the first network port 2630 defines an RJ jack configured to receive an electrical plug 2232 terminating a PLI cable 2230 ( FIG. 36 ) connecting the panel system 2000 to the data network (e.g., network 218 of FIG. 2 , network 101 of FIG. 1 , etc.).
- the first network port 2630 can define a USB socket or other type of cable port.
- a second port 2640 also can be connected to the printed circuit board 2620 .
- the second port 2640 defines a DC power socket.
- the second port 2640 can define any suitable type of power cable port.
- the second port 2640 provides an alternative port by which the panel system 2000 can receive power from an auxiliary power source (e.g., when Power Over Ethernet is not available).
- the chassis 2010 can include one or more data ports 2730 (e.g., see FIG. 37 ) configured to enable connecting a mobile device to the storage devices on any media segments plugged into the communications couplers 2150 .
- the data port 2730 enables a user to connect (e.g., using a communications cable) a mobile device (e.g., a handheld scanner, a cell phone, a Smartphone, a PDA, a laptop, etc.) to the panel system 2000 .
- a mobile device e.g., a handheld scanner, a cell phone, a Smartphone, a PDA, a laptop, etc.
- a user can download physical layer information about the media segments connected to the communications couplers 2150 of the panel system 2000 from the chassis processor 2600 to memory on the mobile device.
- the user also can use the mobile device to manipulate (e.g., add, delete, and/or change) the physical layer information stored on the chassis processor 2600 .
- the user can upload new and/or updated physical layer information (e.g., test results) from the mobile device to the chassis processor 2600 .
- the user can upload physical layer information pertaining to media segments that are connected to the communications couplers 2150 but are not associated with storage devices (i.e., do not otherwise have PLI and PLM functionality).
- each blade processor 2140 defines such a data port 2730 .
- the chassis 2010 is configured to receive a status board 2700 defining such a data port (see FIG. 37 ).
- the status board 2700 can slide into the chassis housing 2013 from a front of the chassis 2010 .
- the status board 2700 includes a fascia 2720 mounted to one end of a printed circuit board 2710 .
- the fascia 2720 defines openings 2722 through which fasteners 2725 can extend to be received in openings 2704 defined by mounting tabs 2702 of the chassis housing 2013 (see FIGS. 37 and 38 ).
- the printed circuit board 2710 slides along guides mounted within the chassis housing 2013 .
- the status board 2700 can be otherwise secured to the chassis 2010 .
- the data port 2730 mounts to the fascia 2720 and electrically connects to the printed circuit board 2710 .
- the other end of the printed circuit board 2710 is configured to connect to the printed circuit board 2410 of the backplane 2400 .
- the printed circuit board 2710 includes a card edge connector 2715 that plugs into the printed circuit board 2410 of the backplane 2400 .
- the printed circuit board 2710 can connect to the backplane 2400 using a different type of electrical connector. Accordingly, a mobile device (i.e., as discussed above) can be plugged into the panel system 2000 and/or data network from the front of the chassis 2010 .
- Additional components can be mounted to the status board 2700 .
- indicators e.g., LEDs
- the LEDs 2726 can be positioned on the fascia 2720 .
- the LEDs 2726 can display status information (e.g., error information, power information, network connection information, etc.) for the chassis 2010 .
- An indicator 2415 on a front of each blade processor 2140 can identify or display a status for the individual blade 2100 .
- a switch i.e., or other input mechanism
- the input mechanism 2728 can include a momentary pushbutton signal to the chassis processor 2600 .
- the input mechanism 2728 can include a fixed position slide or a pushbutton switch for particular signal configuration indications to the chassis processor 2600 .
- a fascia 2116 can be mounted to the support structure 2115 of each blade 2100 .
- the fascia 2116 includes indicia for identifying particular ones of the communications couplers 2150 or sets of the couplers 2150 (e.g., duplex couplers, quad couplers, etc.).
- each fascia 2116 includes a number printed above each coupler port.
- each fascia 2116 includes a number printed above each predefined set of coupler ports. In other implementations, however, other types of indicia (letters, colors, etc.) can be used.
- the fascia 2116 defines a stepped portion 2117 that is sized and configured to accommodate the blade processor 2140 so that the indicator 2145 on the blade processor 2140 is visible from the front.
- the stepped portion 2117 of each blade fascia 2116 also is sized and configured to accommodate the status board 2700 so that the fascia 2720 of the status board 2700 is visible from the front of the chassis 2010 . Accordingly, the data port 2730 and indicators 2726 are accessible to a user (see FIG. 39 ).
- fascia 2116 can include segment management structures.
- a fascia 2116 can include retention members or fingers 2118 extending forwardly of the fascia 2116 (see FIG. 40 ).
- the fingers 2118 are configured to route communications cables (e.g., optical fibers, optical fiber cables, electrical conductors, electrical cables, etc.) away from the communications couplers 2150 along a cable routing path (e.g., see FIG. 41 ).
- each retention member 2118 includes opposing retaining members 2181 interconnected by side members 2182 to define a through passage.
- a rib 2183 extends between the retaining members 2181 within the through passage to define a cable routing passage 2185 ( FIG. 40 ).
- One of the retaining members 2181 defines a slot 2184 leading to the cable routing passage 2185 .
- the slot 2184 is defined in a top retaining member 2181 of each retention member 2118 .
- the slot 2184 can be defined in one of the side members 2182 .
- the slot 2184 can be closed by a flexible or removable bridge.
- One or more segments of physical communications media can be routed from the communications couplers 2150 , through the cable routing passages 2185 defined by the retaining members 2181 , to the sides of the chassis 2010 .
- the outermost retention members 2118 have retaining members 2181 ′ that define ramped or curved inner surfaces to facilitate routing the media segments.
- the curved inner surfaces of the retaining members 2181 ′ can inhibit excessive bending of optical media segments.
- the management module 2050 can be secured to a rear side of the chassis housing 2010 without components protruding outwardly from the management module 2050 . Having a substantially planar interface between the chassis housing 2010 and the management module 2050 on each side can facilitate insertion of the panel system 2000 into an equipment rack or other suitable support structure.
- the management module 2050 includes retaining members 2062 that are configured to slide over a tab 2005 of the chassis housing 2010 .
- the tab 2005 defines an opening 2006 into which a lug 2064 of the management module 2050 can snap to secure the components together (see FIG. 44 ).
- the tabs 2062 and lug 2064 are punched out from the side walls 2052 of the management module 2050 .
- One or more chasses 2010 are provided, for example, on an equipment rack.
- One or more blades 2100 are installed in each chassis 2010 .
- a circuit board arrangement 2120 on each blade 2100 may be connected to a backplane 2410 of the chassis 2010 (e.g., by sliding the blade 2100 rearwardly into the chassis 2010 ).
- a second circuit board 2124 on each blade 2100 may be connected to the backplane 2410 (e.g., via a card-edge connection, via a connector, etc.).
- the processor 2140 on each blade 2100 is connected to the backplane 2410 via the circuit board arrangement 2120 .
- Incoming cables 2210 are connected to each blade 2100 after the blade 2100 has been inserted into the chassis 2010 .
- a technician may secure (e.g., using a cable tie) the incoming cables 2210 to the management structures (cable spools, cable clamp, fanout arrangement, or other securement structure) of the management region 2050 .
- the technician plugs connectorized ends of the incoming cables 2210 into the rear ports of the blade 2100 .
- the incoming cables 2210 include optical fibers separately terminated by a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC-type connector).
- the incoming cables 2210 include one or more multi-fiber cables, each of which is terminated by a multi-fiber connector (e.g., an WO-type connector).
- the technician routes the connectorized ends of the incoming cables 2210 to the rear ports of the blade 2100 .
- the technician feeds connectorized ends of the incoming cables 2210 from the rear of the chassis 2010 , over the base 2110 of the blade 2100 , toward the front adapters 2151 .
- the technician plugs the connectorized ends of the incoming cables 2210 into the rear ports from the rear of the chassis 2010 .
- the technician may subsequently access the adapters 2151 through an open top of the blade 2100 at the front of the chassis 2010 .
- the technician may access the adapters 2151 with the blade 2100 in the first or second extended position.
- the technician can unplug a dust plug from one of the rear ports of the front adapters 2151 and insert one of the connectorized ends into the rear port from the front of the chassis 2010 (see FIG. 40 ).
- outgoing cables 2220 can be installed at the front ports of the blade 2100 without disconnecting the blade 2100 from the backplane 2410 .
- the technician may plug the connectorized ends of the outgoing cables 2220 into the front ports of the adapters 2151 when the blade 2100 is in the closed or first extended position.
- the connectorized ends of the outgoing fibers 2220 may be plugged into the front adapter ports while the blade 2100 is in any desired position.
- the technician also routes the outgoing cables 2220 through the retention fingers 2118 at the front of the blade 2100 .
- FIGS. 45-150 provide other example connector assemblies implemented as bladed panel systems 3000 suitable for mounting to communications equipment racks, cabinets, or other structures.
- the bladed panel system 3000 includes a chassis 3010 configured to receive one or more communications blades 3100 .
- the bladed panel system 3000 is configured to connect segments of communications media 3200 carrying communications signals (e.g., signals S 1 of FIG. 1 ).
- the example bladed panel system 3000 includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality.
- the bladed panel system 3000 is configured to read physical layer information (e.g., signals S 2 of FIG. 1 ) from one or more of the media segments 3200 .
- each blade 3100 includes one or more media couplers 3150 that are configured to connect together media segments 3200 and to read physical layer information from the media segments 3200 .
- the media couplers 3150 may connect segments 3200 received at a rear of the chassis 3010 with segments 3200 received at a front of the chassis 3010 .
- media segments 3200 routed to the rear of the chassis 3010 will be referred to herein as “incoming” media segments 3210 and the media segments 3200 routed to the front of the chassis 3010 will be referred to herein as “outgoing” media segments 3220 .
- each set of media segments 3200 may carry incoming signals, outgoing signals, or both.
- the chassis 3010 is similar to the chassis housings 1010 , 2010 shown in FIGS. 7 and 27 , including opposing side walls 3011 interconnected by opposing major surfaces 3012 to form a housing 3013 defining an interior 3014 .
- the chassis housing 3013 defines an open front and an open rear. In other implementations, one or both of the front and rear can be at least partially closed.
- the chassis housing 3013 includes a grounding port 3007 at which a grounding wire or cable may enter the chassis housing 3013 .
- the chassis housing 3013 includes mounting brackets 3008 to secure the chassis housing 3013 to the rack, poles, or other structures.
- the mounting brackets 3008 extend along only a portion of the side walls 3011 of the chassis 3010 (e.g., see FIG. 77 ).
- the mounting brackets 3008 extend along a majority of the side walls 3011 of the chassis 3010 (see FIGS. 45-47 ).
- the brackets 3008 are L-shaped. In other implementations, however, other types of mounting brackets may be used.
- the interior 3014 of the chassis housing 3013 includes guides 3015 that enable the blades 3100 to move (e.g., slide forwardly and rearwardly) relative to the chassis housing 3013 .
- the guides 3015 may enable the blades to each move from a closed (retracted) position to one or more extended positions relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the guides 3015 are substantially the same as guiding slots 1020 of FIGS. 8-10 . In other implementations, however, other types of guides can be used.
- the chassis 3010 is configured to receive a status board 3070 ( FIG. 45 ).
- the status board 3070 includes a fascia 3071 mounted to one end of a printed circuit board (e.g., see status board 2700 of FIG. 37 ).
- the status board 3070 also may include a base to protect the printed circuit board.
- the printed circuit board slides along guides mounted within the chassis housing 3013 .
- the status board 3070 can slide into the guides from a front of the chassis 3010 .
- the status board 3070 can be otherwise secured to the chassis 3010 .
- the fascia 3171 of the status board 3070 defines openings 3172 through which fasteners can extend to secure the status board 3070 to the chassis housing 3013 (see FIG. 45 ).
- Indicators e.g., LEDs
- the LEDs 3076 can display status information (e.g., error information, power information, network connection information, etc.) for the chassis 3010 .
- a switch i.e., or other input mechanism also may positioned on the fascia 3071 .
- FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of the chassis housing 3013 showing various example management structures.
- FIGS. 77-79 also show rear perspective views of chassis 3010 with various management structures.
- management structures include cable retention clamps 3030 , cable retention fingers 3034 ( FIG. 79 ), and cable fanouts 3035 ( FIG. 77 ).
- other types of management structures e.g., spools, radius limiters, cable ties, etc. may be utilized at the rear of the chassis 3010 .
- cable retention clamps 3030 are shown attached to the chassis housing 3013 on the right side of the drawing.
- the example cable retention clamps 3030 include compression inserts 3031 through which media segments 3200 can be routed.
- the insert 3031 may include a slot to facilitate routing of the media segments 3200 through the insert 3031 .
- the cable retention clamps 3030 also include compression members 3032 that mount to either side of the insert 3031 to clamp down on the insert 3031 .
- the cable clamps 3030 may be attached to the chassis housing 3013 with brackets 3033 .
- FIG. 47 An example fanout arrangement 3035 is shown in FIG. 47 attached to the chassis housing 3013 on the left side of the drawing.
- the fanout arrangement 3035 includes a mounting panel 3036 on which one or more fanouts 3037 can be installed.
- one or more fanouts 3037 can include openings through which pins 3038 may extend to mount the fanouts 3037 to the panel 3036 .
- Multiple fanouts 3037 can be stacked onto one set of pins 3038 .
- Each fanout 3037 is configured to separate a media segment 3200 into multiple segments.
- each fanout 3037 may separate a multiple fiber cable into individual fibers.
- each of the individual fibers is terminated at a fiber optic connector.
- one or more retention clamps 3030 can be positioned on each side of the chassis 3010 at the rear.
- one or more fanout arrangements 3035 can be positioned on each side of the chassis 3010 at the rear.
- each side of the chassis 3010 holds at least one retention clamp 3030 and at least one fanout arrangement 3035 .
- the management structures are configured to be releasably attached to the chassis housing 3013 so that an appropriate management structure may be attached to the chassis housing 3013 in the field. In other implementations, other types of fanout configurations may be utilized.
- the clamps 3030 may be appropriate if the incoming media segments 3210 are terminated by connectors 3212 that is configured to be received within couplers 3151 , 3153 , 3155 of the coupler arrangement 3150 .
- a cable clamp 3030 may be appropriate when a multi-fiber cable 3210 terminated by an MPO connector 3212 is to be plugged into an MPO coupler 3153 , 3155 (see FIGS. 65 and 77 ).
- the fanout arrangements 3035 may be appropriate if the incoming media segments 3210 are multi-fiber connectors that are to be plugged into LC-adapters. In such implementations, the fanout arrangements 3035 may separate the multi-fiber cables into individual fibers terminated by LC connectors that may be plugged into the LC adapters.
- the chassis 3010 also includes a chassis processor 3060 that functions as the interface between the panel system 3000 and the data management network.
- the chassis processor 3060 may be connected to a backplane 3040 to manage the media reading interfaces, either directly or via processors on the individual blades 3100 .
- the chassis processor 3060 also may connect the backplane 3040 to the data management network.
- the chassis processor 3060 also may include memory (e.g., an EEPROM chip) and other electronic circuitry so that physical layer information obtained at the blades 3100 can be stored in the memory of the chassis processor 3060 .
- the chassis processor 3060 includes a printed circuit board 3061 ( FIG. 48 ) that is configured to connect to the port 3044 ( FIG. 77 ) of the backplane 3040 .
- the circuit board 3061 may include a connection edge 3062 that is configured to connect to port 3044 via a card edge connection.
- the circuit board 3061 may otherwise connects to the port 3044 (e.g., via a plug/socket connection, via a cable connection, etc.).
- the chassis processor 3060 is configured to mount to the chassis housing 3013 .
- the chassis processor 3060 can mount to a support structure 3020 extending outwardly from a top, rear of the chassis housing 3013 (e.g., see FIG. 47 ).
- the support structure 3020 includes a top 3021 and side walls 3022 defining an interior that is sized and configured to receive the chassis processor 3060 .
- the interior of the support structure 3020 includes guides 3025 along which the printed circuit board 3062 may slide ( FIG. 48 ).
- the chassis processor 3060 includes a fascia 3063 coupled to the circuit board 3061 .
- the fascia 3063 is configured to connect to mounting flanges 3023 ( FIG. 47 ) extending inwardly from the side walls 3022 of the support structure 3020 .
- the fascia 3063 may mount to the flanges 3023 via fasteners 3064 ( FIG. 49 ), via a snap-fit connection, or via other types of attachment members.
- the chassis processor 3060 may be otherwise secured to the chassis 3010 .
- a first network port 3065 is electrically connected to the circuit board 3061 of the chassis processor 3060 .
- the first network port 3065 may define an RJ jack configured to receive an electrical plug terminating a network data cable connecting the panel system 3000 to the data network.
- the first network port 3065 can define a USB socket or other type of cable port.
- the chassis processor 3060 also may include a second port 3067 .
- the second port 3067 may defines a DC power socket or any suitable type of power cable port.
- the second port 3067 provides an alternative port by which the panel system 3000 can receive power from an auxiliary power source (e.g., when Power Over Ethernet is not available).
- the chassis processor 3060 also may control one or more indicators (e.g., light emitting diodes) 3066 mounted to the fascia 3063 .
- the indicators 3066 can display status information (e.g., error information, power information, network, connection information, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 49 , five indicators 3066 are provided on the fascia 3061 . In other implementations, however, greater or fewer indicators 3066 may be provided.
- the chassis 3010 includes a backplane 3040 (e.g., see FIGS. 50, 77, and 91 ).
- the circuit board arrangement 3120 of each blade 3100 positioned in the chassis 3010 connect to the backplane 3040 of the chassis 3010 .
- the blades 3100 are connected to the backplane 3040 only when the blades 3100 are in the closed position relative to the chassis 3010 . In other implementations, however, the blades 3100 are connected to the backplane 3040 when the blade 3100 is in both the closed position and at least one extended position as will be disclosed in more detail herein.
- the chassis backplane 3040 includes one or more connector ports 3042 mounted to a circuit board 3041 .
- the backplane 3040 may include one or more blade ports 3042 , each of which is configured to receive a connection end of the circuit board arrangement of a blade (e.g., connection end 3125 of circuit board arrangement 3120 of blade 3100 of FIGS. 55, 64, and 68 ).
- the backplane 3040 also may include a status board port 3046 configured to receive a connector or connection edge of a status board (e.g., status board 3070 of FIG. 45 ).
- the circuit board arrangements and/or the status boards have card-edge connectors.
- the circuit board arrangements and/or status boards can connect to the backplane 3040 using a different type of electrical connector.
- the status board 3070 includes a data port 3073 ( FIG. 45 ) at the front of the chassis 3010 that electrically connects a media segment (e.g., a USB cable) inserted therein to the chassis backplane 3040 via the printed circuit board of the status board 3070 .
- a mobile device can access the chassis processor 3060 and/or any of the blade processors 3140 from the front of the chassis 3010 .
- sliding the status board 3070 at least partially out of the chassis 3010 disconnects the status board 3070 from the backplane 3040 .
- a cover 3050 may be positioned at the rear of the chassis 3010 to provide protection for media segments 3200 routed to the rear of the chassis 3010 .
- the cover 3050 includes sidewalls 3053 extending between a top 3051 and a bottom 3052 .
- vents may be provided in the top 3051 and/or the bottom 3052 to inhibit overheating of the chassis processor 3060 .
- a rear wall 3054 extends between the sidewalls 3053 and between the top 3051 and bottom 3052 . Cable tie locations may be provided on the exterior of the rear wall 3054 (see FIG. 48 ).
- the top 3051 and rear walls 3054 define a cutout 3055 that accommodates the support structure 3020 of the chassis 3010 .
- the fascia 3063 of the chassis processor 3060 may be accessible through the cutout 3055 .
- the cover 3050 defines open portions 3056 at the sides to facilitate routing of media segments 3200 to the rear of the chassis 3010 .
- the cable management structure 3030 , 3035 may be accessible through the open portions 3056 of the cover 3050 .
- the open portion 3056 extends over only a portion of each side, top, and bottom of the cover 3050 . In other implementations, one or both sides of the cover 3050 may be open in their entirety.
- the cover 3050 includes tabs, slots, or other attachment features that interact with tabs, slots, or other attachment features of the chassis 3010 to secure the cover 3050 to the chassis 3010 .
- the cover 3050 includes two forward tabs 3057 and two sideways tabs 3058 that interact with tabs 3024 of the chassis 3010 to align the cover 3050 on the chassis 3010 .
- the cover 3050 is secured to the chassis 3010 by fasteners 3059 .
- one or more fasteners 3059 may extend through the rear wall 3054 of the cover and through tabs 3029 ( FIG. 47 ) extending outwardly from the support structure 3020 of the chassis 3010 .
- the chassis 3010 of panel system 3000 is configured to receive about four blades 3100 .
- the chassis 3010 includes four guides 3015 , each guide 3015 being configured to receive one blade 3100 .
- a chassis may be configured to receive greater or fewer blades 3100 .
- FIGS. 50-51 show one example panel system 3000 ′ that is configured to receive eight blades 3100 .
- the chassis 3010 ′ includes eight guides 3015 on either side of the chassis 3010 ′.
- FIGS. 52-53 show another example panel system 3000 ′′ that is configured to receive two blades 3100 .
- the chassis 3010 ′′ includes two guides 3015 ′′ on each side of the chassis 3010 ′′.
- FIGS. 54-74 show various example blades 3100 configured to be mounted within any of the chasses 3010 , 3010 ′, 3010 ′′. For ease in understanding, however, this disclosure will show the blades interacting with chassis 3010 .
- different types of blades 3100 may be mounted within the same chassis 3010 (see FIGS. 75 and 143 ). In other implementations, however, blades 3100 of the same type may be mounted within the chassis 3010 .
- the type of management structure e.g., management arrangements 3030 , 3035 ) provided at the rear of the chassis 3010 may depend on the type or types of blades 3100 mounted within the chassis 3010 .
- FIGS. 54-56 illustrate an example blades 3100 configured to mount in any of the chassis 3010 , 3010 ′, 3010 ′′ disclosed above.
- each blade 3100 includes a generally planar base 3110 having a front, a rear, and opposing sides.
- a handle 3108 extends from the front of the base 3110 to facilitate positioning of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 as will be described in more detail herein.
- Outer extensions 3112 extend from the rear of the base 3110 . At least one of the outer extensions 3112 defines a notch 3105 in an external side ( FIG. 54 ).
- Inner extensions 3113 also extend from the rear of the base 3110 .
- the base 3110 includes two spaced apart inner flanges 3113 . Each inner flange 3113 defines a tab (e.g., cable tie location) 3114 at which media segments can be secured as will be described in more detail herein.
- Each blade 3100 also includes a coupler arrangement 3150 .
- a frame 3115 holds at least a portion of the coupler arrangement 3150 to the blade 3100 .
- the coupler arrangement defines one or more rear ports at which incoming media segments are received and one or more front ports at which outgoing media segments are received.
- the terms “incoming” and “outgoing” are used for convenience only and do not imply that communication signals flow in only one direction.
- the front and rear ports are defined by couplers 3151 3153 located at the front of the blade 3100 .
- the rear ports are defined by couplers 3155 located at the rear of the blade 3100 .
- each coupler 3151 , 3153 , 3155 of the coupler arrangement 3150 is an adapter configured to receive and optically couple optical fiber cables.
- optical fiber cables refer to one or more strands of optical fibers.
- the optical fibers are jacketed or buffered.
- the optical fibers of a cable are individually connectorized (e.g., with LC connectors, SC connectors, ST connectors, FC connectors, LX.5 connectors, etc.). In other implementations, multiple optical fibers may be terminated at the same connector (e.g., an MPO connector).
- one or more couplers 3151 , 3153 , 3155 of the coupler arrangement 3150 is configured to electrically connect two or more electrical media segments.
- the coupler arrangement may include a socket for receiving an electrical connector terminating a conductor cable. The socket may connect to one or more IDCs at which other conductors are terminated.
- the coupler arrangement may include other types of terminations of electrical conductors.
- the coupler arrangement may include media converters that are configured to receive one or more optical fiber and one or more electrical conductors to create a communications pathway therebetween.
- the blade 3100 is a smart blade as described in more detail herein with reference to FIGS. 128-130 .
- the coupler arrangement 3150 of the smart blade 3100 also includes one or more media reading interfaces that are configured to read physical layer information stored on or in the media segments 3200 received at the coupler arrangement 3150 .
- each coupler arrangement includes at least one media reading interface.
- each front port of the coupler arrangement includes a media reading interface.
- adjacent pairs of front ports each include a media reading interface.
- one or more rear ports also may include media reading interfaces.
- Example media reading interfaces are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/303,961; 61/413,828; 61/437,504; and U.S. Pat. No. 8,690,593 incorporated by reference above.
- an example smart blade 3100 includes a circuit board arrangement 3120 and a blade processor 3140 .
- the circuit board arrangement 3120 connects the blade processor 3140 to the media reading interfaces of the coupler arrangement 3150 .
- the blade processor 3140 does not modify or otherwise interfere with communications signals (e.g., signals 51 of FIG. 1 ) propagating over media segments plugged into ports of the coupler arrangement 3150 .
- the blade processor 3140 does not monitor such communications signals.
- the blade processor 3140 is isolated from such communications signals.
- a first portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 extends across the front of the blade 3100 .
- the front couplers 3151 , 3153 ( FIGS. 57, 65, and 70 ) are coupled to the first portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 .
- the second portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 extends rearwardly from the first portion.
- the second portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 is sufficiently narrow to fit between the intermediate flanges 3113 of the blade base 3110 .
- the circuit board arrangement 3120 includes a single printed circuit board.
- the circuit board arrangement 3120 includes multiple circuit boards that are electrically connected together.
- the circuit board arrangement 3120 includes a first circuit board 3122 and a second circuit board 3124 .
- the first circuit board 3122 defines at least the first portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 and the second circuit board 3124 defines at least part of the second portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 .
- the first and second boards 3122 , 3124 are configured to move relative to each other as will be described in more detail herein.
- the mounting frame 3115 is interrupted (e.g., defines a reduced height) at an intermediate section of the frame 3115 , thereby defining a gap between two adjacent groups of couplers 3151 .
- the blade processor 3140 is mounted to the first portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 at the interrupted section of the frame 3115 (see FIG. 57 ).
- the processor 3140 is mounted to the circuit board arrangement 3120 via s SIM-card type connector. In other implementations, however, the processor 3140 may be otherwise connected to the circuit board arrangement 3120 (e.g., mezzanine connectors).
- the blade 3100 may have an open top.
- the rear ports of the couplers 3151 may be accessible through the open top of the blade 3100 .
- the connectorized ends of the incoming media segments 3210 may be accessible through the open top of the blade 3100 .
- the processor 3140 also may be accessible through the open top of the blade 3100 .
- the interrupted top portion 3116 of the frame 3115 enhances access to the blade processor 3140 through the open top.
- the blade base 3110 defines one or more openings 3109 ( FIGS. 57 and 62 ) at the rear of the front couplers 3151 .
- the first portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 does not extend rearwardly of the front couplers 3151 . Accordingly, the openings 3109 provide finger access to the rear ports of the couplers 3151 from a bottom of the blade 3100 .
- the base 3110 defines one opening 3109 on either side of the processor 3140 .
- one or more retention fingers 3160 are mounted to the front of the blade 3100 to manage and/or organize the outgoing media segments 3220 .
- FIG. 56 illustrates one example retention finger 3160 configured to facilitate fiber cable management.
- the cable retention fingers 3160 may be installed on the mounting frame 3115 .
- each cable retention finger 3160 includes a base 3161 that may be fastened or otherwise attached to a portion (e.g., bracket 3117 ) of the frame 3115 .
- the base 3161 of each retention finger 3160 may attach to the base 3110 or cover 3103 of a blade 3100 .
- Bottom and top arms 3162 , 3164 respectively, of each finger 3160 extend outwardly from the base 3161 to an end 3167 .
- the arms 3162 , 3164 , base 3161 , and end 3167 define an opening 3166 through which one or more media segments (e.g., optical fiber cables) can be routed.
- the top arm 3164 defines a break 3165 through which media segments can pass into the opening 3166 without routing an end (e.g., an end terminated by a connector) of the media segment between the arms 3162 , 3164 .
- the break 3165 may be provided in the end 3167 or bottom 3164 .
- a support flange 3163 extends between the bottom and top arms 3162 , 3164 adjacent the base 3161 . The support flange 3163 inhibits the media segments retained within the opening 3166 from being bent too far.
- FIGS. 57-62 show a first example blade 3100 A including a mounting frame 3115 A at which the front ports of a first example coupler arrangement 3150 A are positioned.
- the first example coupler arrangement 3150 A ( FIG. 57 ) defines the front and rear ports of the blade 3100 A.
- the mounting frame 3115 A holds at least part of the coupler arrangement 3150 A to the blade base 3110 .
- the coupler arrangement 3150 A includes a first plurality of couplers 3151 held within the front openings of the mounting frame 3115 A.
- the mounting frame 3115 A generally includes a top 3116 connected to the base 3110 by two or more brackets 3117 to define a generally open front. Additional brackets 3117 may extend between the top 3116 and base 3110 to separate the front opening into multiple openings.
- the mounting frame 3115 A includes tabs 3118 and flanges 3119 that extend partially into the frame openings. The tabs 3118 and flanges 3119 aid in holding the couplers 3151 .
- the mounting frame 3115 A defines four openings. In other implementations, however, the mounting frame 3115 A may form greater or fewer openings.
- the mounting frame 3115 A is integral with the base 3110 .
- the frame 3115 A may be formed by bending a front portion of the base 3110 . In other implementations, however, the frame 3115 A can be a separate piece that is assembled to the base 3110 .
- multiple couplers 3151 are mounted within each frame opening. In other implementations, however, a single coupler 3151 may be mounted within each frame opening. In the example shown, three couplers 3151 are mounted within each opening in the frame 3115 A.
- the couplers 3151 have front ports that define the front ports of the blade 3100 A that are configured to receive the outgoing media segments 3210 (e.g., see FIGS. 61-62 ). In some implementations, the couplers 3151 of the first coupler arrangement 3150 A also define the rear ports of the blade 3100 A that are configured to receive the incoming media segments 3210 (e.g., see FIGS. 61-62 ).
- each coupler 3151 defines one or more through-openings 3159 ( FIG. 60 ) extending between the front and rear ports.
- the first coupler arrangement 3150 A includes additional couplers that define the rear ports of the blade 3100 A (e.g., see blade 3100 C of FIGS. 67-71 ).
- each coupler 3151 includes four through-openings 3159 , thereby providing a total of forty-eight through-openings 3159 on the blade 3100 A. Accordingly, the first example blade 3100 A is configured to connect forty-eight pairs of media segments 3200 . In other implementations, however, the blade 3100 may include greater or fewer couplers 3151 and each coupler 3151 may include greater or fewer through-openings. For example, each coupler 3151 may include one, two, eight, ten, or twelve through-openings 3159 . In accordance with other aspects, each coupler 3151 may define an unequal number of front and rear ports.
- the couplers 3151 include fiber optic adapters configured to receive one or more pairs of connectorized fiber cables (e.g., two LC-connector terminated cables, two SC-connector terminated cables, two ST-connector terminated cables, two MPO-connector terminated cables, etc.).
- the couplers 3151 are quadruplex fiber optic adapters 3151 that optically couple together four pairs of LC connectors.
- the couplers 3151 can include monoplex fiber optic adapters, duplex fiber optic adapters, or other types of adapters.
- the couplers 3151 may include one or more electrical sockets.
- dust caps 3152 can be provided in the ports of one or more of the through-openings 3159 of the adapters 3151 .
- each dust cap 3152 is configured to plug into two adjacent ports of an adapter 3151 (e.g., see FIG. 60 ).
- each dust caps 3152 may be configured to plug into a single port of an adapter 3151 .
- each dust cap 3152 may be configured to plug into three or more ports of an adapter 3151 .
- the couplers 3151 are mounted to a circuit board arrangement 3120 A.
- the circuit board arrangement 3120 A is generally T-shaped.
- a first portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 A extends across the front of the base 3110 and a second portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 A extends to a rear of the base 3110 .
- the first plurality of couplers 3151 are mounted on top of the first portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 A.
- a row of spaced groups of the couplers 3151 are mounted to the first portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 A.
- the couplers 3151 within each group are positioned directly next to each other (see FIG. 57 ).
- the couplers 3151 within each group are spaced from each other.
- each group of couplers 3151 is positioned to align with one of the openings of the frame 3115 A. Accordingly, the front ports of each coupler 3151 are accessible through the front openings of the frame 3115 A at the front of the blade 3100 A.
- the first example blade 3100 A includes one or more visual indicators 3128 to indicate status information of the blade 3100 A (e.g., see FIGS. 57-59 ).
- the visual indicators 3128 may be used to indicate a coupler port, a set of coupler ports, a coupler 3151 , or the first blade 3100 A, itself.
- the first example blade 3100 A includes a visual indicator 3128 positioned adjacent each front port (e.g., FIG. 59 ).
- the first example blade 3100 A includes a visual indicator 3128 positioned adjacent each pair of front ports.
- the first example blade 3100 A includes a single visual indicator 3128 per blade.
- the visual indicators 3128 include light emitting diodes (LEDs).
- the blade processor 3140 can indicate a particular coupler port (e.g., to show a technician which port should receive a plug) by applying power to light the corresponding LED 3128 .
- the processor 3140 can apply power to an LED 3128 to indicate a status of the corresponding port, set of ports, or blade. For example, the processor 3140 may apply power to the LED 3128 when a plug has been received at a respective port.
- the processor 3140 can send instructions to the LED 3128 to display a particular color.
- the processor 3140 may cause an LED 3128 to display a first color (e.g., green) when a plug is inserted and physical layer information is successfully read, a second color (e.g., amber) when a plug is inserted and physical layer is not successfully read, and a third color (e.g., red) when a plug is partially (or otherwise improperly) inserted into the port.
- the LEDs 3128 can display greater or fewer colors or can indicate other types of statuses or errors.
- other types of visual indicators may be used (e.g., an LCD screen, a touch screen a monitor, etc.).
- FIGS. 61-62 show one example routing path for incoming and outgoing media segments 3210 , 3220 on the first example blade 3100 A.
- Outgoing media segments 3220 are routed to the couplers 3151 at the front of the blade 3100 A.
- Connectorized ends 3222 of the outgoing media segments 3220 are plugged into the front ports of the couplers 3151 .
- the connectorized ends 3222 may be inserted through the openings of the frame 3115 A and into the front port of the through-openings 3159 defined by the couplers 3151 .
- the media segments 3220 may be managed by one or more of the retention fingers 3160 coupled to the blade 3100 A.
- At least a first group of one or more incoming media segments 3210 are routed to one of the intermediate flanges 3113 .
- the incoming media segments 3210 of the first group are secured to the blade 3100 A at the intermediate flange 3113 .
- the first media segments of the first group may be secured to the tab 3114 at the flange 3113 using a cable tie 3039 (e.g., see FIGS. 77-79 ).
- the cable tie 3039 may be wrapped around the media segments 3200 and looped through the tab 3114 .
- Connectorized ends 3212 of the media segments 3210 are routed over the base 3110 towards the front of the blade 3100 A and plugged into the rear ports of the couplers 3151 .
- FIGS. 63-66 show various views of a second example blade 3100 B.
- the second example blade 3100 B includes a generally planar base 3110 , a handle 3108 , outer extensions 3112 , and inner extensions 3113 . At least one of the outer extensions 3112 defines a notch 3105 in an external side.
- One or more tabs 3114 are provided at each inner flange 3113 to aid in securing a group of optical fibers to the blade 3100 B.
- Retention fingers 3160 may extend forwardly of the blade 3100 B to aid in managing outgoing media segments 3220 .
- the second example blade 3100 B includes a second example coupler arrangement 3150 B configured to connect incoming and outgoing fibers terminated with WO-connectors.
- the second coupler arrangement 3150 B includes a row of couplers 3153 ( FIG. 66 ) at the front of the blade 3100 B.
- the couplers 3153 are fiber optic adapters configured to receive MPO-type fiber optic connectors.
- each adapter 3153 is configured to optically couple together a pair of MPO-connectors.
- each adapter 3153 may coupler together multiple pairs of MPO-connectors.
- dust plugs 3154 are mounted in front and rear ports of the adapters 3153 .
- the second example blade 3100 B includes a circuit board arrangement 3120 B that includes multiple circuit boards.
- the circuit board arrangement 3100 B includes a first circuit board 3122 , a second circuit board 3124 , and a third circuit board 3126 .
- a processor 3140 connects to the first circuit board 3122 .
- the MPO adapters 3153 are sandwiched between the first circuit board 3122 and the third circuit board 3126 . Accordingly, each of the adapters 3153 may include a first media reading interface that communicates with the processor 3140 through the first circuit board 3122 and a second media reading interface 3157 that communicates with the processor 3140 through the third circuit board 3126 (see FIG. 66 ).
- the third circuit board 3126 is communicatively (e.g., electrically) connected to the first circuit board 3122 .
- the third circuit board 3126 is connected to the first circuit board 3122 using pins 3129 , which can be guided in a housing 3128 positioned on the first circuit board 3122 (e.g., see FIG. 66 ).
- the first circuit board 3122 connects the processor 3140 to the third circuit board 3126 .
- the circuit board arrangement 3120 B includes multiple third circuit boards 3126 . For example, in the implementation shown in FIG.
- the circuit board arrangement 3120 B includes one third circuit board 3126 positioned over the couplers 3153 on a first side of the processor 3140 and another third circuit board 3126 positioned over the couplers 3153 on a second side of the processor 3140 .
- the second example blade 3100 B includes a second example mounting frame 3115 B coupling the second coupler arrangement 3150 B to the base 3110 (see FIGS. 65-66 ).
- the mounting frame 3115 B is configured to hold the couplers 3153 at the front of the blade 3100 B while allowing access to the front and rear ports of the couplers 3153 .
- the mounting frame 3115 B includes a fascia 3091 extending upwardly from the base 3110 ( FIG. 66 ).
- the fascia 3091 defines one or more openings 3092 through which the front ports of the couplers 3153 may be accessed.
- the mounting frame 3115 B defines four openings. In other implementations, however, the mounting frame 3115 B may form greater or fewer openings.
- Tabs 3093 extend from the base 3110 of the blade 3100 B and into the openings 3092 to aid in retaining the couplers 3153 .
- the frame 3115 B includes a tab 3093 for each coupler 3153 .
- the tabs 3093 extend between adjacent couplers 3153 (see FIG. 63 ).
- four couplers 3153 are mounted at each opening 3092 .
- greater or fewer couplers 3153 can be mounted at each opening 3092 .
- the couplers 3153 of each opening are positioned directly next to each other. In other implementations, adjacent couplers 3153 are spaced from each other.
- a top member 3095 which extends generally perpendicular to the base 3110 , can be removeably connected to the fascia 3091 (see FIG. 66 ).
- the top member 3095 can include brackets 3096 that define openings 3097 and the fascia 3091 may define openings 3094 . Fasteners can be inserted through the openings 3094 , 3097 to connect the top member 3095 to the fascia 3091 .
- the top member 3095 may include a series of openings 3098 . In the example shown, the openings 3098 accommodate fasteners holding the third circuit board 3126 to the couplers 3153 .
- a finishing member 3099 ( FIG. 65 ) can be mounted to the frame 3115 B.
- the finishing member 3099 defines a curved surface that extends over a length of the openings 3092 defined in the fascia 3091 .
- the finishing member 3099 is configured to be held to the frame 3115 B using the retention fingers 3160 (discussed above with reference to FIG. 60 ).
- the finishing members 3099 may include hooked or bent ends that are held between the retention fingers 3160 and the frame fascia 3091 (see FIG. 65 ).
- each coupler 3153 defines one or more through-openings 3159 ( FIG. 66 ) extending between front and rear ports of the coupler 3153 .
- each coupler 3153 includes a single through-opening 3159 , thereby providing a total of sixteen through-openings 3159 on the second example blade 3100 B.
- the second blade 3100 B is configured to connect sixteen pairs of multi-fiber cables 3200 .
- the second example blade 3100 B may include greater or fewer couplers 3153 and each coupler 3153 may include greater or fewer through-openings 3159 .
- the couplers 3153 may define an unequal number of front and rear ports.
- FIGS. 67-71 show different views of a third example blade 3100 C.
- the third example blade 3100 C includes a generally planar base 3110 C ( FIGS. 70-71 ) that is substantially similar to the base 3110 of the first example blade 3100 A.
- the base 3110 C of the third blade 3100 C includes brackets 3102 ( FIG. 70 ).
- the base 3110 C of the third blade 3100 C also includes a handle 3108 , side flanges 3112 , and inner flanges 3113 . At least one of the side flanges 3112 defines a notch 3105 in an external side.
- One or more tabs 3114 are provided at each inner flange 3113 to aid in securing a group of optical fibers to the blade 3100 C.
- a cover arrangement 3103 may be mounted to the base 3110 C at brackets 3102 .
- the cover arrangement 3103 includes one or more covers that extend over the top of the blade 3100 between the frame 3115 C and a rear of the base 3110 C. In one implementation, a single cover 3103 extends over the entire blade 3100 C. In other implementations, however, multiple covers 3103 can be installed on the blade 3100 C.
- Each cover cooperates with the base 3110 to define a blade interior 3111 .
- each cover 3103 includes side and/or rear walls that extend down to the base 3110 (see FIG. 68 ). In other implementations, however, each cover 3103 is mounted to a separate rear wall and/or to separate side walls of the blade 3100 C.
- each cover 3103 may be mounted to the frame 3115 C.
- the outer and inner flanges 3112 , 3113 extend outwardly from the cover arrangement 3103 .
- the cover arrangement 3103 may extend over the outer and inner flanges 3112 , 3113 .
- the third example blade 3100 C also includes a third example coupler arrangement 3150 C that is configured to connect incoming media segments 3210 and outgoing media segments 3220 .
- the incoming media segments 3210 are optical fibers terminated with MPO-type connectors and the outgoing media segments 3200 are optical fibers terminated with LC-type connectors.
- the coupler arrangement 3150 C includes a first set of couplers 3151 defining the front ports of the blade 3100 C and a second set of couplers 3155 defining the rear ports of the blade 3100 C.
- the blade 3100 C includes a left coupler region at which a plurality of the fiber optic adapters 3151 is located, an intermediate region at which a blade processor 3140 is located, and a right coupler region at which another plurality of the fiber optic adapters 3151 is located.
- a cover is installed over each coupler region.
- the intermediate region of the blade 3100 is uncovered. Accordingly, the cover arrangement 3103 does not inhibit access to the blade processor 3140 .
- the third blade 3100 C also includes a mounting frame 3115 C that aids in holding the first set of couplers 3151 to the base 3110 C.
- the mounting frame 3115 C is substantially the same as the mounting frame 3115 A of the first blade 3100 A.
- Retention fingers 3160 may be coupled to the frame 3115 C to aid in managing outgoing media segments 3220 .
- the top 3116 of the mounting frame 3115 A is about flush with the cover arrangement 3103 .
- the cover arrangement 3103 encompasses part of the frame 3115 A.
- the top 3116 of the frame 3115 A extends over a portion of the cover arrangement 3103 .
- the third blade 3100 C may include a frame 3115 C with a different configuration than frame 3115 A.
- the front couplers 3151 define through-openings that are configured to optically couple optical fibers terminated with LC connectors to optical fibers terminated with LC connectors and the rear couplers 3155 are configured to optically couple optical cables terminated with MPO connectors to optical cables terminated with MPO connectors.
- each front and rear couplers 3151 , 3155 can be configured to couple together other types of media segments.
- dust plugs 3152 FIG. 67
- dust plugs 3156 FIG. 68
- the third blade 3100 C also includes a third circuit board arrangement 3120 C having a first portion extending across the front of the base 3110 C and a second portion of the circuit board arrangement extending to a rear of the base 3110 C.
- the third circuit board arrangement 3120 C also includes a third portion that extends at last partially along a rear side of the blade base 3110 C (see FIGS. 69-71 ).
- the first plurality of couplers 3151 are mounted on top of the first portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 C and the second couplers 3155 are mounted on top of the third portion of the circuit board arrangement 3120 C.
- One or more connecting media segments 3230 connect the front couplers 3151 to the rear couplers 3155 .
- the connecting media segments 3230 extend through the blade interior 3113 defined between the base 3110 and the cover arrangement 3103 .
- the cover arrangement 3103 inhibits access to and/or provides protection for the connecting media segments 3230 .
- the cover arrangement 3103 also may inhibit access to and/or provides protection for the rear ports of the first set of couplers 3151 and/or the front ports of the second set of couplers 3155 .
- the connecting media segment 3230 includes a hydra cable that includes a multi-fiber cable 3233 terminated at a multi-fiber connector (e.g., an MPO connector) 3231 ( FIGS. 69-71 ).
- a multi-fiber connector e.g., an MPO connector
- Certain types of hydra cable 3230 also includes one or more fanouts 3235 at which the fibers of the multi-fiber cable 3233 are separated into individual optical fibers 3237 .
- Each of the individual fibers 3237 is terminated at a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC connector, an SC connector, an FC connector, an ST connector, an LX.5 connector, etc.) 3239 .
- Other types of hydra cables 3230 may include a cable breakout as part of an MPO boot instead of a separate fanout.
- the hydra cable 3230 can be secured to the base 3110 of the blade 3100 C.
- the fanout arrangement 3235 of the hydra cable 3230 can be secured to a raised tab 3104 ( FIG. 91 ) positioned on the base 3110 .
- a tie e.g., a cable tie, a zip tie, etc.
- the tie 3232 may wrap around any portion of the hydra cable 3230 .
- the fanout arrangement 3235 may include a clip that allows the fanout arrangement 3235 to be directly attached to the raised tab 3104 .
- other types of connecting media segments 3230 may optically couple the front ports of the blade 3100 C to the rear ports of the blade 3100 C.
- one or more labeling panels 3180 may be installed on the blades 3100 (e.g., blade 3100 A, blade 3100 B, and blade 3100 C) to provide labeling of the front coupler ports.
- Each labeling panel 3180 extends across one or more front ports of the blade 3100 .
- Labels e.g., displaying numbers, letters, graphics, names, etc.
- a printed label may be removably mounted to the labeling panel 3180 .
- Each of the labeling panels 3180 may be configured to connect to one or more of the retention fingers 3160 extending forwardly of the blade 3100 .
- each labeling panel 3180 extends between distal ends 3167 of two adjacent retention fingers 3160 .
- the retention fingers 3160 are sufficiently long that a gap defined between the front ports and each labeling panel 3180 allows each optical fiber plugged into one of the front ports a sufficient bend radius between the front port and the through-opening 3166 of the retention finger 3160 (e.g., see FIGS. 70 and 71 ).
- the labeling panel 3180 may be found in FIG. 74 .
- the labeling panel 3180 includes a generally planar labeling surface 3181 on which a label may be provided.
- a label may be affixed to the labeling surface 3181 .
- the labeling panel 3180 also includes tabs 3182 at the top and/or bottom of the panel 3180 and nubs 3183 at opposing sides of the panel 3180 to aid in retaining one or more labels.
- the labeling panel 3180 includes one nub 3183 at each side of the labeling surface 3183 , two tabs 3182 at the top of the labeling surface 3181 intermediate the two nubs 3183 , and two tabs 3182 at the bottom of the labeling surface 3181 intermediate the two nubs 3183 .
- the labeling panel 3180 includes one or more attachment members 3184 configured to secure the labeling panel 3180 to the ends 3167 of the retention fingers 3160 .
- the attachment members 3184 include grip fingers configured to snap to the distal ends 3167 of the retention fingers 3160 .
- each labeling panel 3180 includes top and bottom grip fingers 3184 at each side of the panel 3180 .
- the end 3167 of each retention finger 3160 includes at least one vertically extending mounting pin 3168 .
- the grip fingers 3184 of the labeling panel 3180 snap-fits or otherwise attaches to the mounting pins 3168 .
- each finger 3160 includes two spaced mounting pins 3168 (e.g., see FIG. 56 ). Accordingly, each retention fingers 3160 is configured to receive and support two adjacent labeling panels 3180 (e.g., see FIG. 72 ).
- each mounting pin 3168 defines one or more reduced diameter sections 3169 .
- the ends of each pin 3168 define reduced diameter sections 3169 .
- the grip fingers 3184 are sized to snap-fit to the reduced diameter sections 3169 of the mounting pins 3168 . In other implementations, the grip fingers 3184 are configured to snap-fit to mounting pins 3168 at any point along the length.
- the labeling panel 3180 has a height that allows both the top and bottom grip fingers 3184 at each side of the panel 3180 to attach to the same retention finger 3160 .
- the labeling panel 3180 is sufficiently tall to provide labeling for the front ports on two or more blades 3100 .
- the labeling panel 3180 may be sufficiently tall to extend across the front ports of multiple (e.g., two, three, four, eight, etc.) blades 3100 .
- the top grip fingers 3184 may attach to the retention fingers 3160 extending from a first blade 3100 and the bottom grip fingers 3184 may attach to the retention fingers 3160 extending from a second blade 3100 .
- the grip fingers 3184 are configured to rotate about the mounting pins 3168 . Rotating the labeling panels 3180 about one of the mounting pins 3168 may facilitate accessing the front ports of the blade 3100 that are located behind the labeling panel 3180 .
- the labeling panels 3180 can be rotated by detaching one side of the labeling panel 3180 from one of the mounting pins 3168 . For example, in FIG. 73 , the attachment members 3184 on one side of the bottom, left labeling panel 3180 have been disengaged from an example mounting pin 3168 to allow the labeling panel 3180 to rotate outwardly about another mounting pin 3168 at the opposite side of the labeling panel 3180 .
- the labeling panels 3180 also may be fully detached from the retention fingers 3160 .
- FIGS. 75 and 76 illustrate one example bladed panel system 3000 in which a plurality of blades 3100 is mounted within an example chassis 3010 .
- the plurality of blades 3100 includes each type of blade 3100 A, 3100 B, 3100 C disclosed above.
- the upper blade is configured the same as the second example blade 3100 B disclosed above with reference to FIGS. 63-66 ; the middle blade is configured the same as the first example blade 3100 A disclosed above with reference to FIGS. 57-62 ; and the lower blade is configured the same as the third example blade 3100 C disclosed above with reference to FIGS. 67-71 .
- the upper blade is configured to receive incoming and outgoing media segments 3210 , 3220 terminated with MPO connectors.
- the middle blade 3100 A is configured to receive incoming and outgoing media segments 3210 , 3220 terminated with LC connectors.
- the lower blade 3100 C is configured to receive incoming media segments 3210 terminated with MPO connectors and outgoing media segments 3220 terminated with LC connectors.
- the bladed panel system 3000 is configured to enable the blades 3100 to move relative to the chassis 3010 into one or more positions. Moving one of the blades 3100 to a different position relative to the other blades 3100 in the chassis 3010 may aid a user in accessing the coupler ports of the blade 3100 and/or any media segments inserted therein. For example, moving one of the blades 3100 forward of the other blades 3100 may provide space for a user to grasp a connector inserted into one of the coupler ports of the blade 3100 . In accordance with certain aspects, moving one of the blades 3100 to a different position also may provide access to the blade processor 3140 .
- each blade 3100 may move between a closed position and a first extended position.
- the closed position the blade 3100 is positioned within the chassis so that the front ports of the blade 3100 are located at the open front of the chassis 3010 and the retention fingers extend forwardly of the chassis 3010 .
- the first extended position at least the front ports of the blade 3100 are located forwardly of the open front of the chassis 3010 .
- the rear ports of the front couplers 3151 also are located forwardly of the open front of the chassis 3010 when the blade 3100 is in the first extended position.
- the blades 3100 also may move to a second extended position. In the second extended position, the front ports of the blade 3100 are located farther forward of the front chassis opening compared to their location in the first extended position.
- the blade processor 3140 is accessible when the blade 3100 is in the second extended position. In certain implementations, the blade processor 3140 is accessible when the blade 3100 is in the first extended position. In certain implementations, each of the blades 3100 may be latched or otherwise releasably secured into at least one of the positions as will be discussed in more detail with respect to FIGS. 91-127 .
- the upper blade 3100 B is in a closed position; the middle blade 3100 A is in a first extended position, and the lower blade 3100 C is in a second extended position.
- the front ports of the upper blade 3100 B generally align with the open front of the chassis housing 3010 .
- the rear ports of the front couplers 3153 and the processor 3140 of the upper blade 3100 B are not accessible.
- the front ports of the middle blade 3100 A are spaced forward of the open front of the chassis 3010 .
- the rear ports of the front couplers 3151 and/or the processor 3140 may be accessible from the front of the chassis 3010 .
- the front ports of the lower blade 3100 C are spaced farther forward of the open front of the chassis 3010 than the front ports of the middle blade 3100 A.
- a cover arrangement 3103 blocks access from the front of the chassis 3010 to the rear ports of the front couplers 3151 of the lower blade 3100 C.
- the bladed panel system 3000 is configured to enable the blades 3100 to move (e.g., slide) relative to the chassis 3010 (e.g., see FIGS. 47 and 48 ).
- the blades 3100 are configured to travel along the direction of the connector insertion axis A I ( FIG. 91 ).
- the blades 3100 may travel forwardly and rearwardly relative to the chassis 3010 .
- each blade 3100 is configured to travel over a distance ranging from about one inch to about five inches between the closed position and the first extended position. Indeed, in some implementations, each blade 3100 travels over a distance ranging from about two inches to about four inches between the closed position and the first extended position. In one example implementation, each blade 3100 travels about three inches between the closed position and the first extended position.
- each blade 3100 travels over a distance ranging from about four inches to about eight inches between the closed position and the second extended position. Indeed, in some implementations, each blade 3100 travels over a distance ranging from about five inches to about seven inches between the closed position and the second extended position. In one example implementation, each blade 3100 travels about six inches between the closed position and the second extended position. In some implementations, each blade 3100 travels about three inches between the first and second extended positions. In other implementations, however, each blade 3100 may travel a greater or lesser amount between the first and second extended positions (e.g., one inch, two inches, three inches, four inches, etc.).
- management structures at the front and rear of the chassis 3010 , blades 3100 , and frames secure the incoming media segments 3210 and outgoing media segments 3220 to the chassis 3010 while accommodating movement of the blades 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the incoming cables 3210 may be routed to the rear of the chassis 3010 so as to provide a slack length 3215 of the incoming media segments 3210 (see FIG. 78 ).
- the incoming media segments 3210 may include a curved slack length segment 3215 between the management structures (e.g., clamps 3030 , fanouts 3035 , etc.) at the rear of the chassis 3010 and the management structures (e.g., cable ties 3039 ) at the rear of the blade 3100 .
- the management structures e.g., clamps 3030 , fanouts 3035 , etc.
- the slack length 3215 enables the connectorized ends 3212 of the media segments 3210 to remain plugged into the blade couplers (e.g., rear couplers 3155 ) when the blade 3100 is moved to an extended position.
- the curved slack length may straighten as the blades 3100 are moved forward of the chassis 3010 .
- the management structures (e.g., cable ties 3039 ) on the blade 3100 secure the media segments 3210 to the blade 3100 while allowing for movement of the media segments 3210 relative to the blade 3100 to accommodate movement of the blades 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the slack length 3215 can slide through the cable ties 3039 as the blades 3100 are moved forward and rearward of the chassis 3010 .
- the cable tie region is positioned so that the incoming media segments 3210 extend rearwardly from the chassis management structures to the cable ties 3039 when the blade 3100 is in the closed position. In certain implementations, the cable tie region on each inner extension 3113 is aligned with the chassis management structures when the blade 3100 is in the closed position. In some implementations, the cable tie region is positioned so that the incoming media segments 3210 extend generally sideways or forwardly from the chassis management structures to the cable tie region 3039 when the blade 3100 is in the first extended position. In certain implementations, the cable tie region on each inner extension 3113 is aligned with the backplane 2030 when the blade 3100 is in the first extended position ( FIG. 79 ).
- the outgoing media segments 3220 plugged into the front ports of the blades 3100 may be secured to an equipment rack or other structure to which the chassis 3010 mounted. Accordingly, movement of the blades 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 moves the media segments 3220 relative to the rack.
- the openings 3166 defined in the cable retention fingers 3160 are sufficiently long to aid in accommodate movement of the outgoing media segments 3220 within the openings 3166 when the blades 3100 are moved between closed and extended positions.
- FIGS. 80-90 illustrate an example bladed panel system in which at least one chassis 3010 and at least one bracket 4300 are mounted to a frame 4400 .
- the brackets 4300 are mounted at the chassis 3010 to aid in routing the outgoing media segments 3220 from the front of the blades 3100 to elsewhere on the frame 4400 .
- the chassis 3010 is configured to receive one or more blades 3100 defining a plurality of front ports at which outgoing media segments 3220 may be positioned.
- each blade 3100 also includes multiple retention fingers 3160 FIG. 56 ) extending forwardly of the blade 3100 to manage the outgoing media segments 3220 .
- Each of the blades 3100 is configured to move relative to the chassis 3010 between a closed position and at least one extended position. In certain implementations, each blade 3100 is configured to move between a closed position, a first extended position, and a second extended position.
- the brackets 4300 are mounted to the frame 4400 through the mounting brackets of the chassis 3010 . In other implementations, the brackets 4300 may be mounted directly to the frame 4400 adjacent the chassis 3010 . In the example shown, one bracket 4300 is mounted at each side of the chassis 3010 . In other implementations, however, greater or fewer brackets 4300 may be provided. For example, in some implementations, multiple brackets 4300 may be provided at each side of a chassis 3010 . In other implementations, a single bracket 4300 may span multiple adjacent chasses 3010 .
- Each bracket 4300 is configured to manage (e.g., secure and/or organize) slack length of outgoing media segments 3220 routed to the front ports of the blades 3100 .
- the slack length of the outgoing media segments 3220 accommodates movement of the blades 3100 between the various positions. For example, compare the cable routing of FIGS. 80-82 .
- one example blade 3100 is positioned within the chassis 3010 in the closed position.
- Outgoing media segments 3220 which are plugged into the front ports of the blade 3100 , are routed to a side of the chassis 3010 .
- Slack length of the outgoing media segments 3220 is routed around an example bracket 4300 positioned at the side of the chassis 3010 .
- the outgoing media segments 3220 may be secured to the side of the chassis 3010 or to the frame 4400 after being routed around the bracket 4300 .
- the blade 3100 has been moved to the first extended position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the front ports of the blade 3100 are positioned forwardly of the open front of the chassis 3010 .
- the bracket 4300 enables movement of the outgoing media segments 3220 plugged into the blade front ports without pulling on the outgoing media segments 3220 (e.g., at the point where the outgoing media segments 3220 secure to the chassis 3010 or frame 4400 ).
- the outgoing media segments 3220 may unwrap/lift away from at least a portion of the bracket 4300 .
- the bracket 4300 continues to manage (e.g., secure and/or organize) the slack length of the outgoing media segments 3220 while the blade 3100 is in the extended position.
- the blade 3100 has been further moved to the second extended position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the front ports of the blade 3100 are positioned farther forwardly of the chassis 3010 than in the first extended position.
- the bracket 4300 enables the further movement of the outgoing media segments 3220 plugged into the front ports without pulling on the outgoing media segments 3220 (e.g., at the point where the outgoing media segments 3220 secure to the chassis 3010 or frame 4400 ).
- the outgoing media segments 3220 may continue to unwrap/lift away from at least a portion of the bracket 4300 .
- the outgoing media segments 3220 may be at least partially disconnected from the bracket 4300 when the blade 3100 is moved to the second extended position.
- FIGS. 83-89 show one example bracket 4300 configured to manage the slack length of outgoing media segments 3220 plugged into the front ports of the blades 3100 .
- the example bracket 4300 is suitable for use in managing the slack length of any media segments positioned at the front of any blade disclosed herein.
- the bracket 4300 includes a mounting base 4310 at which the bracket 4300 may be secured to the frame 4400 and/or to the chassis 3010 .
- the mounting base 4310 may define one or more holes 4312 through which a fastener 4314 may extend to secure the base 4310 to the frame 4400 and/or chassis 3010 .
- a spacer flange 4320 extends forwardly of the mounting base 4310 . In some implementations, the spacer flange 4320 extends over a distance comparable to the distance between the closed blade position and the first extended position. In some implementations, the spacer flange 4320 extends forwardly less than about 4 inches. Indeed, in some implementations, the spacer flange 4320 extends forwardly less than about 3 inches. In other implementations, the spacer flange 4320 extends forwardly about 2 inches.
- At least one bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 extends from the spacer flange 4320 opposite the mounting base 4310 .
- the bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 defines a single arced surface.
- the bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 may define a half-spool.
- the bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 includes two or more bend radius limiters.
- the bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 shown in FIG. 83 includes a first bend radius limiter 4333 and a second bend radius limiter 4337 joined by a spacer 4335 .
- the convex surface of the bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 defines a surface over which the slack length of one or more outgoing media segments 3220 may be routed.
- the concave surface of the bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 defines a channel 4340 along which one or more of the outgoing media segments 3220 can be routed along the frame 4400 as will be described in more detail herein.
- One or more cable retention fingers 4350 are mounted to the bracket 4300 to aid in managing the outgoing media segments 3220 routed around the bracket 4300 .
- the cable retention fingers 4350 are mounted to the bracket 4300 at the bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 .
- the cable retention fingers 4350 may be mounted to the spacer 4335 separating two of the bend radius limiters 4333 , 4337 .
- multiple cable retention fingers 4350 are positioned in a column between the bend radius limiters 4333 , 4337 .
- Each cable retention finger 4350 is includes a body 4352 defining an opening 4354 that is configured to receive one or more outgoing media segments 3220 .
- each retention finger 4350 includes a closing member 4356 that is configured to provide access to the opening 4354 to enable routing of the outgoing media segments 3220 through the cable retention fingers 4350 without inserting the ends of the outgoing media segments 3220 through the openings 4354 .
- the closing member 4356 defines a living hinge that enables the closing member 4356 to move relative to the finger body 4352 .
- each finger 4350 defines an uncovered slot through which the outgoing media segments 3220 may be inserted into and removed from the finger 4350 .
- the closing member 4356 may be opened to accommodate movement of the media segments 3220 when the blade 3100 is moved to the second extended position (see FIG. 82 ).
- the bracket 4300 also may include a guide member 4360 at an opposite side of the bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 from the spacer flange 4320 .
- the guide member 4360 guides the outgoing media segments 3220 routed around the bend radius limiter arrangement 4330 to the channel 4340 .
- the guide 4360 includes a body 4362 that defines an opening 4365 through which one or more of the outgoing media segments 3220 may be routed.
- the body 4362 of the guide 4360 defines a slot 4364 or other opening through which the outgoing media segments 3220 may be inserted into the opening 4365 without feeding the ends of the outgoing media segments 3220 through the guide member 4360 .
- One or more securement members 4370 may be provided to aid in routing the outgoing media segments 3220 to the guide member 4360 and/or in securing the outgoing media segments 3220 to the bracket 4300 .
- the securement members 4370 include zip ties. In other implementations, however, other types of securement members (e.g., cable ties, twist ties, straps, hooks, etc.) may be provided.
- each blade (e.g., any of blades 1100 , 2100 , 3100 ) may be secured into one or more positions relative to the chassis.
- each blade 3100 may be latched or otherwise secured in the closed position.
- each blade 3100 may cooperate with a detent 3017 on the chassis housing 3013 to releasably lock the blade 3100 in the closed position.
- Sufficient force to overcome the resistance of the detent 3017 is applied to the blade 3100 to move the blade 3100 to one of the extended positions (e.g., see FIG. 94 ).
- Sufficient force to overcome the detent 3017 also is applied to lock the blade 3100 in the closed position (e.g., see FIG. 92 ).
- one or more detents 3017 may be provided at a rear of the chassis housing 3013 .
- a column of detents 3017 may be provided on (e.g., snapped into holes defined in) at least one of the chassis side walls 3011 at the rear of the chassis 3010 (see FIG. 93 ).
- the notch 3105 defined in at least one of the side flanges 3112 of each blade 3100 cooperates with one of the detents 3017 to inhibit forward movement of the blade 3100 .
- only one of the side flanges 3112 defines a notch 3105 (e.g., see FIGS. 54, 63, and 67 ).
- the detents 3017 may be provided on both sides of the chassis housing 3013 and the notches 3105 may be provided on both side flanges 3112 .
- the chassis housing 3013 may be configured to inhibit a blade 3100 from being moved too far rearward relative to the chassis 3010 .
- one or more stops 3018 may be provided on the side walls 3011 of the chassis housing 3013 ( FIG. 92 ). In the example shown, the stops 3018 are positioned forwardly of the detents 3017 . In the example shown in FIG. 92 , the rearward shoulder 3175 of the second latching tab 3176 of a blade 3100 abuts against one of the stops 3018 to inhibit further rearward motion of the blade 3100 .
- each blade 3100 includes a latching arrangement that is configured to secure the blade 3100 in one or more positions.
- FIGS. 95-97 illustrate one example latching arrangement by which a blade 3100 may be latched or otherwise secured in the first extended position.
- Each blade 3100 with the example latching arrangement includes one or more latching tabs 3170 ( FIGS. 55, 64, and 68 ) configured to engage with the chassis housing 3010 to lock the blade 3100 in one of a plurality of positions.
- At least one side of the chassis housing 3010 defines one or more latching recesses 3009 or openings ( FIGS. 91 and 95 ) that receive the latching tabs 3170 .
- both sides of the blade 3100 may include one or more latching tabs 3170 configured to cooperate with one or more latching openings 3009 defined in both sides of the chassis housing 3010 .
- the chassis 3010 defines one latching opening 3009 for each blade 3100 at the front of the chassis 3010 .
- the chassis 3010 defines a latching opening 3009 at the front of each side wall 3011 for each blade 3100 to be received (e.g., see FIG. 101 ).
- each side 3011 of the chassis 3010 may define multiple openings 3009 for each blade 3100 (e.g., see FIG. 120 ).
- Example blade latching tabs 3170 are shown in FIGS. 55, 63, and 68 .
- Each latching tab 3170 includes a resilient body 3171 having a mounting end 3172 and a free end.
- the mounting end 3172 of the tab body 3171 is secured to the blade base 3110 (e.g., via fasteners, welding, etc.).
- the free end of the body 3171 defines a latching surface 3173 having first and second shoulders 3174 , 3175 , respectively (see FIGS. 54 and 55 ).
- the first shoulder 3174 faces the front of the chassis housing 3013 and the second shoulder 3175 faces the rear of the chassis housing 3013 (see FIG. 98 ).
- the distal end of the first latching tab 3170 abuts against the side walls 3011 of the chassis housing 3013 .
- the latching surface 3173 of the tab 3170 moves along the side wall 3011 until the latching surface 3173 aligns with the latching recess 3009 of the chassis housing 3013 .
- the latching surface 3173 pops into the latching recess 3009 (see FIG. 96 ).
- Front and rear shoulders 3174 and 3175 of the latching tab 3170 abut against edges of the side wall 3011 to inhibit forward and rearward movement of the blade 3100 (see FIG. 96 ). Pushing the latching surface 3173 sufficiently inwards for the shoulders 3174 , 3175 to clear the side wall edges releases the blade 3100 , thereby enabling forward and rearward movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- each blade 3100 also may be latched or otherwise secured in a second extended position.
- each blade 3100 may include at least a second latching tab 3176 positioned further rearward on the blade 3100 than the first latching tab 3170 (see FIGS. 55, 63, and 68 ).
- the second latching tab 3176 is structured the same as the first latching tab 3170 .
- the second latching tab 3176 may have a different structure.
- the second latching tab 3176 is configured to engage with the openings 3009 of the chassis housing 3013 to lock the blade 3100 in the second extended position (see FIG. 97 ).
- the second latching tab 3176 interacts with a different set of latching recesses or openings than the first latching tab 3170 .
- the latching tabs 3170 , 3176 of the upper blade 3100 B are contained within the chassis housing 3013 and, accordingly, are not visible. No portion of the tabs 3170 , 3176 is visible through the chassis opening 3009 .
- the first latching tab 3170 B of the middle blade 3100 A is latched into one of the latching openings 3009 of the chassis 3013 .
- the second latching tab 3176 of the middle blade 3100 A is contained within the housing 3013 .
- the first latching tab 3170 C of the lower blade 3100 C is external of the chassis housing 3013 .
- the second latching tab 3176 C of the lower blade 3100 C is latched into another opening 3009 of the chassis housing 3013 .
- the blade 3100 can be completely removed from the chassis housing 3013 .
- a blade 3100 may first be moved to the first extended position at which the first latching tab 3170 snaps into the latching opening 3009 of the chassis housing 3013 .
- the blade 3100 may be moved further forward of the chassis 3010 to the second extended position.
- the blade 3100 may be pulled still further forward of the chassis 3010 until the blade 3100 is free of the chassis housing 3013 .
- FIGS. 99-127 show some alternative latching arrangements by which a blade may be secured in one or more positions relative to a chassis.
- the latching arrangements are configured to be operated from the front of the chassis.
- each of the latching arrangements is configured to be operated using one hand.
- the latching arrangements include actuation members that are positioned outside of fiber routing paths. Indeed, in accordance with some aspects, the latching arrangements include actuators extending forwardly from central sections of the chasses.
- FIGS. 99-113 show one example latching arrangement 4500 that is configured to secure blade 3100 in one or more positions relative to chassis 3010 (e.g., see FIGS. 101-106 ).
- the latching arrangement 4500 may secure the blade 3100 in a first extended position (see FIGS. 103-104 ) and in a second extended position (see FIGS. 105-106 ) relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the latching arrangement 4500 includes an actuation member 4515 , a first set of releasable stops 4525 , and a second set of releasable stops 4535 .
- Each of the stops 4525 , 4535 is configured to move between a respective locking position and a respective releasing position.
- each stop 4525 , 4535 When in the locking positions, the stops 4525 , 4535 engage openings 3009 (e.g., see FIG. 101 ) defined in the chassis 3010 to inhibit movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 . When in the releasing positions, the stops 4525 , 4535 are moved out of engagement with the openings 3009 to enable movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- each stop 4525 , 4535 is normally biased toward a locking position relative to the chassis 3010 . A user manipulates the actuation member 4515 to selectively release the stops 4525 , 4535 from the respective locking positions.
- each of the release arms 4520 , 4530 is biased towards a locking position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- each of the release arms 4520 , 4530 may be spring-biased towards the sidewalls 3011 of the chassis 3010 .
- the sidewalls 3011 inhibit the stops 4525 , 4535 from reaching the locking positions while the stops 4525 , 4535 are spaced inwardly from the openings 3009 defined in the chassis 3010 .
- the chassis latching openings 3009 enable the stops 4525 , 4535 to move to their locking positions when the stop 4525 , 4535 is aligned with one of the openings 3009 .
- the actuation member 4515 is configured to move relative to the blade 3100 to actuate the stops 4525 , 4535 .
- the actuation member 4515 is located at one end of an actuation arm 4510 .
- the actuation arm 4510 also couples to second ends of the first and second release arms 4520 , 4530 . Movement of the actuation member 4515 moves the actuation arm 4510 , resulting in movement of one or more of the release arms 4520 , 4530 , which results in movement of the respective stops 4525 , 4535 .
- the actuation member 4515 is configured to move forward and/or rearward relative to the blade 3100 when actuated.
- the actuation member 4515 extends forwardly of the blade couplers 3151 , 3153 at the front of the blade 3100 .
- the handle 3108 and the actuation member 4515 are configured to be manipulated concurrently by a user using one hand.
- the actuation member 4515 extends from a generally central portion of the front of the blade 3100 .
- the actuation member 4515 extends over at least a portion of a blade handle 3108 that is configured to be manipulated (e.g., pulled and/or pushed) by a user. Indeed, in certain implementations, the actuation member 4515 is configured to move along the handle 3108 when actuated.
- the coupling between the release arms 4520 , 4530 and the actuation arm 4510 is configured to produce movement of the first release arms 4520 when the actuation arm 4510 is moved in a first direction and to produce movement of the second release arms 4530 when the actuation arm 4510 is moved in a second direction.
- the first and second directions are opposite directions.
- rearward movement of the actuation member 4515 (e.g., caused by a user pushing on the actuation member 4515 relative to the blade handle 3108 ) produces rearward movement of the actuation arm 4510 relative to the blade base 3110 .
- Rearward movement of the actuation arm 4510 causes a retracting movement of the first release arms 4520 (as will be described in more detail herein), which moves the first stops 4525 to the respective retracted positions.
- Forward movement of the actuation member 4515 (e.g., caused by a user pulling on the actuation member 4515 relative to the blade handle 3108 ) produces forward movement of the actuation arm 4510 relative to the blade base 3110 .
- Forward movement of the actuation arm 4510 causes a retracting movement of the second release arms 4530 (as will be described in more detail herein), which moves the second stops 4535 to releasing positions.
- FIGS. 103-106 show one example blade 3100 positioned relative to an example chassis 3010 in three positions: a closed position, a first extended position, and a second extended position.
- the chassis 3010 includes sidewalls 3011 and end walls 3012 that define an interior in which one or more blades 3100 may be installed.
- One or more guides 3015 are positioned within the chassis 3010 to receive the blades 3100 .
- Each guide 3015 enables movement of one blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- each guide 3015 may enable forward and rearward sliding movement of one blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the stops 4525 , 4535 of a blade 3100 ride over the guide 3015 at which the blade 3100 is received. In one example implementation, the stops 4525 , 4535 ride between the respective guide 3015 and an adjacent guide 3015 (e.g., see FIG. 101 ).
- one or both sidewalls 3011 of the chassis 3010 define a locking opening 3009 through which one of the stops 4525 , 4535 may extend to releasably lock the blade 3100 into position relative to the chassis 3010 . In the example shown, both sidewalls 3011 define an opening 3009 for each blade 3100 to be received at the chassis 3010 .
- one example blade 3100 is located in the chassis 3010 in the closed position.
- the example blade 3100 is mounted in the bottommost guide 3015 of the chassis 3010 .
- the front couplers 3151 , 3153 of the blade 3100 are generally positioned at the open front of the chassis 3010 .
- Retaining fingers 3160 extend forwardly of the front couplers 3151 , 3153 .
- the blade handle 3108 also extends forwardly from the front of the blade 3100 to enable a user to pull the blade 3100 forwardly relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the stops 4525 , 4535 are positioned inward from the locking positions.
- the sidewalls 3011 of the chassis 3010 may maintain the stops 4525 , 4535 in releasing positions.
- the sidewalls 3011 counteract the biasing force on the release arms 4520 , 4530 to inhibit the stops 4525 , 4535 from moving completely to the respective locking positions.
- the first and second stops 4525 , 4535 are configured to slide against the sidewalls 3011 and over the guides 3015 .
- the blade 3100 is locked relative to the chassis 3010 when the blade 3100 is in the closed position. In some implementations, the blade 3100 is releasably locked relative to the chassis housing 3010 . In other implementations, the blade 3100 is moved out of the closed position only when a locking force is overcome (e.g., by a pulling force on the blade 3100 ). In still other implementations, the blade 3100 is not locked relative to the chassis 3010 when the blade 3100 is in the closed position.
- one or more detents may be provided at a rear of the chassis 3010 (e.g., see detents 3017 of FIG. 91 ).
- a column of detents may be provided on (e.g., snapped into holes defined in) at least one of the chassis side walls 3011 at the rear of the chassis 3010 .
- a notch 3105 defined in at least one of each blade 3100 cooperates with one of the detent to inhibit movement of the blade 3100 out of the closed position until a locking force (e.g., the force required to snap the detent out of the notch) is overcome.
- only one side of the blade 3100 defines a notch 3105 and detents are provided on only one sidewall 3011 of the chassis 3010 .
- the detents may be provided on both sidewalls 3011 of the chassis 3010 and the notches 3105 may be provided on both sides of the blade 3100 .
- the example blade 3100 is located in the first extended position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the blade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along the guides 3015 from the closed position.
- the front couplers 3150 of the blade 3100 are positioned forward of the open front of the chassis 3010 .
- the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about three inches. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about two inches. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about four inches.
- the first stops 4525 are arranged in locking position, thereby inhibiting movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the first stops 4525 extend through the openings 3009 in the chassis sidewalls 3011 to inhibit forward or rearward movement of the blade 3100 .
- the release arms 4520 bias the first stops 4525 through the openings 3009 when the stops 4525 are aligned with the openings 3009 .
- the stops 4525 automatically lock the blade 3100 into the first extended position when the blade 3100 reaches the first extended position.
- the stops 4525 may be configured to move to the locking positions only when actuated by a user.
- a user manipulates the actuation member 4515 to release the first stops 4525 .
- the user may pull or push the blade 3100 to a different position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- manipulating the actuation member 4515 produces movement of the actuation arm 4510 , which causes movement of the first release arms 4520 , which move each of the first stops 4525 to a respective release position.
- the movement of the actuation arm 4510 produces movement only in the first release arms 4520 and not in the second release arms 4530 .
- the movement of the actuation arm 4510 also moves the second release arms 4530 .
- the example blade 3100 is located in the second extended position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the blade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along the guides 3015 from the first extended position.
- the front couplers 3151 , 3153 of the blade 3100 are positioned farther forward of the open front of the chassis 3010 as compared to the first extended position.
- a rear portion of the blade 3100 is still positioned within the guides 3015 or otherwise retained within the chassis 3010 .
- the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about three inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about two inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about four inches from the first extended position. In some implementations, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about three to nine inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about five inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about seven inches from the closed position.
- the second stops 4535 are arranged in locking positions, thereby inhibiting movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the second stops 4535 extend through the openings 3009 in the chassis sidewalls 3011 to inhibit forward or rearward movement of the blade 3100 .
- the second release arms 4530 bias the second stops 4535 through the openings 3009 when the stops 4535 are aligned with the openings 3009 .
- the stops 4535 automatically lock the blade 3100 into the second extended position when the blade 3100 reaches the second extended position.
- the second stops 4535 may be configured to move to the locking position only when actuated by a user.
- a user manipulates the actuation member 4515 to release the second stops 4535 .
- manipulating the actuation member 4515 produces movement of the actuation arm 4510 , which causes movement of the second release arms 4530 , which move each of the second stops 4535 to a respective release position.
- the movement of the actuation arm 4510 produces movement only in the second release arms 4530 and not in the first release arms 4520 .
- the movement of the actuation arm 4510 also moves the first release arms 4520 .
- FIGS. 107-110 show example implementations of some of the components of the latching system 4500 .
- FIGS. 111-113 illustrate how these components are assembled on an example blade 3100 .
- the components of the latching arrangement 4500 are positioned over the base 3110 of the blade 3100 beneath one or more of the blade components.
- at least a portion of the latching arrangement 4500 may be coupled to the blade base 3110 beneath the processor 4140 .
- At least a portion of the latching arrangement 4500 also may be coupled to the blade base 3110 beneath the circuit board arrangement 3120 .
- One or more cables may be routed over the latching arrangement 4300 from the rear of the blade 3100 to be plugged into rear ports of the coupler arrangement 3150 at the front of the blade 3100 .
- operation of the latching arrangement 4500 does not interfere with the blade components.
- FIG. 107 shows one example implementation of an actuation arm 4510 including a first section 4511 extending from a base section 4512 .
- the first section 4511 may extend from a central portion of the base section 4512 .
- Second and third sections 4513 , 4514 extend from opposite ends of the base section 4512 .
- the second and third sections 4513 , 4514 extend in a different direction than the first section 4511 .
- the second and third sections 4513 , 4514 extend in an opposite direction from the first section 4511 .
- the first section 4511 defines the actuation member 4515 .
- the first section 4511 may define a handle 4516 or other grip portion at a distal end thereof.
- the handle 4516 is formed as a bent, rolled, or folded portion of the first section 4511 .
- a handle 4516 may be molded, fastened, or otherwise connected to the first section 4511 .
- the distal end of the first section 4511 may be flat.
- the first section 4511 also defines at least one opening 4517 through which a fastener may extend to secure the actuation arm 4510 to the blade base 3110 .
- the blade base 3110 may define receiving members 4541 at which the fastener may be secured.
- the opening 4517 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable movement of the actuation arm 4510 relative to the fastener and receiving member 4541 .
- the opening 4517 may define a generally oblong shape through which the fastener may move relative to the actuation arm 4510 .
- the first section 4511 defines two openings 4517 aligned in the direction of movement of the actuation arm 4510 . In other implementations, greater or fewer openings 4517 may be defined in the first section 4511 .
- Each of the second and third sections 4513 , 4514 is configured to interact with at least one of the release arms 4520 , 4530 of the latching arrangement 4500 .
- each of the second and third sections 4513 , 4514 is configured to interact with one of the first release arms 4520 and one of the second release arms 4530 .
- each of the second and third sections 4513 , 4514 defines a first opening 4518 and a second opening 4519 spaced from the first opening 4518 .
- Each of the openings 4518 , 4519 is configured to receive a lug or other rider of the respective release arm 4520 , 4530 .
- each of the openings 4518 , 4519 of the second and third sections 4513 , 4514 defines a camming surface.
- one end of each first opening 4518 defines the camming surface and an opposite end of each second opening 4519 defines the camming surface.
- the first openings 4518 define camming surfaces at forward ends of the first openings 4518 and the second openings 4519 define camming surfaces at rearward ends of the second openings 4519 .
- the camming surfaces taper inwardly. In other implementations, the camming surfaces taper outwardly.
- FIG. 108 shows one example implementation of a first release arm 4520 including a first stop 4525 defined at one end of a body 4521 .
- the body 4521 extends generally linearly. In other implementations, however, the body 4521 may have any other suitable shape (e.g., L-shaped, J-shaped, C-shaped, V-shaped, U-shaped, etc.).
- the first stop 4525 is generally cube or cuboid shaped. In other implementations, the first stop 4525 may be flat, angled, curved, or may have any other suitable shape.
- the body 4521 of the first release arm 4520 is configured to interact with the actuation arm 4510 .
- the body 4521 may define a lug 4522 ( FIG. 113 ) or other follower at a different end of the first release arm 4520 from the stop 4525 .
- the body 4521 may define a lug 4522 at an opposite end of the first release arm 4521 from the stop 4525 .
- the lug 4522 extends downwardly from a section 4523 of the first release arm 4520 having a reduced thickness (see FIG. 108 ).
- Each first release arm 4520 is coupled to the blade 3100 so as to be moveable relative to the blade base 3110 .
- the first release arm 4520 defines at least one opening 4524 through which a fastener 4543 may extend to couple the first release arm 4520 to the blade 3100 .
- each fastener 4543 extends into a respective receiving structure 4542 ( FIG. 111 ) defined on the blade base 3100 . In other implementations, however, the fasteners 4543 may otherwise couple the first release arms 4520 to the blade 3100 .
- each first release arm 4520 defines two spaced openings 4524 within which respective fasteners 4543 may travel. In other implementations, each first release arm 4520 may define a greater number of openings 4524 .
- each first release arm 4520 includes a spring 4526 that biases the first release arm 4520 toward a locking position.
- the springs 4526 are mounted at the openings 4524 of each first release arm 4520 .
- One end of each spring 4526 seats on a mount 4527 ( FIG. 113 ) at one end of the opening 4524 and the other end of each spring 4526 abuts against the fastener 4543 holding the first release arm 4520 to the blade 3100 .
- the spring 4526 pushes the first release arm 4520 away from the fastener 4543 to move the stop 4525 toward a locking position.
- the first release arm 4520 is moved counter to the bias of the spring 4526 to compress the spring 4526 toward the fastener 4543 .
- FIGS. 109 and 110 show example implementations of second release arms 4530 .
- the second release arm shown in FIG. 109 is flipped 180° from the second release arm shown in FIG. 113 .
- Each second release arm 4530 includes a second stop 4535 defined at one end of an arm body 4531 .
- the body 4531 extends generally in an L-shape. In other implementations, however, the body 4521 may have any other suitable shape (e.g., linear, J-shaped, C-shaped, V-shaped, U-shaped, etc.).
- the second stop 4535 is generally cube or cuboid shaped. In other implementations, the second stop 4535 may be flat, angled, curved, or may have any other suitable shape.
- the body 4531 of the second release arm 4530 is configured to interact with the actuation arm 4510 .
- the body 4531 may define a lug 4532 ( FIG. 113 ) or other follower at a different end of the second release arm 4530 from the stop 4535 .
- the body 4531 may define a lug 4532 at an opposite end of the second release arm 4531 from the stop 4535 .
- the lug 4532 extends downwardly from a section 4533 of the second release arm 4530 having a reduced thickness (see FIGS. 109 and 110 ).
- Each second release arm 4530 is coupled to the blade 3100 so as to be moveable relative to the blade base 3110 .
- the second release arm 4530 defines at least one opening 4534 through which a fastener 4543 may extend to couple the second release arm 4530 to the blade 3100 .
- each fastener 4543 extends into a respective receiving structure 4542 ( FIG. 111 ) defined on the blade base 3100 .
- the fasteners 4543 may otherwise couple the second release arms 4530 to the blade 3100 .
- each second release arm 4530 defines two spaced openings 4534 within which respective fasteners 4543 may travel. In other implementations, each second release arm 4530 may define a greater number of openings 4534 .
- each second release arm 4530 includes a spring 4536 ( FIG. 113 ) that biases the second release arm 4530 toward a locking position.
- the springs 4536 are mounted at the openings 4534 of each second release arm 4530 .
- One end of each spring 4536 seats on a mount 4537 ( FIG. 113 ) at one end of the opening 4534 and the other end of each spring 4536 abuts against the fastener 4543 holding the second release arm 4530 to the blade 3100 .
- the spring 4536 pushes the second release arm 4530 away from the fastener 4543 to move the stop 4535 toward a locking position.
- the second release arm 4530 is moved counter to the bias of the spring 4536 to compress the spring 4536 toward the fastener 4543 .
- the first and second stops 4525 , 4535 of the latching arrangement 4500 are biased to abut the sidewalls 3011 of the chassis 3010 (e.g., see FIGS. 101 and 102 ).
- a user moves the blade 3100 from the closed position to a first extended position by pulling on the handle 3108 of the blade 3100 .
- the stops 4525 , 4535 are maintained in the unlocked positions by the sidewalls 3011 as the blade 3100 is moved along the guides 3015 of the chassis 3010 .
- the springs 4526 bias the stops 4525 of the first release arms 4520 into the openings 3009 of the chassis 3010 (see FIGS. 103 and 104 ).
- the spring-biased stops 4525 inhibit forward and rearward movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the sidewalls 3011 of the chassis 3010 maintain the second stops 4535 in unlocked positions (see FIGS. 103 and 104 ).
- a user releases (e.g., retracts) the first stops 4525 and applies a force to (e.g., pulls or pushes on) the handle 3108 of the blade 3100 .
- a user releases the first stops 4525 by pushing rearwardly on the actuation member 4515 relative to the handle 3108 .
- the user pushes on the actuation member 4515 and pulls/pushes on the handle 3108 using the same hand.
- the user pulls/pushes on the handle 3108 while pushing on the actuation member 4515 using the same hand.
- Pushing on the actuation member 4515 moves the actuation arm 4510 rearwardly relative to the blade 3100 , which moves the first and second openings 4518 , 4519 rearwardly relative to the release arms 4520 , 4530 .
- Moving the openings 4518 , 4519 rearwardly causes the lug 4522 of each first release arm 4520 to cam inwardly along a camming surface of the respective first opening 4518 (see FIG. 113 ).
- Camming the lugs 4522 inwardly causes the first release arms 4520 to move inwardly, thereby retracting the first stops 4525 from the openings 3009 of the chassis 3010 .
- the second openings 4519 of the actuation arm 4510 are sized and shaped so that the rearwardly movement of the second openings 4519 does not affect the lugs 4532 of the second release arms 4530 (see FIG. 113 ).
- the springs 4536 bias the stops 4535 of the second release arms 4530 into the openings 3009 of the chassis 3010 (see FIGS. 105 and 106 ).
- the spring-biased second stops 4535 inhibit forward and rearward movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 until the second stops 4535 are released from the openings 3009 .
- the first release arms 4520 are located outside of the chassis 3010 when the blade 3100 is in the second extended position. Accordingly, the chassis sidewalls 3011 do not inhibit the springs 4526 of the first release arms 4520 from biasing the first release arms to the locking position (e.g., see FIGS. 105 and 109 ). However, the first stops 4525 do not engage the chassis 3010 and, accordingly, do not inhibit movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- a user releases (e.g., retracts) the second stops 4535 and pulls/pushes on the handle 3108 of the blade 3100 .
- a user releases the second stops 4535 by pulling on the actuation member 4515 relative to the handle 4108 .
- the user pulls on the actuation member 4515 and pulls on the handle 3108 using the same hand.
- the user pulls on the handle 3108 while pulling on the actuation member 4515 using the same hand. Pulling on the actuation member 4515 moves the actuation arm 4510 forwardly relative to the blade 3100 , which moves the first and second openings 4518 , 4519 forwardly relative to the release arms 4520 , 4530 .
- the first openings 4518 of the actuation arm 4510 are sized and shaped so that forward movement of the first openings 4518 does not affect the lugs 4522 of the first release arms 4520 (see FIG. 113 ).
- FIGS. 114-117 show another example latching arrangement 4600 that is configured to secure a blade 3100 in one position relative to a chassis 3010 (e.g., see FIGS. 114-116 ).
- the latching arrangement 4600 may secure the blade 3100 only in the first extended position (see FIG. 115 ). In such an implementation, the latching arrangement 4600 does not secure the blade 3100 in a closed position or a second extended position.
- the latching arrangement 4600 may secure the blade 3100 only in the second extended position (see FIG. 116 ).
- the latching arrangement 4600 may secure the blade 3100 only in the closed position (see FIG. 114 ).
- the latching arrangement 4600 includes an actuation member 4615 and a set of releasable stops 4625 .
- the actuation member 4615 is configured to move relative to the blade 3100 to actuate the stops 4625 .
- the actuation member 4615 is configured to move forward and/or rearward relative to the blade 3100 when actuated. Movement of the actuation member 4615 moves an actuation arm 4610 , resulting in movement of one or more of release arms 4620 , which results in movement of the respective stops 4625 .
- FIGS. 114-116 show one example blade 3100 positioned relative to an example chassis 3010 in three positions: a closed position, a first extended position, and a second extended position.
- the chassis 3010 includes sidewalls 3011 and end walls 3012 that define an interior in which one or more blades 3100 may be installed.
- One or more guides 3015 are positioned within the chassis 3010 to receive the blades 3100 .
- the blade 3100 is mounted in the bottommost guide 3015 of the chassis 3010 .
- Each guide 3015 enables movement of one blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- each guide 3015 may enable forward and rearward sliding movement of one blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the one or more stops 4625 of a blade 3100 ride over the guide 3015 at which the blade 3100 is received. In one example implementation, the stops 4625 ride between the respective guide 3015 and an adjacent guide 3015 .
- one or both sidewalls 3011 of the chassis 3010 define a locking opening 3009 through which one of the stops 4625 may extend to releasably lock the blade 3100 into position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- both sidewalls 3011 define an opening 3009 for each blade 3100 to be received at the chassis 3010 .
- the openings 3009 are located at a front of the chassis sidewalls 3011 .
- the openings 3009 are located at a central region of the chassis sidewalls 3010 .
- the openings 3009 are located at a rear of the chassis sidewalls 3011 .
- the sidewalls 3011 may define openings at front, central, and/or rear locations.
- one example blade 3100 with the second latching arrangement 4600 is located in the chassis 3010 in the closed position.
- the front ports of the coupler arrangement 3150 of the blade 3100 are generally positioned at the open front of the chassis 3010 . Retaining fingers extend forwardly of the front ports.
- the blade handle 3108 also extends forwardly from the front of the blade 3100 to enable a user to pull the blade 3100 forwardly relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the sidewalls 3011 of the chassis 3010 maintain the stops 4625 in releasing positions by counteracting the biasing force on the release arms 4620 . Accordingly, the stops 4625 are configured to slide against the sidewalls 3011 and over the guides 3015 .
- the example blade 3100 is located in the first extended position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the blade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along the guides 3015 from the closed position.
- the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the closed position.
- the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about three inches.
- the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about two inches.
- the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about four inches.
- the stops 4625 are arranged in locking position, thereby inhibiting movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the stops 4625 extend through the openings 3009 at the front of the chassis sidewalls 3011 to inhibit forward or rearward movement of the blade 3100 .
- the front ports of the blade 3100 are positioned forward of the open front of the chassis 3010 .
- the example blade 3100 is located in the second extended position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the blade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along the guides 3015 from the first extended position.
- the front couplers 4150 of the blade 3100 are positioned farther forward of the open front of the chassis 3010 as compared to the first extended position.
- a rear portion of the blade 3100 is still positioned within the guides 3015 or otherwise retained within the chassis 3010 .
- the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about three inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about two inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about four inches from the first extended position. In some implementations, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about three to nine inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about five inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about seven inches from the closed position.
- a user moves the blade 3100 between the positions using a blade handle 3108 .
- a user may push or pull on a forwardly extending blade handle 3108 .
- the blade handle 3108 extends forwardly of the blade 3100 from a central portion at the front of the blade 3100 .
- the blade handle 3108 may extend forwardly of the blade 3100 from a side portion at the front of the blade 3100 .
- the blade handle 3108 may extend from a side or rear of the blade 3100 .
- the two or more blade handles 4108 may extend from the blade 3100 .
- a user manipulates the actuation member 4615 of the latching arrangement 4600 to release the stops 4625 .
- the stops 4625 When the stops 4625 are released, the user may pull or push the blade handle 3108 to move the blade 3100 to a different position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the actuation member 4615 defines a handle or other grip portion for the user.
- the handle is formed as a bent, rolled, or folded portion of the actuation member 4615 .
- a handle may be molded, fastened, or otherwise connected to the actuation member 4615 .
- the distal end of the actuation member 4615 may be flat.
- the handle 3108 and actuation member 4615 are configured to be manipulated using one hand. In accordance with some aspects, the handle 3108 and the actuation member 4615 are configured to be manipulated concurrently by a user. For example, in some implementations, the actuation member 4615 extends forwardly of the blade 3100 . In certain implementations, the actuation member 4615 extends over at least a portion of a blade handle 3108 . Indeed, in certain implementations, the actuation member 4615 is configured to move along the handle 3108 when actuated.
- a user releases the stops 4625 by pushing rearwardly on the actuation member 4615 relative to the handle 3108 .
- a user releases the stops 4625 by pushing forwardly on the actuation member 4615 relative to the handle 3108 .
- the user pulls/pushes on the handle 3108 while pushing/pulling on the actuation member 4615 using the same hand.
- the user releases the stops 4625 by otherwise manipulating the actuation member 4615 .
- Each release arm 4620 is operably coupled to the actuation arm 4610 .
- Each of the release arms 4620 is configured to move the respective stop 4625 between a respective locking position and a respective releasing position when operated by the actuation arm 4610 .
- each stop 4625 engages an opening 3009 defined in the chassis 3010 to inhibit movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the stop 4625 is moved out of engagement with the openings 3009 to allow movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 3010 .
- Each release arm 4620 is coupled to the blade 3100 so as to be moveable relative to the blade base 3110 .
- each release arm 4620 defines at least one opening 4624 through which a fastener 4643 ( FIG. 115 ) may extend to couple the release arm 4620 to the blade 3100 .
- each fastener 4643 extends into a respective receiving structure defined on the blade base 3100 . In other implementations, however, the fasteners 4643 may otherwise couple the release arms 4620 to the blade 3100 .
- Each opening 4624 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable the fastener 4643 to move within the opening 4624 when the release arm 4620 is moved relative to the blade 3100 .
- each stop 4625 of the latching arrangement 4600 is normally biased toward a locking position relative to the chassis 3010 .
- the stops 4625 automatically latch the blade 3100 into position when the blade 3100 is located relative to the chassis 3010 to align the stops 4625 and the chassis openings 3009 .
- each release arm 4620 includes a spring 4626 that biases the stop 4625 toward a locking position.
- the springs 4626 are mounted at the openings 4624 of each release arm 4620 . One end of each spring 4626 seats on a mount 4627 ( FIG.
- each spring 4626 abuts against the fastener 4643 holding the release arm 4620 to the blade 3100 .
- the spring 4626 pushes the release arm 4620 away from the fastener 4643 to move the stop 4625 toward a locking position.
- the stops 4625 may be configured to move to the locking positions only when actuated by a user.
- one or more release arms 4620 and stops 4625 are substantially the same as the first release arms 4520 and first stops 4525 disclosed herein. In other implementations, one or more release arms 4620 and stops 4625 are substantially the same as the second release arms 4530 and second stops 4535 disclosed herein. In still other implementations, the arms 4620 and stops 4625 have a different configuration from the release arms 4520 , 4530 and stops 4625 , 4635 disclosed herein.
- the stops 4625 are located at a generally central region of the blade base 3110 between the front and rear of the blade 3100 (see FIG. 114 ). In other implementations, the stops 4625 may be located at the rear of the blade base 3110 (e.g., see the second stops 4535 of FIG. 99 ), at the front of the blade base 3110 , or at any other suitable location on the blade 3100 .
- the latching arrangement 4600 includes two release arms 4620 .
- the latching arrangement 4600 may define greater or fewer release arms 4620 .
- Each release arm 4620 defines two spaced openings 4624 within which respective fasteners 4643 may travel. In other implementations, each release arm 4620 may define a greater number of openings 4624 .
- the release arm 4620 is moved counter to the bias of the release arms 4620 .
- the release arm 4620 is configured to engage and be operated by the actuation arm 4610 .
- the release arm 4620 may define a lug or other follower at a different end of the release arm 4620 from the stop 4625 .
- the release arm 4620 may define a lug at an opposite end of the release arm 4620 from the stop 4625 .
- the lug extends downwardly from a section of the release arm 4620 having a reduced thickness (see FIG. 117 ). The lug extends through an opening defined in the actuation arm 4610 .
- the actuation arm 4610 may include one or more sections that are each configured to interact with the lug of a release arm 4620 .
- each of the actuation arm sections defines at least one opening configured to receive a lug or other follower of the respective release arm 4620 .
- each of the openings defines a camming surface.
- the actuation arm sections define camming surfaces at forward ends of the openings. In other implementations, however, the actuation arm sections define camming surfaces at rearward ends of the second openings. In some implementations, the camming surfaces taper inwardly. In other implementations, the camming surfaces taper outwardly.
- the actuation arm 4610 also is movably fastened to the blade 3100 .
- one or more fastener may extend through one or more openings defined in the actuation arm 4610 to secure the actuation arm 4610 to the blade base 3110 .
- the blade base 3110 may define receiving members at which the fastener 4643 may be secured.
- the opening is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable movement of the actuation arm 4610 relative to the fastener and receiving member.
- the opening may define a generally oblong shape through which the fastener 4643 may move relative to the actuation arm 4610 .
- a user moves the actuation arms 4620 to selectively release the stops 4625 from the respective locking positions.
- pushing on the actuation member 4615 moves the actuation arm 4610 rearwardly relative to the blade 3100 , which moves openings defined in the actuation arm 4610 rearwardly relative to the release arms 4620 .
- Moving the openings rearwardly causes the lug of each release arm 4620 to cam inwardly along a camming surface of the respective opening.
- Camming the lugs inwardly causes the release arms 4620 to move away from the respective sidewall 3011 , thereby retracting the stops 4625 from the openings 3009 of the chassis 3010 .
- the blade 3100 may be locked relative to the chassis 3010 when the blade 3100 is in the closed position without using the latching arrangement 4600 .
- the blade 3100 is moved out of the closed position only when a locking force is overcome.
- one or more detents may be provided at a rear of the chassis 3010 .
- a notch 3105 defined in at least one of each blade 3100 cooperates with one of the detent to inhibit movement of the blade 3100 out of the closed position until a locking force (e.g., the force required to snap the detent out of the notch) is overcome.
- FIGS. 118-127 show another example bladed chassis system 5000 including an example chassis 5010 that is configured to receive one or more blades 3100 .
- the chassis 5010 includes sidewalls 5011 and end walls 5012 that define an interior in which one or more blades 3100 may be installed.
- One or more guides 5015 are positioned within the chassis 5010 to receive the blades 3100 .
- Each guide 5015 enables movement of one blade 3100 relative to the chassis 5010 .
- each guide 5015 may enable forward and rearward sliding movement of one blade 3100 relative to the chassis 5010 .
- one or both sidewalls 5011 of the chassis 5010 each define at least one locking opening 5009 .
- each sidewall 5011 defines a front opening 5009 A, an intermediate opening 5009 B, and a rear opening 5009 C for each blade 3100 to be received at the chassis 5010 .
- the front openings 5009 A are located at the front of the chassis sidewalls 5011
- the intermediate openings 5009 B are located at middle portions of the chassis sidewalls 5011
- the rear openings 5009 C are located at the rear of the chassis sidewalls 5011 .
- each sidewall 5011 may define greater or fewer openings 5009 .
- each blade 3100 includes an example latching arrangement 5500 configured to secure the blade 3100 in one or more positions relative to a chassis 5010 .
- the example latching arrangement 5500 may secure the blade in a closed position, a first extended position, and/or a second extended position relative to the chassis 5010 (e.g., see FIGS. 120-122 ).
- the latching arrangement 5500 includes an actuation member 5515 and a set of releasable stops 5525 that selectively extend through the openings 5009 of the chassis 5010 to releasably lock the blade 3100 into position relative to the chassis 5010 .
- Each of the stops 5525 is configured to move between a respective locking position and a respective releasing position. When in the locking positions, each stop 5525 engages one of the openings 5009 defined in the chassis 5010 to inhibit movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 5010 . When in the releasing positions, the stops 5525 are moved out of engagement with the openings 5009 to enable movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 5010 . When the blade 3100 moves relative to the chassis 5010 , the stops 5525 of a blade 3100 ride over the guide 5015 at which the blade 3100 is received. In one example implementation, the stops 5525 ride between the respective guide 5015 and an adjacent guide 5015 (e.g., see FIG. 120 ).
- each stop 5525 is normally biased toward a locking position relative to the chassis 5010 .
- a user manipulates the actuation member 5515 to selectively release the stops 5525 from the respective locking positions.
- moving the actuation member 5515 rearwardly relative to the blade 3100 retracts the stops 5525 inwardly relative to the blade 3100 .
- the latching arrangement 5500 is configured so that forward movement of the actuation member 5515 retracts the stops 5525 .
- the latching arrangement 5500 is configured so that another type of movement (e.g., vertical, sideways, diagonal, rotational, etc.) of the actuation member 5515 retracts the stops 5525 .
- FIGS. 120-122 show one example blade 3100 positioned relative to an example chassis 5010 in three positions: a closed position, a first extended position, and a second extended position.
- a user moves the blade 3100 between the positions using a blade handle 3108 .
- a user may push or pull on a forwardly extending blade handle 3108 .
- the blade handle 3108 extends forwardly of the blade 3100 from a central portion at the front of the blade 3100 .
- the blade handle 3108 may extend forwardly of the blade 3100 from a side portion at the front of the blade 3100 .
- the blade handle 3108 may extend from a side or rear of the blade 3100 .
- the two or more blade handles 3108 may extend from the blade 3100 .
- one example blade 3100 with the second latching arrangement 5500 is located in the chassis 5010 in the closed position.
- the blade 3100 is mounted in the bottommost guide 5015 of the chassis 5010 .
- the front ports of the coupler arrangement 3150 of the blade 3100 are generally positioned at the open front of the chassis 5010 .
- Retaining fingers 3160 extend forwardly of the front ports.
- the blade handle 3108 also extends forwardly from the front of the blade 3100 to enable a user to pull the blade 3100 forwardly relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the stops 5525 extend through the rear openings 5009 C in the chassis sidewalls 5011 , thereby inhibiting movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the example blade 3100 is located in the first extended position relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the blade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along the guides 5015 from the closed position.
- the front ports of the blade 3100 are positioned forward of the open front of the chassis 5010 .
- the stops 5525 extend through the intermediate openings 5009 B in the chassis sidewalls 5011 , thereby inhibiting movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about three inches. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about two inches. In one implementation, the base 3110 has been moved forwardly about four inches.
- the example blade 3100 is located in the second extended position relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the blade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along the guides 5015 from the first extended position.
- the front ports of the blade 3100 are positioned farther forward of the open front of the chassis 5010 as compared to the first extended position.
- a rear portion of the blade 3100 is still positioned within the guides 5015 or otherwise retained within the chassis 5010 .
- the stops 5525 extend through the front openings 5009 A in the chassis sidewalls 5011 , thereby inhibiting movement of the blade 3100 relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about three inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about two inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about four inches from the first extended position. In some implementations, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about three to nine inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about five inches from the closed position. In one implementation, the blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about seven inches from the closed position.
- a user manipulates the actuation member 5515 of the latching arrangement 5500 to release the stops 5525 .
- the stops 5525 are released, the user may pull or push the blade handle 3108 to move the blade 3100 to a different position relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the actuation member 5515 defines a handle or other grip portion for the user.
- the handle is formed as a bent, rolled, or folded portion of the actuation member 5515 .
- a handle may be molded, fastened, or otherwise connected to the actuation member 5515 .
- the distal end of the actuation member 5515 may be flat.
- the handle 5508 and actuation member 5515 are configured to be manipulated using one hand.
- the handle 3108 and the actuation member 5515 are configured to be manipulated concurrently by a user.
- the actuation member 5515 extends forwardly of the blade 3100 .
- the actuation member 5515 extends over at least a portion of a blade handle 3108 .
- the actuation member 5515 is configured to move along the handle 3108 when actuated.
- FIGS. 123-125 show example implementations of some of the components of the latching system 5500 .
- the latching system 5500 includes an actuation arm 5510 , at least one release arm 5520 , and at least one swing arm 5570 operably connecting the actuation arm 5510 to the release arm 5520 .
- the swing arm 5570 operates so that forward and/or rearward movement of the actuation arm 5510 results in a retracting motion of the release arms 5520 .
- the latching system 5500 includes two release arms 5520 and two swing arms 5570 . In other implementations, however, the latching system 5500 may include a greater or fewer number of release arms 5520 and swing arms 5570 .
- the actuation arm 5510 is configured to move forwardly and/or rearwardly relative to the blade 3100 .
- the release arms 5520 are configured to move relative to the blade 3100 to extend and retract the stops 5525 .
- the swing arms 5570 are configured to rotate at least partially relative to the blade 3100 .
- forward and/or rearward movement of the actuation arm 5510 causes the swing arms 5570 to rotate, which causes the extension and retraction of the stops 5525 (see FIG. 118 ).
- the actuation arm 5510 and the release arms 5520 slidably move along the base 3110 of the blade 3100 .
- FIGS. 126-127 illustrate how these components are assembled on an example blade 3100 .
- the components of the latching arrangement 5500 are positioned over the base 3110 of the blade 3100 beneath one or more of the blade components.
- the latching arrangement 5500 may be coupled to the blade base 3110 beneath the processor 3140 .
- At least a portion of the latching arrangement 5500 also may be coupled to the blade base 3110 beneath the circuit board arrangement 3120 .
- One or more cables may be routed over the latching arrangement 5500 from the rear of the blade 3100 to be plugged into rear ports of the coupler arrangement 3150 at the front of the blade 3100 .
- operation of the latching arrangement 5500 does not interfere with the blade components.
- FIG. 123 shows one example implementation of an actuation arm 5510 including a body 5511 defining the actuation member 5515 extending in a first direction and at least one prong 5513 extending in a second direction.
- the body 5511 of the actuation arm 5510 also includes a second prong 5514 .
- the second prong 5514 extends in a different direction from the first prong 5513 .
- each prong 5513 , 5514 extends in a different direction from the actuation member 5515 .
- the body 5511 defines a Y-shape.
- the actuation member 5515 defines a handle 5516 or other grip portion at a distal end thereof.
- the handle 5516 is formed as a bent, rolled, or folded portion at the distal end of the actuation member 5515 .
- a handle 5516 may be molded, fastened, or otherwise connected to the distal end of the actuation member 5515 .
- the distal end of the actuation member may be flat.
- the body 5511 of the actuation arm 5510 also defines at least one opening 5512 through which a fastener may extend to secure the actuation arm 5510 to the blade base 3110 .
- the blade base 3110 may define one or more receiving members 5541 at which the fastener may be secured.
- the opening 5512 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable movement of the actuation arm 5510 relative to the fastener and receiving member 5541 .
- the opening 5512 may define a generally oblong shape through which the fastener may move relative to the actuation arm 5510 .
- the body 5511 defines two openings 5512 aligned in the direction of movement of the actuation arm 5510 . In other implementations, greater or fewer openings 5512 may be defined in the body 5511 .
- each of the prongs 5513 , 5514 is configured to operably connect to at least one of the release arms 5520 of the latching arrangement 5500 .
- each of the prongs 5513 , 5514 includes a lug 5516 or other guide member extending upwardly from the body 5511 .
- the lugs 5516 are configured to interact with the swing arms 5570 , which are configured to interact with the release arms 5520 as will be described in more detail herein.
- each prong 5513 , 5514 includes one lug 5516 located ata distal end of the prong 5513 , 5514 .
- the lug 5516 includes a hollow cylinder.
- the lug 5516 may include a solid bump or other protrusion.
- FIG. 124 shows one example implementation of a release arm 5520 including a stop 5525 defined at one end of a body 5521 .
- the body 5521 extends generally linearly. In other implementations, however, the body 5521 may have any other suitable shape (e.g., L-shaped, J-shaped, C-shaped, V-shaped, U-shaped, etc.).
- the release arm body 5521 includes a generally linear extension section 5527 , a raised section 5523 at one end of the extension section 5527 , and an angled section 5526 at another end of the extension section 5527 .
- Each release arm 5520 is coupled to the blade 3100 so as to be moveable relative to the blade base 3110 .
- the extension section 5527 of the release arm 5520 defines at least one opening 5524 through which a fastener 5543 ( FIG. 126 ) may extend to couple the release arm 5520 to the blade 3100 .
- each fastener 5543 extends into a respective receiving structure 5542 ( FIG. 126 ) defined on the blade base 3110 .
- the fasteners 5543 may otherwise couple the release arms 5520 to the blade 3100 .
- the opening 5524 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable the fastener 5543 to move within the opening 5524 when the release arm 5520 is moved relative to the blade 3100 .
- each first release arm 5520 defines one opening 5524 within which a fastener 5543 may travel.
- each release arm 5520 may define two or more openings 5524 .
- Each stop 5525 is located at the angled section 5526 of one of the release arms 5520 .
- the stop 5525 is integral with the angled section 5526 .
- the stop 5525 is fastened to the angled section 5526 .
- the first stop 5525 is generally cube or cuboid shaped. In the example shown, the cuboid stop 5525 is oriented so that two surfaces of the stop 5525 aligned with the chassis openings 5009 and two surfaces aligned with the front and rear of the chassis 5010 .
- the stops 5525 may be flat, angled, curved, or may have any other suitable shape.
- the raised section 5523 of the release arm 5520 is configured to rotatably connect to a respective one of the swing arms 5570 .
- the raised section 5523 defines an opening 5522 at which the release arm 5520 connects to the swing arm 5570 .
- the raised section 5523 has the same thickness as the extension section 5527 . In other implementations, the raised section 5523 has a reduced thickness as compared to the extension section 5527 .
- FIG. 125 shows one example implementation of a swing arm 5570 that is configured to operably couple together a release arm 5520 to the actuation arm 5510 .
- the swing arms 5570 translate movement of the actuation member 5515 in one direction into movement of the stops 5525 in a different direction.
- the swing arms 5570 may translate rearward motion of the actuation member 5515 relative to the blade 3100 into a retracting motion of the stops 5525 relative to the chassis sidewalls 5011 .
- the swing arm 5570 includes a mounting section 5571 by which the swing arm 5570 may be rotatably connected to the blade 3100 .
- the mounting section 5571 may define a mounting opening 5572 through which a fastener may extend to connect the swing arm 5570 to the blade 3100 .
- the swing arm 5570 is configured to be selectively rotated at least partially relative to the blade 3100 .
- One end of the swing arm 5570 includes a first connection section 5573 at which the swing arm 5570 may be coupled to the actuation arm 5510 .
- the first connection section 5573 defines an opening 5574 through which the lug 5516 of the actuation arm 5510 may extend to rotatably couple the swing arm 5570 to the actuation arm 5510 .
- Another end of the swing arm 5570 includes a second connection section 5575 at which the swing arm 5570 may be coupled to the release arm 5520 .
- the second connection section 5575 includes one or more lugs 5576 that are configured to extend through the opening 5522 defined in the release arm 5520 .
- each swing arm 5570 is biased towards an initial position.
- each swing arm 5570 is biased towards a position at which the lugs 5576 push the raised section 5523 of the release bar 5520 to bias the stops 5525 into the locking position.
- each of the stops 5525 is biased through one of the openings 5009 when the stop 5525 is aligned with the openings 5009 .
- the stops 5525 automatically lock the blade 3100 into a predetermined position when the blade 3100 reaches the predetermined position.
- the stops 5525 may be configured to move to the locking positions only when actuated by a user.
- each swing arm 5570 includes a spring 5578 ( FIG. 126 ) that biases the swing arm 5570 towards the initial position.
- the springs 5528 are mounted beneath the mounting sections 5571 of the swing arms 5570 .
- the swing arms 5570 have a planar configuration.
- the mounting section 5571 of the swing arm 5570 is raised (e.g., stepped) above the first and second connection sections to define a space at which the spring 5578 may be mounted.
- the spring 5578 is a torsion spring. In other implementations, however, the spring 5578 may be any type of spring that will apply a rotational or pivotal load to the swing arm 5570 .
- springs may be mounted directly to the release arms 5520 to bias the stops 5525 to the locking positions, with or without the swing arm springs 5578 .
- a user releases the stops 5525 from the chassis openings 5009 by moving the actuation arm 5510 , to rotate the swing arms 5570 , to retract the release arms 5520 .
- the user applies sufficient force to the actuation arm 5510 to overcome the biasing force applied to the swing arms 5570 .
- the actuation member 4515 is configured to move forward and/or rearward relative to the blade 3100 when actuated.
- rearward movement of the actuation member 5515 with sufficient force to overcome the bias of the springs 5578 produces rearward movement of the actuation arm 5510 relative to the blade base 3110 .
- the rearward movement is caused by a user pushing on the actuation member 5515 relative to the blade handle 3108 .
- Rearward movement of the actuation arm 5510 applies a rotational force to the swing arms 5570 .
- the rearward movement of the actuation arm 5510 applies a clockwise rotational force to the right-most release arm 5520 and a counter-clockwise rotational force to the left-most release arm 5520 .
- the rotational movement of the swing arms 5570 produces a sliding movement of each release arm 5520 .
- the rotational movements of the swing arms 5570 produce forward and inward movements of the release member 5520 .
- the release arms 5520 slide diagonally across the blade base 3110 .
- the inward motion of the release arms 5520 retracts the stops 5525 from the chassis sidewalls 5011 .
- the inward motion of the release arms 5520 pulls the stops 5525 substantially sideways relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the release arms 5520 are configured to pull the stops 5525 sideways only. In other implementations, the inward motion of the release arms 5520 pulls the stops 5525 partially forward and partially sideways.
- Releasing the actuation member 5515 enables the springs 5578 to bias the swing arms 5570 back to the initial positions.
- the return movement of the swing arms 5570 pushes the actuation arm 5510 forward.
- the return movement of the swing arms 5570 also pushes the release arms 5520 outwardly, thereby biasing the stops 5525 back towards the locking positions.
- the return movement of the swing arms 5570 pushes the release arms 5520 rearwardly and outwardly.
- a user grasps the handle 3108 and pushes rearwardly on the actuation member 5515 .
- the stops 5525 retract from the rear openings 5009 C, the user pulls on the handle 3108 to move the blade 3100 forward relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the user releases the actuation member 5515 when the blade 3100 is moved sufficiently forward so that the stops 5525 clear the rear openings 5009 C.
- the stops 5525 are biased towards the chassis walls 5011 as the blade 3100 slides within the chassis 5010 .
- the stops 5525 snap into the intermediate openings 5009 B defined in the chassis 5010 .
- the user retains the actuation member 5515 in the rearward position.
- the stops 5525 remain in the releasing positions as the blade 3100 moves relative to the chassis 5010 .
- the user pulls the blade 3100 to the desired position (e.g., the first extended position)
- the user releases the actuation member 5515 to enable the stops 5525 to extend into the appropriate openings (e.g., the intermediate openings 5009 B) defined in the chassis 5010 .
- the user also may pull the blade 3100 to the second extended position before releasing the actuation member 5515 .
- the stops 5525 will extend into the front openings 5009 A when released.
- the user may pull the blade 3100 out of the chassis 5010 .
- one or more blades positioned in the chassis 3010 may be “smart” blades.
- a “smart” blade is a blade having PLI functionality.
- Smart blades may include a circuit board arrangement, a blade processor, and one or more “smart” couplers.
- the smart couplers include one or more media reading interfaces configured to read physical layer information stored on or in physical media segments.
- the blade processor may manage the media reading interfaces via the circuit board arrangement.
- a smart blade may be installed at a “smart” chassis, which includes a backplane (e.g., chassis backplane 3040 of FIG. 91 ).
- the circuit board arrangement of each smart blade connects the blade processors to the backplane.
- a chassis processor e.g., chassis processor 3060 of FIG. 48 ) connects to the blade processors via the backplane.
- the chassis processor may be connected to a data network.
- FIG. 91 illustrates one example smart chassis 3010 having a backplane 3040 including multiple blade ports 3042 . Each blade port 3042 is configured to connect to the circuit board arrangement of any smart blade positioned in the chassis 3010 .
- one or more of the blades may be “passive” blades.
- a “passive” blade is a blade that does not have PLI functionality.
- a passive blade may have one or more “passive” couplers that do not include media reading interfaces as will be described in more detail herein.
- the passive blade does not have a circuit board arrangement or a blade processor.
- a passive blade may be installed at a smart chassis.
- the passive blade may have the same or similar dimensions of the smart blade to enable the passive blade to fit within the smart chassis.
- the passive blade may be installed at a “passive” chassis.
- a “passive” chassis is a chassis that does not include a backplane or a chassis processor.
- a smart blade may be installed at the passive chassis.
- FIGS. 128-142 illustrate various example implementations of smart blades 6100 .
- the smart blade 6100 includes a base 6110 that is the same as the base 3110 of blade 3100 of FIGS. 54-127 .
- the smart blade 6100 also includes a circuit board arrangement 6120 , a blade processor 6140 , retention fingers 6160 , and latching tabs 6170 that are substantially the same as the circuit board arrangement 3120 , blade processor 3140 , retention fingers 3160 , and latching tabs 3170 of blade 3100 .
- the blade processor 6140 connects to the chassis backplane (e.g., chassis backplane 3040 of FIG. 91 ) via the circuit board arrangement 6120 as will be described in more detail herein.
- the example blade 6100 includes a plurality of smart couplers 6151 at the front of the blade 6100 .
- Each smart coupler 6151 includes one or more media reading interfaces 6158 .
- the media reading interfaces of the smart couplers 6151 are coupled to the circuit board arrangement 6120 of the blade 6100 .
- the blade processor 6140 also is coupled to the circuit board arrangement 6120 (see FIG. 128 ).
- a connection end 6125 ( FIG. 131 ) of the circuit board arrangement 6120 is plugged into one of the blade ports 3042 of the backplane 3040 (e.g., see connection end 3125 of blade 3100 plugged into port 3042 in FIG. 91 ).
- the connection end 6125 of the circuit board 6120 and the backplane 3040 forms a card edge connection, a plug/socket connection, a cable connection, a wireless connection, or another type of connection.
- the media reading interface determines that a media segment 6250 has been received at a port of the smart coupler 6151 .
- a media reading interface at a front port of the blade 6100 may determine when an outgoing media segment 3220 has been received at the front port.
- each media reading interface of a smart coupler 6151 forms an electrical connection between a storage device 6254 of a media segment 6250 and the circuit board arrangement 6120 of the blade 6100 (see FIG. 129 ).
- the storage device 6254 may store physical layer information about the media segment 6250 .
- the media reading interfaces are electrically connected (or otherwise communicatively coupled) to the blade processor 6140 .
- the blade processors 6140 connect to the data network via the chassis backplane 3040 and the chassis processor 3060 .
- each blade processor 6140 operates the media reading interfaces of each blade 6100 .
- the chassis processor 3060 is a master processor that connects to and manages the blade processors 6140 of the blades 6100 in the chassis 3010 .
- the chassis processor 3060 can instruct each of the blade processors 6140 to determine which communications couplers 6150 have media segments 3200 inserted therein, to obtain physical layer information from the media segments 3200 , or to forward the physical layer information to the chassis processor 3060 for storage and/or transmission to the data network.
- FIGS. 129A and 129B show example implementations of smart couplers 6151 including example media reading interfaces 6158 .
- the smart coupler 6151 of FIG. 129A is configured to receive two or more LC-type optical connectors and the smart coupler 6151 of FIG. 129B is configured to receive two MPO-type optical connectors.
- each media reading interface 6158 is formed from one or more contact members 6159 .
- some types of coupler bodies 6151 defines slots 6154 configured to receive the one or more contact members 6159 .
- portions of the contact members 6159 extend into the through-passages of the couplers 6151 to engage the electrical contacts of the storage devices 6254 of the fiber optic connector 6250 .
- the contact members are configured to engage contacts on a printed circuit board 6120 ( FIG. 129A ) associated with (e.g., positioned on top of) the coupler 6151 .
- the blade processor 6140 also can be electrically coupled to the printed circuit board 6120 for locally managing the media reading interfaces 6158 .
- Such a processor 6140 can communicate with the memory circuitry on the connector storage devices 6254 via the contact members and the printed circuit board arrangement 6120 .
- FIGS. 130A and 130B show example implementations of physical media segments 6250 configured to terminate at least one optical fiber.
- FIG. 130A shows a physical media segment 6250 implemented as an LC-type fiber optic connector and
- FIG. 130 B shows a physical media segment 6250 implemented as an MPO-type fiber optic connector.
- Each fiber optic connector 6250 includes a body 6251 enclosing an optical ferrule 6252 through which at least one optical fiber extends.
- the body 6251 also includes a key area 6253 at which the storage device 6254 may be positioned.
- the key area 6253 may define a depression or cavity in which a storage device 6254 can be positioned.
- the storage device 6254 includes memory circuitry (e.g., an EEPROM chip) arranged on a printed circuit board. Electrical contacts also are arranged on the printed circuit board for interaction with the media reading interface 6158 of the smart coupler 6151 .
- memory circuitry e.g., an EEPROM chip
- FIGS. 131-142 illustrate various example bladed panel systems in which the smart couplers 6151 of the blades 6100 remain electrically connected to a chassis backplane 3040 while the blades 6100 move relative to the chassis 3010 between at least two positions.
- the couplers 6151 may remain electrically connected to the backplane 3040 as the blade 6100 moves between the closed and first extended positions.
- the example blade 6100 includes a circuit board arrangement 6120 having at least a first board 6122 and a second board 6124 .
- the smart couplers 6151 defining the front ports of the blade 6100 connect to the first board 6122 .
- the connection end 6125 of the circuit board arrangement 6125 is defined by the second board 6124 .
- the blade 6100 also includes a first connection system 6130 that electrically connects the first board 6122 and the second board 6124 .
- the first connection system 6130 also enables movement between the first board 6122 and the second board 6124 without disrupting the electrical connection between the two boards 6122 , 6124 .
- the first connection system 6130 enables the circuit board arrangement 6120 to remain connected to the backplane 3040 of the chassis 3010 during movement of the blade 6100 .
- the chassis processor 3060 may manage the media reading interfaces 6158 of the smart couplers 6151 when the blade 6100 has been moved to the first extended position (e.g., to facilitate insertion and/or removal of media segments at the front ports.
- each connection assembly 6130 includes a first portion secured to the first circuit board 6122 and a second portion secured to the second circuit board 6124 .
- the first portion of the connection assembly 6130 is moveably secured to the second portion.
- the first portion of certain types of connection assemblies 6130 is slideably secured to the second portion.
- Certain types of connection assemblies 6130 also include a flexible electrical connector that maintains an electrical connection between the first board 6122 and the second board 6124 .
- FIGS. 131-135 illustrate one example connection assembly 6130 suitable for use with a blade 6100 .
- the connection assembly 6130 includes at least a first mounting member 6134 ( FIG. 132 ) that holds or otherwise connects to the second circuit board 6124 .
- the first mounting member 6134 may be fastened, glued, soldered, welded, snap-fit, or otherwise installed on the second circuit board 6124 .
- FIG. 135 shows an example first mounting member 6134 being fastened (e.g., via screws) to a top of the second board 6124 .
- a rail 6135 ( FIG. 132 ) extends outwardly from the first mounting members 6134 .
- the rail 6135 is axially fixed relative to the first mounting member 6134 .
- the rail 6135 is unitary with the first mounting member 6134 .
- the connection assembly 6130 also includes at least a second mounting member 6136 ( FIG. 133 ) that is connected to the first circuit board 6122 .
- the second mounting member 6136 is fastened to the first circuit board 6122 (e.g., via screws).
- the second mounting member 6136 may be glued, soldered, welded, snap-fit, or otherwise installed on the first circuit board 6136 .
- FIG. 135 shows an example second mounting member 6136 being fastened to a top of the first board 6122 .
- the rails 6135 slide through an opening 6137 defined in the second mounting members 6136 to move the first mounting member 6134 toward and away from the second mounting member 6136 . Moving the first mounting member 6134 toward and away from the second mounting member 6136 moves the second circuit board 6124 toward and away from the first circuit board 6122 .
- connection assembly 6130 includes only a single first mounting member 6134 , a single rail 6135 , and a single second mounting member 6136 . In other implementations, however, the connection assembly 6130 can include two or more sets of mounting members 6134 , 6136 , and rails 6135 .
- the connection assembly 6130 shown in FIGS. 131-135 includes two spaced first mounting members 6134 , each holding one rail 6135 .
- the connection assembly 6130 of FIGS. 131-135 also includes two spaced second mounting members 6136 configured to slideably receive the rails 6135 .
- first mounting member 6134 is shown in FIG. 132 .
- the first mounting member 6134 is configured to secure to the second circuit board 6124 .
- Certain types of first mounting members 6134 include rectangular bases that are configured to be installed on the second circuit board 6124 .
- Certain types of first mounting members 6134 also include curved tops. In the example shown, the curved top of the first mounting member 6134 defines axial ribs. In other implementations, however, the first mounting member 6134 may include a body defining a different shape (e.g., a rectangle, a triangle, etc.).
- each rail 6135 has a circular transverse cross-section. In other implementations, however, the rails 6135 may have different cross-sectional shapes (e.g., square, rectangle, oval, trapezoid, etc.) that complement the cross-sectional shapes of channels 6137 of the second mounting members 6136 ( FIG. 133 ). Each of the rails 6135 is configured to receive a fastener 6138 ( FIG. 131 ) that secures the rail 6135 to the second mounting member 6136 to inhibit the rail 6135 from sliding completely through the second mounting member 6136 .
- a fastener 6138 FIG. 131
- FIG. 133 One example second mounting member 6136 is shown in FIG. 133 .
- the second mounting member 6136 is configured to secure to the first circuit board 6122 (e.g., see FIGS. 134-135 ).
- the second mounting member 6136 defines a channel 6137 through which a rail 6135 may extend.
- Certain types of second mounting members 6136 define a stepped profile on one side. In other implementations, however, the second mounting members 6136 may define any suitable shape.
- the connection assembly 6130 also includes a cable 6131 that connects to the first circuit board 6122 at a first plug 6132 and that connects to the second circuit board 6124 at a second plug 6133 (see FIG. 131 ).
- the cable 6131 is generally flexible and is sufficiently long to enable the second printed circuit board 6124 to move relative to the first printed circuit board 6122 without disconnecting from the first printed circuit board 6122 .
- the cable 6131 forms a half loop at a location between the first and second plugs 6132 , 6133 .
- the second printed circuit board 6124 is in the extended position (e.g., as shown in FIG. 131 )
- the cable 6131 straightens out to extend over the distance between the printed circuit boards 6122 , 6124 .
- connection assembly 6130 also includes a flange 6139 around which the cable 6131 may fold to manage the bending of the cable 6131 during extension and retraction of the circuit board arrangement 6120 .
- the flange 6139 may include an elongated, planar body extending generally parallel with the first circuit board 6122 .
- the free end of the elongated flange 6139 is bent, folded, or curved to inhibit damage to the cable 6131 .
- the cable 6131 may form the half-loop around the distal end of the flange 6139 when the circuit board arrangement 6120 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 91 ).
- the first mounting members 6134 abut the second mounting members 6136 and a majority of each rail 6135 protrudes forwardly of the second mounting members 6136 (see FIG. 91 ).
- the first and second plugs 6132 , 6133 of the cable 6131 are positioned adjacent each other with the first plug 6132 being positioned below the elongated flange 6139 .
- the cable 6131 wraps around the distal end of the flange 6139 and extends substantially along the length of both major sides of the elongated flange 6139 .
- the second mounting members 6136 slide forwardly along the rails 6135 .
- the second mounting members 6136 slide along the rails 6135 until the second mounting members 6136 abut the ends of the rails 6135 .
- the second mounting members 6136 abut screw heads on the ends of the rails 6135 .
- the first cable plug 6132 of the corresponding cable 6131 moves with the blade 6100 .
- the second cable plug 6133 remains at a fixed position relative to the backplane 3040 .
- a user wants to add, remove, or replace an outgoing media segment 3200 on a blade 6100 then the user can slide the blade 6100 to the first extended position to access the desired segment or coupler port without disconnecting the storage devices of the remaining physical media segments 6200 mounted to the blade 6100 from the data management network.
- moving the blades 6100 further out of the chassis 3010 disconnects the blades 6100 from the backplane 3040 and, hence, from the data network.
- moving the blade 6100 to the second extended position may facilitate access the rear ports of the front couplers 6151 through an open top of the blade 6100 .
- the moving the blade 6100 to the second extended position enables a user to access (e.g., add, remove, or replace) the blade processor 6140 . In other implementations, however, the user can access the processor 6140 when the blade 6100 is in the first extended position.
- the example blade 6100 includes a second example connection system 6130 ′ that connects the processor 6140 to the backplane 3040 of the chassis 3010 .
- the second connection assembly 6130 ′ includes at least a first mounting member 6134 ′ that holds or otherwise connects to the second circuit board 6124 .
- the first mounting member 6134 ′ mounts the second circuit board 6124 on rails 6135 ′ that are connected to the first circuit board 6122 via second mounting members 6136 ′.
- the rails 6135 ′ slide through the second mounting members 6136 ′ to move the second printed circuit board 6124 relative to the first printed circuit board 6122 .
- the first mounting members 6134 ′ move over the rails 6135 ′ to move the second printed circuit board 6124 relative to the first printed circuit board 6122 .
- the first mounting member 6134 ′ is configured to mount on rails 6135 ′.
- the first mounting member 6134 ′ includes a generally T-shaped body that defines an open-ended slot through which a rail 6135 ′ can extend.
- the first mounting member 6134 ′ may include a body defining a different shape (e.g., a rectangle, a triangle, etc.).
- the first mounting member 6134 ′ may define through-opening instead of a slot.
- one first mounting member 6134 ′ is installed at a first side of the second printed circuit board 6124 and another first mounting member 6134 ′ is installed at a second side of the second printed circuit board 6124 .
- the second printed circuit board 6124 is held between two first mounting members 6134 ′.
- the first mounting members 6134 ′ are mounted on top of the second printed circuit board 6124 (e.g., see FIG. 139 ).
- the rails 6135 ′ are connected to the first printed circuit board 6122 by second mounting members 6136 ′.
- One example second mounting member 6136 is shown in FIG. 141 .
- the second mounting member 6136 ′ defines a channel 6137 ′ through which one of the rails 6135 ′ may extend.
- One example rail 6135 ′ is shown in FIG. 142 .
- each rail 6135 ′ has a circular transverse cross-section.
- the rails 6135 ′ may have different cross-sectional shapes (e.g., square, rectangle, oval, trapezoid, etc.) that complement the cross-sectional shapes of channels 6137 ′ of the second mounting members 6136 ′.
- Each of the rails 6135 ′ includes a stop 6138 ′ at one end to inhibit the rail 6135 ′ from sliding completely through the first mounting member 6134 ′.
- the connection assembly 6130 ′ also includes the cable 6131 that connects to the first circuit board 6122 at the first plug 6132 ( FIG. 138 ) and that connects to the second circuit board 6124 at the second plug 6133 ( FIGS. 131 and 138 ).
- the cable 6131 is generally flexible and is sufficiently long to enable the second printed circuit board 6124 to move relative to the first printed circuit board 6122 without disconnecting from the first printed circuit board 6122 .
- the cable 6131 can form a half loop at a location between the first and second connectors 6132 , 6133 .
- the second printed circuit board 6124 is in the extended position (e.g., as shown in FIG. 138 )
- the cable 6131 substantially straightens out to extend over the distance between the printed circuit boards 6122 , 6124 .
- the second connection assembly 6130 ′ also includes the flange 6139 around which the cable 6131 may fold to manage the bending of the cable 6131 during extension and retraction of the circuit board arrangement 6120 .
- the flange 6139 may include an elongated, planar body extending generally parallel with the first circuit board 6122 .
- the free end of the elongated flange 6139 is bent, folded, or curved to inhibit damage to the cable 6131 .
- the cable 6131 may form the half-loop around the distal end of the flange 6139 when the circuit board arrangement 6120 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 136 ).
- the blade 6100 is being inserted into the chassis 3010 and the second circuit board 6124 has not yet been connected to the backplane 3040 .
- the first mounting members 6134 abut the second mounting members 6136 ′ and a majority of each rail 6135 ′ protrudes forwardly of the second mounting members 6136 ′.
- the first and second plugs 6132 , 6133 are positioned adjacent each other with the first plug 6132 positioned below the elongated flange 6139 .
- the cable 6131 wraps around the distal end of the flange 6139 and extends substantially along the length of both major sides of the elongated flange 6139 .
- the second mounting members 6136 ′ slide forwardly along the rails 6135 ′.
- the second mounting members 6136 ′ slide along the rails 6135 ′ until the second mounting members 6136 ′ abut the ends of the rails 6135 ′.
- the second mounting members 6136 ′ abut screw heads on the ends of the rails 6135 ′.
- the first cable plug 6132 of the corresponding cable 6131 moves with the blade 6100 .
- the second cable plug 6133 remains at a fixed position relative to the backplane 3040 .
- a user wants to add, remove, or replace an outgoing media segment 3200 on a blade 6100 then the user can slide the blade 6100 to the first extended position to access the desired segment or coupler port without disconnecting the storage devices of the remaining physical media segments 3200 mounted to the blade 6100 from the data management network.
- moving the blades 6100 further out of the chassis 3010 disconnects the blades 6100 from the backplane 3040 and, hence, from the data network.
- moving the blade 6100 to the second extended position may facilitate access the rear ports of the front couplers 6151 through an open top of the blade 6100 .
- the moving the blade 6100 to the second extended position enables a user to access (e.g., add, remove, or replace) the blade processor 6140 . In other implementations, however, the user can access the processor 6140 when the blade 6100 is in the first extended position.
- FIGS. 143-150 illustrate one example bladed panel system 7000 including a “passive” chassis 7010 and a plurality of “passive” blades 7100 .
- one or more smart blades 6100 may be mounted to the passive chassis 7010 .
- the chassis 7010 includes side walls 7011 interconnected by top and bottom walls 7012 to define an open front and an open rear.
- a rear cover 7050 may be mounted to the chassis 7010 .
- the rear cover 7050 is substantially the same as rear cover 3050 disclosed above.
- the example chassis 7010 does not include a backplane.
- a panel 7040 may be mounted in place of a backplane.
- the rear of the chassis 7010 may be left open.
- One or more guides 7015 are positioned along the side walls 7011 .
- the blades 7100 are moveably positioned in the chassis 7010 using the guides 7015 .
- the blades 7100 may be slid along the guides 7015 .
- the guides 7015 extend between the front and rear of the chassis 7010 .
- the chassis 7010 includes eight guides 7015 . In other implementations, however, the chassis 7010 may include greater or fewer guides (e.g., one guide, two guides, three guides, four guides, ten guides, twelve guides, etc.).
- FIG. 146 shows one example implementation of a first passive blade 7100 A including a coupler arrangement 7150 A having one or more passive couplers 7151 .
- a “passive” blade 7100 is a blade that does not include PLI/PLM functionality.
- a passive blade 7100 does not include a circuit board arrangement.
- a passive blade 7100 may include couplers 7151 that do not have media reading interfaces.
- the passive couplers 7151 are configured to receive media segments 3200 regardless of whether the media segment 3200 includes a storage device storing physical layer information.
- dust caps 7152 are positioned at the front ports of the blade 7100 A.
- the first passive blade 7100 A includes a generally planar base 7110 having outer and inner extensions 7111 , 7113 . At least one of the outer extensions 7111 defines a notch 7005 that enables the blade 7100 A to be locked in a closed position within the chassis 7010 as described above.
- the inner extensions 7113 define cable tie locations 7039 at which media segments may be secured to the base 7110 .
- One or more latching tabs 7170 , 7176 may be positioned on the base 7110 to enable the blade 7100 A to be locked into one or more positions relative to the chassis 7010 . In other implementations, other types of latching systems may be used with blade 7100 A.
- a handle 7108 extends forwardly of the base 7110 to facilitate movement of the blade 7100 A relative to the chassis 7010 .
- a frame 7115 is positioned at the front of the first passive blade 7100 A.
- the frame 7115 is configured to secure one or more passive couplers 7151 to the base 7110 .
- the couplers 7151 are configured to receive both incoming media segments 3210 and outgoing media segments 3220 .
- the couplers 7151 receive only outgoing media segments 3220 and couplers positioned at the rear of the base 7110 receive the incoming media segments 3210 .
- Retention fingers 7160 extend forwardly of the frame 7115 .
- the retention fingers 7160 are substantially the same as retention fingers 3160 described above.
- FIGS. 147 and 148 show one example implementation of the frame 7115 .
- the example frame 7115 includes parallel top and bottom members 7090 , 7091 , respectively, connected by a front panel 7192 .
- the front panel 7192 defines one or more openings 7193 configured to receive the coupler arrangement 7150 of the blade 7100 A.
- an intermediate section 7198 of the frame 7115 has a reduced height compared to outer sections of the frame 7115 .
- the reduced height section 7198 also defines openings 7196 configured to receive couplers 7151 .
- the reduced height section 7198 defines a blank flange extending between the outer sections of the frame 7115 .
- each opening 7193 is sized to receive a single coupler 7151 and the openings 7193 are separated by dividing flanges 7194 .
- each opening 7193 may be sized to receive a simplex coupler 7151 .
- each opening 7193 is sized to receive a duplex coupler 7151 .
- each opening 7193 is sized to receive a quadruplex coupler 7151 .
- each opening 7193 may be sized to receive various other sized couplers.
- the openings 7193 are separated into two or more groups by dividing sections 7195 ( FIG. 148 ). The dividing sections 7195 are thicker than dividing flanges 7194 .
- the frame 7115 is configured to receive one or more couplers 7151 configured to receive media segments terminated with SC-type connectors (see FIG. 146 ). In other implementations, the frame 7115 is configured to receive one or more couplers 7151 configured to receive media segments terminated with LC-type connectors (see couplers 7157 of the second example passive blade 7100 B of FIG. 149 ). In still other implementations, the frame 7115 may be configured to receive media segments terminated with various other types of connectors (e.g., ST-type connectors, FC-type connectors, MPO-type connectors).
- various other types of connectors e.g., ST-type connectors, FC-type connectors, MPO-type connectors.
- FIG. 150 shows a third example passive blade 7100 C including a base 7110 , latching tabs 7170 , 7176 , and retention fingers 7160 .
- a frame 7115 ′ is positioned at the front of the base 7110 to secure a plurality of couplers 7153 to the blade 7100 C.
- the couplers 7153 are configured to receive MPO-type connectors. In other implementations, however, the frame 7115 ′ may be configured to receive other types of couplers.
- the frame 7115 ′ includes a reduced height section 7116 that is not configured to hold any couplers. Rather, the reduced height section 7116 of the frame 7115 ′ includes a generally planar face that extends between groups of front couplers 7153 .
- dust caps 7154 are received at the front ports of the couplers 7153 .
- a single chassis 7010 may receive one or more types of blades 7100 .
- the chassis 7010 shown in FIG. 144 has received a third example passive blade 7100 C at each of the top two guides 7015 , a second example passive blade 7100 B at each of the three intermediate guides 7015 , and a first example passive blade 7100 A at each of the three bottom guides 7015 .
- the guides 7100 may be arranged in the chassis 7010 in a different configuration.
- any of the passive blades 7100 A, 7100 B, 7100 C may be positioned in a chassis that includes a backplane (e.g., chassis 3010 disclosed above).
- a backplane e.g., chassis 3010 disclosed above.
- the rear of each of the passive chasses 7100 A, 7100 B, 7100 C terminates before the backplane 3040 when the chassis 7100 A, 7100 B, 7100 C is mounted to a smart chassis 3010 in a closed position.
- the reduced height section 7198 , 7116 of the frames 7115 , 7115 ′ of the passive chasses 7100 A, 7100 B, 7100 C accommodate a status board (e.g., status board 3070 of FIG.
- the reduced height sections 7198 , 7116 of the frames 7115 , 7115 ′ facilitate gripping the handle 7108 when outgoing media segments 3220 are routed to the front of the blades 7100 A, 7100 B, 7100 C (see FIG. 144 ).
- One or more chasses e.g., chasses 1010 , 2010 , 3010 , 5010 , and 7010
- One or more blades are installed in each chassis.
- a smart blades such as blade 3100
- a status board 3070 also may be installed at the chassis 3010 and connected to the backplane 3040 .
- the blade 3100 is slid rearwardly along guides 3015 from the front of the chassis 3010 .
- a circuit board arrangement 3120 of the blade 3100 is connected to a backplane 3040 of the chassis 3010 by sliding the blade 3100 rearwardly into the chassis 3010 along the guides 3015 .
- a second circuit board 3124 on each blade 3100 may be connected to the backplane 3040 (e.g., via a card-edge connection, via a connector, etc.).
- the blade processor 3140 on the smart blade 3100 also is connected to the backplane 3040 via the circuit board arrangement 3120 .
- Incoming cables 3210 may be connected to the rear ports of each blade 3100 after the blade 3100 has been inserted into the chassis 3010 .
- a technician may plug connectorized ends 3212 of the incoming cables 3210 into the rear ports of the blade 3100 .
- the technician also may secure the incoming cables 3210 to the blade 3100 , the chassis 3010 , and/or the frame.
- the technician may routes the incoming cables 3210 to a cable clamp 3030 , fanout arrangement 3035 , or other securement structure at the chassis 3010 before securing the incoming cables 3210 to the blades 3100 .
- the technician also may secure (e.g., using a cable tie 3039 ) the incoming cables 3210 to the tabs on the intermediate flanges at the rear of the blades to provide slack length of the incoming cables 3210 between the chassis 3010 and the blade 3100 .
- the technician routes the connectorized ends 3212 of the incoming cables 3210 to the rear ports of the blade 3100 .
- the technician plugs the connectorized ends 3212 of the incoming cables 3210 into ports 3195 ( FIG. 78 ) defined by couplers at the rear of the blade 3100 .
- the technician accesses the rear ports 3195 from the rear of the chassis 3010 .
- the technician can unplug a dust plug 3158 ( FIG. 79 ) from one of the rear ports 3195 of the rear couplers and insert one of the connectorized ends 3212 into the rear port 3195 from the rear of the chassis 3010 .
- the technician feeds connectorized ends 3212 of the incoming cables 3210 from the rear of the chassis 3010 , over the base of the respective blade, toward the front couplers.
- the technician may subsequently access the rear ports of the front couplers through an open top of the blade from the front of the chassis 3010 .
- the technician may access the front couplers when the blade 3100 is in a first or second extended position.
- the technician can unplug a dust plug from one of the rear ports of the front couplers and insert each of the connectorized ends 3212 of the incoming media segments 3210 into one of the rear ports from the front of the chassis 3010 .
- Outgoing cables 3220 may be installed at the front ports of the blades 3100 . If the blade is a smart blade, then the outgoing cables 3220 may be installed at the front ports without disconnecting the blade 3100 from the backplane 3040 .
- the technician may plug the connectors 3222 of the outgoing cables 3220 into the front ports of the front couplers when the blade 3100 is in the closed or first extended position. In other implementations, however, the connectors 3222 of the outgoing fibers 3220 may be plugged into the front coupler ports while the blade 3100 is in any desired position.
- the technician also routes the fibers 3220 through the retention fingers 3160 at the front of the blade 3100 .
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Optics & Photonics (AREA)
- Microelectronics & Electronic Packaging (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Power Engineering (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Mechanical Coupling Of Light Guides (AREA)
- Structure Of Telephone Exchanges (AREA)
- Small-Scale Networks (AREA)
- Details Of Connecting Devices For Male And Female Coupling (AREA)
- Connector Housings Or Holding Contact Members (AREA)
- Casings For Electric Apparatus (AREA)
- Light Guides In General And Applications Therefor (AREA)
- Fittings On The Vehicle Exterior For Carrying Loads, And Devices For Holding Or Mounting Articles (AREA)
- Other Liquid Machine Or Engine Such As Wave Power Use (AREA)
- Electric Cable Arrangement Between Relatively Moving Parts (AREA)
- Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)
- Moulding By Coating Moulds (AREA)
- Body Structure For Vehicles (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- This application is a continuation of application Ser. No. 15/043,897, filed Feb. 15, 2016, which is a continuation of application Ser. No. 14/574,596, filed Dec. 18, 2014, now U.S. Pat. No. 9,265,172, which is a continuation of application Ser. No. 13/025,750, filed Feb. 11, 2011, now U.S. Pat. No. 8,923,013, which application claims the benefit of provisional application Ser. No. 61/303,948, filed Feb. 12, 2010, titled “Bladed Communications System;” U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/413,844, filed Nov. 15, 2010, titled “Communications Bladed Panel Systems;” and U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/439,693, filed Feb. 4, 2011, titled “Communications Bladed Panel Systems,” which applications are incorporated herein by reference in their entirety.
- In communications infrastructure installations, a variety of communications devices can be used for switching and connecting communications signal transmission paths in a communications network. Some such communications devices are installed in one or more equipment racks to permit organized, high-density installations to be achieved in limited space available for equipment.
- Installing a large number of connections in an equipment rack is efficient with respect to floor space, but places a premium on the ability to manage and maintain the communications cables leading to and away from these equipment racks. Further, due to the increasing demand for communications system capacity, it is desirable to increase the density of connections within a given space that can be achieved.
- Network management systems (NMS) are typically aware of logical communication links that exist in a communications network, but typically do not have information about the specific physical layer media (e.g., the communications devices, cables, couplers, etc.) that are used to implement the logical communication links. Indeed, NMS systems typically do not have the ability to display or otherwise provide information about how logical communication links are implemented at the physical layer level.
- The present disclosure relates to communications panels which provide a higher density of connections within a given floor space, provide improved cable management structures, and provide physical layer management capabilities. One or more communications devices for providing such connections can be bundled into compact operational units, known as blades.
- One aspect of the present disclosure relates to a communications panel system including one or more blades mounted to a chassis.
- In some implementations, the blades are configured to move separately relative to the chassis.
- In some implementations, the blades are each configured to provide physical layer information (PLI) functionality and physical layer management (PLM) functionality.
- The accompanying drawings, which are incorporated in and constitute a part of the description, illustrate several aspects of the present disclosure. A brief description of the drawings is as follows:
-
FIG. 1 is a diagram of a portion of an example communications and data management system in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 2 is a block diagram of one implementation of a communications management system that includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure; -
FIG. 3 is a block diagram of one high-level example of a port and media reading interface that are suitable for use in the management system ofFIG. 2 in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure; -
FIGS. 4-24 provide an example connector assembly implemented as a bladed panel system configured to support PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure; and -
FIGS. 25-44 provide another example connector assembly implemented as a bladed panel system configured to support PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure; -
FIGS. 45-49 illustrate one example chassis of a bladed panel system suitable for receiving one or more blades in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure; -
FIGS. 50-51 illustrate another example chassis of a bladed panel system suitable for receiving one or more blades in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure; -
FIGS. 52-53 illustrate another example chassis of a bladed panel system suitable for receiving one or more blades in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure; -
FIGS. 54-56 illustrate an example blade suitable for receipt in any of the chasses shown inFIGS. 25-51 in accordance with aspects of the present disclosure; -
FIGS. 57-62 illustrate one example blade including a coupler arrangement that connects incoming media segments terminated at LC-type connectors to outgoing media segments terminated at LC-type connectors; -
FIGS. 63-66 illustrate another example blade including a coupler arrangement that connects incoming media segments terminated at MPO-type connectors to outgoing media segments terminated at MPO-type connectors; -
FIGS. 67-71 illustrate one example blade including a coupler arrangement that connects incoming media segments terminated at MPO-type connectors to outgoing media segments terminated at LC-type connectors; -
FIGS. 72-74 illustrate one example labeling assembly suitable for use with any of the blades disclosed herein; -
FIGS. 75 and 76 illustrate one example bladed panel system in which a plurality of blades is mounted within an example chassis with a top blade shown in a closed position relative to the chassis, a middle blade shown in a first extended position relative to the chassis, and a bottom blade shown in a second extended position relative to the chassis; -
FIGS. 77-79 show rear perspective views of a bladed panel system including management structures at the rear of the chassis and the rear of the blades; -
FIGS. 80-90 illustrate an example bladed panel system in which at least one chassis and at least one bracket are mounted to a frame to facilitate management of the outgoing media segments as blades are moved relative to the chassis; -
FIG. 91 is a front perspective view of an example chassis and backplane with a top of the chassis removed so that the interior of the chassis and a blade positioned in the chassis are visible; -
FIGS. 92-94 are enlarged views of the interior of the chassis shown inFIG. 91 to illustrate an example latching arrangement by which a blade may be latched into the closed position relative to the chassis; -
FIGS. 95-98 illustrate an example latching arrangement by which a blade may be latched in at least the first extended position relative to the chassis; -
FIGS. 99-113 show another example latching arrangement that is configured to secure blade in at least the first extended position relative to chassis; -
FIGS. 114-117 show another example latching arrangement that is configured to secure a blade in at least the first extended position relative to a chassis; -
FIGS. 118-127 show another example bladed chassis system including an example chassis that is configured to receive one or more blades having another example latching arrangement that is configured to secure each blade in at least the first extended position relative to a chassis; -
FIG. 128 is a perspective view of an example smart blade including a circuit board arrangement, a connection system, a blade processor, and a smart coupler arrangement in accordance with aspects of the disclosure; -
FIG. 129A is a cross-sectional view of an example smart coupler including a media reading interface that is contacting a storage device of an LC-type fiber optic connector received at a respective port of the smart coupler in accordance with aspects of the disclosure; -
FIG. 129B is a perspective view of an example smart coupler including media reading interfaces that are configured to contact storage devices of MPO-type fiber optic connectors received at the port of the smart coupler in accordance with aspects of the disclosure; -
FIG. 130A is a perspective view of the example LC-type fiber optic connector ofFIG. 129A ; -
FIG. 130B is an exploded, perspective view of an example MPO-type fiber optic connector that is suitable for receipt at a port of the smart coupler shown inFIG. 129B ; -
FIGS. 131-135 show an example connection system that enables a smart blade to remain connected to a chassis backplane when the smart blade moves relative to the chassis in accordance with aspects of the disclosure; -
FIGS. 136-142 show another example connection system that enables a smart blade to remain connected to a chassis backplane when the smart blade moves relative to the chassis in accordance with aspects of the disclosure; and -
FIGS. 143-150 illustrate one example bladed panel system including a “passive” chassis and a plurality of “passive” blades in accordance with aspects of the disclosure. - The present disclosure is directed to bladed distribution panel systems for use in communications networks. The bladed distribution panel systems include one or more bladed distribution modules that are configured to connect together two or more cables. Certain types of bladed distribution modules include one or more first cable ports at which terminated ends of first cables (e.g., patch cables) can be plugged and one or more second cable ports at which terminated ends of second cables (e.g., distribution cables) can be plugged. Opposite ends of the first cables can connect together ports of two or more bladed distribution modules. Opposite ends of the second cables can connect the bladed distribution modules to a larger communications network as will be described in more detail herein. Communications signals pass through the bladed distribution modules between the first cables and the second cables.
- In addition, PLI (physical layer information) cables also may be routed to the bladed distribution modules. In accordance with some aspects, the PLI cables may provide power (e.g., electrical power) to the bladed distribution modules. In accordance with other aspects, the PLI cables may carry additional data signals between the bladed distribution modules and a data network as will be described in more detail herein. In certain implementations, the data network is different from the communications network to which the second cables connect.
- As the term is used herein, a “cable” refers to a physical medium that is capable of carrying one or more data signals along its length. Non-limiting examples of suitable cables include fiber cables, electrical cables, and hybrid cables. For example, a fiber optic cable includes one or more optical fibers that are configured to carry optical signals along their length. The fibers in a fiber optic cable may be buffered and/or jacketed (e.g., individually or as a group). Certain types of fiber optic cables may be terminated with one or more connectors (e.g., SC, LC, FC, LX.5, or MPO connectors).
- An electrical cable includes one or more conductors (e.g., wires) that are configured to carry electrical signals along their length. The conductors in an electrical cable may be insulated (e.g., individually or as a group). Non-limiting examples of electrical cables include CAT-5, 6, and 7 twisted-pair cables, DS1 line, and DS3 line. Certain types of electrical cables may be terminated with one or more connectors or connector assemblies (e.g., RJ jacks and plugs, DSX jacks and plugs, BNC connectors, F connectors, punch-down terminations, or bantam jacks and plugs). A hybrid cable includes a combination of one or more wires and one or more optical fibers that may be insulated/jacketed.
- Reference will now be made in detail to exemplary aspects of the present disclosure that are illustrated in the accompanying drawings. Wherever possible, the same reference numbers will be used throughout the drawings to refer to the same or like parts.
-
FIG. 1 is a diagram of a portion of an example communications anddata management system 100. Theexample system 100 shown inFIG. 1 includes a part of acommunications network 101 along which communications signals S1 pass. In one example implementation, thenetwork 101 can include an Internet Protocol network. In other implementations, however, thecommunications network 101 may include other types of networks. - The
communications network 101 includes connected network components (e.g., connector assemblies, inter-networking devices, internet working devices, servers, outlets, and end user equipment (e.g., computers)). In one example implementation, communications signals S1 pass from a computer, to a wall outlet, to a port of communication panel, to a first port of an inter-networking device, out another port of the inter-networking device, to a port of the same or another communications panel, to a rack mounted server. In other implementations, the communications signals S1 may follow other paths within thecommunications network 101. - The portion of the
communications network 101 shown inFIG. 1 includes first andsecond connector assemblies communications network 101 to another portion of thecommunications network 101. Non-limiting examples ofconnector assemblies - In the example shown, the
first connector assembly 130 defines at least oneport 132 configured to communicatively couple at least a first media segment (e.g., cable) 105 to at least a second media segment (e.g., cable) 115 to enable the communication signals S1 to pass between themedia segments port 132 of thefirst connector assembly 130 may be directly connected to aport 132′ of thesecond connector assembly 130′. As the term is used herein, theport 132 is directly connected to theport 132′ when the communications signals S1 pass between the twoports port 132 and a second terminated end of the patch cable into theport 132′ directly connects theports - The
port 132 of thefirst connector assembly 130 also may be indirectly connected to theport 132′ of thesecond connector assembly 130′. As the term is used herein, theport 132 is indirectly connected to theport 132′ when the communications signals S1 pass through an intermediate port when traveling between theports port 132 at thefirst connector assembly 130, to a port of a third connector assembly at which the media segment is coupled, to another media segment that is routed from the port of the third connector assembly to theport 132′ of thesecond connector assembly 130′. - Non-limiting examples of media segments include optical cables, electrical cables, and hybrid cables. The media segments may be terminated with electrical plugs, electrical jacks, fiber optic connectors, fiber optic adapters, media converters, or other termination components. In the example shown, each
media segment connector media segments port 132 of theconnector assembly 130 can be configured to align ferrules of twofiber optic connectors port 132 of theconnector assembly 130 can be configured to electrically connect an electrical plug with an electrical socket (e.g., a jack). In yet another implementation, theport 132 can include a media converter configured to connect an optical fiber to an electrical conductor. - In accordance with some aspects, the
connector assembly 130 does not actively manage (e.g., is passive with respect to) the communications signals S1 passing throughport 132. For example, in some implementations, theconnector assembly 130 does not modify the communications signal S1 carried over themedia segments connector assembly 130 does not read, store, or analyze the communications signal S1 carried over themedia segments - In accordance with aspects of the disclosure, the communications and
data management system 100 also provides physical layer information (PLI) functionality as well as physical layer management (PLM) functionality. As the term is used herein, “PLI functionality” refers to the ability of a physical component or system to identify or otherwise associate physical layer information with some or all of the physical components used to implement the physical layer of the system. As the term is used herein, “PLM functionality” refers to the ability of a component or system to manipulate or to enable others to manipulate the physical components used to implement the physical layer of the system (e.g., to track what is connected to each component, to trace connections that are made using the components, or to provide visual indications to a user at a selected component). - As the term is used herein, “physical layer information” refers to information about the identity, attributes, and/or status of the physical components used to implement the physical layer of the
communications system 100. In accordance with some aspects, physical layer information of thecommunications system 100 can include media information, device information, and location information. - As the term is used herein, “media information” refers to physical layer information pertaining to cables, plugs, connectors, and other such physical media. In accordance with some aspects, the media information is stored on or in the physical media, themselves. In accordance with other aspects, the media information can be stored at one or more data repositories for the communications system, either alternatively or in addition to the media, themselves.
- Non-limiting examples of media information include a part number, a serial number, a plug or other connector type, a conductor or fiber type, a cable or fiber length, cable polarity, a cable or fiber pass-through capacity, a date of manufacture, a manufacturing lot number, information about one or more visual attributes of physical communication media (e.g., information about the color or shape of the physical communication media or an image of the physical communication media), and an insertion count (i.e., a record of the number of times the media segment has been connected to another media segment or network component). Media information also can include testing or media quality or performance information. The testing or media quality or performance information, for example, can be the results of testing that is performed when a particular segment of media is manufactured.
- As the term is used herein, “device information” refers to physical layer information pertaining to the communications panels, inter-networking devices, media converters, computers, servers, wall outlets, and other physical communications devices to which the media segments attach. In accordance with some aspects, the device information is stored on or in the devices, themselves. In accordance with other aspects, the device information can be stored at one or more data repositories for the communications system, either alternatively or in addition to the devices, themselves. In accordance with still other aspects, the device information can be stored in the media segments attached thereto. Non-limiting examples of device information include a device identifier, a device type, port priority data (that associates a priority level with each port), and port updates (described in more detail herein).
- As the term is used herein, “location information” refers to physical layer information pertaining to a physical layout of a building or buildings in which the
network 101 is deployed. Location information also can include information indicating where each communications device, media segment, network component, or other component is physically located within the building. In accordance with some aspects, the location information of each system component is stored on or in the respective component. In accordance with other aspects, the location information can be stored at one or more data repositories for the communications system, either alternatively or in addition to the system components, themselves. - In accordance with some aspects, one or more of the components of the
communications network 101 are configured to store physical layer information pertaining to the component as will be disclosed in more detail herein. InFIG. 1 , theconnectors media segments connector assemblies FIG. 1 , eachconnector respective media segment 105, 115 (e.g., type of media, test results, etc.). - In another example implementation, the
media segments connectors port 132. In such an example, the count stored in or on the media segment is updated each time the segment (or plug or connector) is inserted intoport 132. This insertion count value can be used, for example, for warranty purposes (e.g., to determine if the connector has been inserted more than the number of times specified in the warranty) or for security purposes (e.g., to detect unauthorized insertions of the physical communication media). - One or more of the components of the
communications network 101 can read the physical layer information from one or more media segments retained thereat. In certain implementations, one or more network components includes a media reading interface that is configured to read physical layer information stored on or in the media segments or connectors attached thereto. For example, in one implementation, theconnector assembly 130 includes amedia reading interface 134 that can read media information stored on themedia cables port 132. In another implementation, themedia reading interface 134 can read media information stored on the connectors or plugs 110, 120 terminating thecables - In accordance with some aspects of the disclosure, the physical layer information read by a network component may be processed or stored at the component. For example, in certain implementations, the
first connector assembly 130 shown inFIG. 1 is configured to read physical layer information stored on theconnectors media segments media reading interface 134. Accordingly, inFIG. 1 , thefirst connector assembly 130 may store not only physical layer information about itself (e.g., the total number of available ports at thatassembly 130, the number of ports currently in use, etc.), but also physical layer information about theconnectors media segments connectors - The physical layer information obtained by the media reading interface may be communicated (see PLI signals S2) over the
network 101 for processing and/or storage. In accordance with some aspects, thecommunications network 101 includes a data network (e.g., seenetwork 218 ofFIG. 2 ) along which the physical layer information is communicated. At least some of the media segments and other components of the data network may be separate from those of thecommunications network 101 to which such physical layer information pertains. For example, in some implementations, thefirst connector assembly 130 may include a plurality of “normal” ports (e.g., fiber optic adapter ports) at which connectorized media segments (e.g., optical fibers) are coupled together to create a path for communications signals S1. Thefirst connector assembly 130 also may include one ormore PLI ports 136 at which the physical layer information (see PLI signals S2) are passed to components of the data network (e.g., to one or more aggregation points 150 and/or to one or more computer systems 160). - In other implementations, however, the physical layer information may be communicated over the
communications network 101 just like any other signal, while at the same time not affecting the communication signals S1 that pass through theconnector assembly 130 on thenormal ports 132. Indeed, in some implementations, the physical layer information may be communicated as one or more of the communication signals S1 that pass through thenormal ports 132 of theconnector assemblies PLI port 136 and one of the “normal”ports 132. In another implementation, the media segment may be routed between thePLI port 136 and a “normal” port of another connector assembly. In such implementations, the physical layer information may be passed along thecommunications network 101 to other components of the communications network 101 (e.g., to another connector assembly, to one or more aggregation points 150 and/or to one or more computer systems 160). By using thenetwork 101 to communicate physical layer information pertaining to it, an entirely separate data network need not be provided and maintained in order to communicate such physical layer information. - For example, in the implementation shown in
FIG. 1 , eachconnector assembly 130 includes at least onePLI port 136 that is separate from the “normal”ports 132 of theconnector assembly 130. Physical layer information is communicated between theconnector assembly 130 and thecommunications network 101 through thePLI port 136. Components of thecommunications network 101 may be connected to one ormore aggregation devices 150 and/or to one ormore computing systems 160. In the example shown inFIG. 1 , theconnector assembly 130 is connected to arepresentative aggregation device 150, arepresentative computing system 160, and to other components of the network 101 (see looped arrows) via thePLI port 136. - In some implementations, some types of physical layer information pertaining to media segments can be obtained by the
connector assembly 130 from a user at theconnector assembly 130 via a user interface (e.g., a keypad, a scanner, a touch screen, buttons, etc.). For example, physical layer information pertaining to media that is not configured to store such information can be entered manually into theconnector assembly 130 by the user. In certain implementations, theconnector assembly 130 can provide the physical layer information obtained from the user to other devices or systems that are coupled to thecommunications network 101 and/or a separate data network. - In other implementations, some or all physical layer information can be obtained by the
connector assembly 130 from other devices or systems that are coupled to thecommunications network 101 and/or a separate data network. For example, physical layer information pertaining to media that is not configured to store such information can be entered manually into another device or system (e.g., at theconnector assembly 130, at thecomputer 160, or at the aggregation point 150) that is coupled to thenetwork 101 and/or a separate data network. - In some implementations, some types of non-physical layer information (e.g., network information) also can be obtained by one network component (e.g., a
connector assembly 130, anaggregation point 150, or a computer 160) from other devices or systems that are coupled to thecommunications network 101 and/or a separate data network. For example, theconnector assembly 130 may pull non-physical layer information from one or more components of thenetwork 101. In other implementations, the non-physical layer information can be obtained by theconnector assembly 130 from a user at theconnector assembly 130. - In some implementations, the
connector assembly 130 is configured to modify (e.g., add, delete, and/or change) the physical layer information stored in or on the segment ofphysical communication media 105, 115 (i.e., or the associatedconnectors 110, 120). For example, in some implementations, the media information stored in or on the segment ofphysical communication media aggregation point 150 for storage and/or processing. The modification of the physical layer information does not affect the communications signals S1 passing through theconnector assembly 130. -
FIG. 2 is a block diagram of one example implementation of acommunications management system 200 that includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality. - The
management system 200 comprises a plurality ofconnector assemblies 202. Themanagement system 200 includes one ormore connector assemblies 202 connected to anIP network 218. Theconnector assemblies 202 shown inFIG. 2 illustrate various example implementations of theconnector assemblies 130, 30′ ofFIG. 1 . - Each
connector assembly 202 includes one ormore ports 204, each of which is used to connect two or more segments of physical communication media to one another (e.g., to implement a portion of a logical communication link for communication signals S1 ofFIG. 1 ). At least some of theconnector assemblies 202 are designed for use with segments of physical communication media that have physical layer information stored in or on them. The physical layer information is stored in or on the segment of physical communication media in a manner that enables the stored information, when the segment is attached to aport 204, to be read by aprogrammable processor 206 associated with theconnector assembly 202. - Each
programmable processor 206 is configured to execute software or firmware that causes theprogrammable processor 206 to carry out various functions described below. Eachprogrammable processor 206 also includes suitable memory (not shown) that is coupled to theprogrammable processor 206 for storing program instructions and data. In general, theprogrammable processor 206 determines if a physical communication media segment is attached to aport 204 with which thatprocessor 206 is associated and, if one is, to read the identifier and attribute information stored in or on the attached physical communication media segment (if the segment includes such information stored therein or thereon) using the associatedmedia reading interface 208. - In some implementations, each of the
ports 204 of theconnector assemblies 202 comprises a respectivemedia reading interface 208 via which the respectiveprogrammable processor 206 is able to determine if a physical communication media segment is attached to thatport 204 and, if one is, to read the physical layer information stored in or on the attached segment (if such media information is stored therein or thereon). In other implementations, a singlemedia reading interface 208 may correspond to two ormore ports 204. Theprogrammable processor 206 associated with eachconnector assembly 202 is communicatively coupled to each of the media reading interfaces 208 using a suitable bus or other interconnect (not shown). - In
FIG. 2 , four example types of connector assembly configurations 210, 212, 214, and 215 are shown. In the first connector assembly configuration 210 shown inFIG. 2 , eachconnector assembly 202 includes its own respectiveprogrammable processor 206 and its ownrespective network interface 216 that is used to communicatively couple thatconnector assembly 202 to an Internet Protocol (IP)network 218. In some implementations, theports 204 of theconnector assemblies 202 also connect to theIP network 218. In other implementations, however, only the network interfaces 216 couple to theIP network 218. - In the second type of connector assembly configuration 212, a group of
connector assemblies 202 are physically located near each other (e.g., in a rack, rack system, or equipment closet). Each of theconnector assemblies 202 in the group includes its own respectiveprogrammable processor 206. However, in the second connector assembly configuration 212, some of the connector assemblies 202 (referred to here as “interfaced connector assemblies”) include their ownrespective network interfaces 216 while some of the connector assemblies 202 (referred to here as “non-interfaced connector assemblies”) do not. Thenon-interfaced connector assemblies 202 are communicatively coupled to one or more of the interfacedconnector assemblies 202 in the group via local connections. In this way, thenon-interfaced connector assemblies 202 are communicatively coupled to theIP network 218 via thenetwork interface 216 included in one or more of the interfacedconnector assemblies 202 in the group. In the second type of connector assembly configuration 212, the total number ofnetwork interfaces 216 used to couple theconnector assemblies 202 to theIP network 218 can be reduced. Moreover, in the particular implementation shown inFIG. 2 , thenon-interfaced connector assemblies 202 are connected to the interfacedconnector assembly 202 using a daisy chain topology (though other topologies can be used in other implementations and embodiments). - In the third type of connector assembly configuration 214, a group of
connector assemblies 202 are physically located near each other (e.g., within a rack, rack system, or equipment closet). Some of theconnector assemblies 202 in the group (also referred to here as “master” connector assemblies 202) include both their ownprogrammable processors 206 andnetwork interfaces 216, while some of the connector assemblies 202 (also referred to here as “slave” connector assemblies 202) do not include their ownprogrammable processors 206 or network interfaces 216. Each of theslave connector assemblies 202 is communicatively coupled to one or more of themaster connector assemblies 202 in the group via one or more local connections. Theprogrammable processor 206 in each of themaster connector assemblies 202 is able to carry out the PLM functions for both themaster connector assembly 202 of which it is a part and anyslave connector assemblies 202 to which themaster connector assembly 202 is connected via the local connections. As a result, the cost associated with theslave connector assemblies 202 can be reduced. In the particular implementation shown inFIG. 2 , theslave connector assemblies 202 are connected to amaster connector assembly 202 in a star topology (though other topologies can be used in other implementations and embodiments). - In the fourth type of connector assembly configuration 215, a group of connector assemblies (e.g., distribution modules) 202 are housed within a common chassis or other enclosure. Each of the
connector assemblies 202 in the configuration 215 includes their ownprogrammable processors 206. In the context of this configuration 215, theprogrammable processors 206 in theconnector assemblies 202 are “slave”processors 206. Each of the slaveprogrammable processors 206 in the group is communicatively coupled to a common “master” programmable processor 217 (e.g., over a backplane included in the chassis or enclosure). The masterprogrammable processor 217 is coupled to anetwork interface 216 that is used to communicatively couple the masterprogrammable processor 217 to theIP network 218. - In the fourth configuration 215, each slave
programmable processor 206 is configured to manage the media reading interfaces 208 to determine if physical communication media segments are attached to theport 204 and to read the physical layer information stored in or on the attached physical communication media segments (if the attached segments have such information stored therein or thereon). The physical layer information is communicated from the slaveprogrammable processor 206 in each of theconnector assemblies 202 in the chassis to themaster processor 217. Themaster processor 217 is configured to handle the processing associated with communicating the physical layer information read from by theslave processors 206 to devices that are coupled to theIP network 218. - In accordance with some aspects, the
communications management system 200 includes functionality that enables the physical layer information captured by theconnector assemblies 202 to be used by application-layer functionality outside of the traditional physical-layer management application domain. That is, the physical layer information is not retained in a PLM “island” used only for PLM purposes but is instead made available to other applications. For example, in the particular implementation shown inFIG. 2 , themanagement system 200 includes anaggregation point 220 that is communicatively coupled to theconnector assemblies 202 via theIP network 218. - The
aggregation point 220 includes functionality that obtains physical layer information from the connector assemblies 202 (and other devices) and stores the physical layer information in a data store. Theaggregation point 220 can be used to receive physical layer information from various types ofconnector assemblies 202 that have functionality for automatically reading information stored in or on the segment of physical communication media. Also, theaggregation point 220 and aggregation functionality 224 can be used to receive physical layer information from other types of devices that have functionality for automatically reading information stored in or on the segment of physical communication media. Examples of such devices include end-user devices—such as computers, peripherals (e.g., printers, copiers, storage devices, and scanners), and IP telephones—that include functionality for automatically reading information stored in or on the segment of physical communication media. - The
aggregation point 220 also can be used to obtain other types of physical layer information. For example, in this implementation, theaggregation point 220 also obtains information about physical communication media segments that is not otherwise automatically communicated to anaggregation point 220. This information can be provided to theaggregation point 220, for example, by manually entering such information into a file (e.g., a spreadsheet) and then uploading the file to the aggregation point 220 (e.g., using a web browser) in connection with the initial installation of each of the various items. Such information can also, for example, be directly entered using a user interface provided by the aggregation point 220 (e.g., using a web browser). - The
aggregation point 220 also includes functionality that provides an interface for external devices or entities to access the physical layer information maintained by theaggregation point 220. This access can include retrieving information from theaggregation point 220 as well as supplying information to theaggregation point 220. In this implementation, theaggregation point 220 is implemented as “middleware” that is able to provide such external devices and entities with transparent and convenient access to the PLI maintained by theaccess point 220. Because theaggregation point 220 aggregates PLI from the relevant devices on theIP network 218 and provides external devices and entities with access to such PLI, the external devices and entities do not need to individually interact with all of the devices in theIP network 218 that provide PLI, nor do such devices need to have the capacity to respond to requests from such external devices and entities. - For example, as shown in
FIG. 2 , a network management system (NMS) 230 includesPLI functionality 232 that is configured to retrieve physical layer information from theaggregation point 220 and provide it to the other parts of theNMS 230 for use thereby. TheNMS 230 uses the retrieved physical layer information to perform one or more network management functions. In certain implementations, theNMS 230 communicates with theaggregation point 220 over theIP network 218. In other implementations, theNMS 230 may be directly connected to theaggregation point 220. - As shown in
FIG. 2 , anapplication 234 executing on acomputer 236 also can use the API implemented by theaggregation point 220 to access the PLI information maintained by the aggregation point 220 (e.g., to retrieve such information from theaggregation point 220 and/or to supply such information to the aggregation point 220). Thecomputer 236 is coupled to theIP network 218 and accesses theaggregation point 220 over theIP network 218. - In the example shown in
FIG. 2 , one or moreinter-networking devices 238 used to implement theIP network 218 include physical layer information (PLI)functionality 240. ThePLI functionality 240 of theinter-networking device 238 is configured to retrieve physical layer information from theaggregation point 220 and use the retrieved physical layer information to perform one or more inter-networking functions. Examples of inter-networking functions includeLayer 1,Layer 2, and Layer 3 (of the OSI model) inter-networking functions such as the routing, switching, repeating, bridging, and grooming of communication traffic that is received at the inter-networking device. - The
aggregation point 220 can be implemented on a standalone network node (e.g., a standalone computer running appropriate software) or can be integrated along with other network functionality (e.g., integrated with an element management system or network management system or other network server or network element). Moreover, the functionality of theaggregation point 220 can be distribute across many nodes and devices in the network and/or implemented, for example, in a hierarchical manner (e.g., with many levels of aggregation points). TheIP network 218 can include one or more local area networks and/or wide area networks (e.g., the Internet). As a result, theaggregation point 220,NMS 230, andcomputer 236 need not be located at the same site as each other or at the same site as theconnector assemblies 202 or theinter-networking devices 238. - Also, power can be supplied to the
connector assemblies 202 using conventional “Power over Ethernet” techniques specified in the IEEE 802.3af standard, which is hereby incorporated herein by reference. In such an implementation, apower hub 242 or other power supplying device (located near or incorporated into an inter-networking device that is coupled to each connector assembly 202) injects DC power onto one or more power cables (e.g., a power wire included in a copper twisted-pair cable) used to connect eachconnector assembly 202 to theIP network 218. -
FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of oneexample connection system 1800 including aconnector assembly 1810 configured to collect physical layer information from at least one segment of physical communications media. Theexample connector assembly 1810 ofFIG. 3 is configured to connect segments of optical physical communications media in a physical layer management system. Theconnector assembly 1810 includes a fiber optic adapter defining at least oneconnection opening 1811 having afirst port end 1812 and asecond port end 1814. A sleeve (e.g., a split sleeve) 1803 is arranged within theconnection opening 1811 of theadapter 1810 between the first and second port ends 1812, 1814. Eachport end - A first example segment of optical physical communication media includes a first
optical fiber 1822 terminated by afirst connector arrangement 1820. A second example segment of optical physical communication media includes a secondoptical fiber 1832 terminated by asecond connector arrangement 1830. Thefirst connector arrangement 1820 is plugged into thefirst port end 1812 and thesecond connector arrangement 1830 is plugged into thesecond port end 1814. Eachfiber connector arrangement ferrule optical fiber - The
ferrules connector arrangements sleeve 1803 when theconnector arrangements connection opening 1811 of theadapter 1810. Aligning theferrules optical fibers optical fiber 1822, 1832) carries communication signals (e.g., communications signals S1 ofFIG. 1 ). The alignedferrules connector arrangements FIG. 1 ) may be carried. - In some implementations, the
first connector arrangement 1820 may include astorage device 1825 that is configured to store physical layer information (e.g., an identifier and/or attribute information) pertaining to the segment of physical communications media (e.g., thefirst connector arrangement 1820 and/or thefiber optic cable 1822 terminated thereby). In some implementations, theconnector arrangement 1830 also includes astorage device 1835 that is configured to store information (e.g., an identifier and/or attribute information) pertaining to thesecond connector arrangement 1830 and/or thesecond optic cable 1832 terminated thereby. - In one implementation, each of the
storage devices storage devices storage device media segments - In accordance with some aspects, the
adapter 1810 is coupled to at least a firstmedia reading interface 1816. In certain implementations, theadapter 1810 also is coupled to at least asecond media interface 1818. In some implementations, theadapter 1810 is coupled to multiple media reading interfaces. In certain implementations, theadapter 1810 includes a media reading interface for each port end defined by theadapter 1810. In other implementations, theadapter 1810 includes a media reading interface for eachconnection opening 1811 defined by theadapter 1810. In still other implementations, theadapter 1810 includes a media reading interface for each connector arrangement that theadapter 1810 is configured to receive. In still other implementations, theadapter 1810 includes a media reading interface for only a portion of the connector arrangement that theadapter 1810 is configured to receive. - In some implementations, at least the first
media reading interface 1816 is mounted to a printedcircuit board 1815. In the example shown, the firstmedia reading interface 1816 of the printedcircuit board 1815 is associated with thefirst port end 1812 of theadapter 1810. In some implementations, the printedcircuit board 1815 also can include the secondmedia reading interface 1818. In one such implementation, the secondmedia reading interface 1818 is associated with thesecond port end 1814 of theadapter 1810. - The printed
circuit board 1815 of theconnector assembly 1810 can be communicatively connected to one or more programmable processors (e.g.,processors 216 ofFIG. 2 ) and/or to one or more network interfaces (e.g., network interfaces 216 ofFIG. 2 ). The network interface may be configured to send the physical layer information (e.g., see signals S2 ofFIG. 1 ) to a physical layer management network (e.g., seecommunications network 101 ofFIG. 1 orIP network 218 ofFIG. 2 ). In one implementation, one or more such processors and interfaces can be arranged as components on the printedcircuit board 1815. In another implementation, one or more such processor and interfaces can be arranged on separate circuit boards that are coupled together. For example, the printedcircuit board 1815 can couple to other circuit boards via a card edge type connection, a connector-to-connector type connection, a cable connection, etc. - When the
first connector arrangement 1820 is received in thefirst port end 1812 of theadapter 1810, the firstmedia reading interface 1816 is configured to enable reading (e.g., by the processor) of the information stored in thestorage device 1825. The information read from thefirst connector arrangement 1820 can be transferred through the printedcircuit board 1815 to a physical layer management network, e.g.,network 101 ofFIG. 1 ,network 218 ofFIG. 2 , etc. When thesecond connector arrangement 1830 is received in thesecond port end 1814 of theadapter 1810, the secondmedia reading interface 1818 is configured to enable reading (e.g., by the processor) of the information stored in thestorage device 1835. The information read from thesecond connector arrangement 1830 can be transferred through the printedcircuit board 1815 or another circuit board to the physical layer management network. - In some such implementations, the
storage devices media reading interfaces storage devices media reading interfaces storage devices media reading interfaces -
FIGS. 4-24 provide an example connector assembly implemented as a firstbladed panel system 1000 suitable for mounting to a communications equipment rack. Thebladed panel system 1000 includes achassis 1010 configured to receive one ormore communications blades 1100. Thebladed panel system 1000 is configured to connect segments ofcommunications media 1200 carrying communications signals (e.g., signals 51 ofFIG. 1 ). For the sake of convenience,media segments 1200 routed to the rear of thechassis 1010 will be referred to herein as “incoming” media segments 1211 (FIG. 17 ) and themedia segments 1200 routed to the front of thechassis 1010 will be referred to herein as “outgoing” media segments 1212 (FIG. 21 ). However, eachmedia segment - Each
blade 1100 includes one ormore communications couplers 1150, each coupler defining one or more ports for connectingsegments coupler 1150 includes front and rear ports. In accordance with some aspects, thecouplers 1150 on anexample blade 1100 can include fiber optic adapters for connecting optical fibers. In accordance with other aspects, thecouplers 1150 on anotherexample blade 1100 can include communications sockets (e.g., electrical jacks) for connecting electrical plugs (e.g., terminating coaxial cables, twisted pair cables, etc.) to other electrical plugs (e.g., via corresponding sockets), terminated wires (e.g., via insulation displacement contacts), or printed circuit boards (e.g., via contact pins). In accordance with other aspects, thecouplers 1150 on anexample blade 1100 can include transceivers for managing wireless communications signals. In accordance with still other aspects, however, thecouplers 1150 on anexample blade 1100 can include some combination of the above couplers or other types of communications couplers. - The example bladed
panel system 1000 includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality. In accordance with some aspects, thecouplers 1150 on eachblade 1100 include one or more media reading interfaces that are configured to read physical layer information stored on or inphysical media segments 1200. For example, eachcoupler 1150 can include amedia reading interface 1305 that communicatively connects to astorage device 1230 positioned on or in aphysical media segment 1200. - For ease in understanding, one
example media segment 1200 including astorage device 1230 storing physical layer information and anexample coupler 1150 including amedia reading interface 1305 configured to read the physical layer information from themedia segment 1200 are discussed are shown inFIGS. 5 and 6 , respectively.FIG. 5 shows an examplephysical media segment 1200 implemented as a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC-type fiber optic connector) 1220 configured to terminate at least one optical fiber 1210 (FIG. 4 ).FIG. 6 shows anexample coupler 1150 implemented as afiber optic adapter 1300 that is suitable for receiving media segments, such as thefiber optic connector 1220 ofFIG. 5 . In other implementations, other types of connectors, plugs, adapters, and sockets can be utilized. - The
fiber optic connector 1220 includes abody 1221 enclosing anoptical ferrule 1222 through which anoptical fiber 1210 extends. Thebody 1221 also defines a depression orcavity 1224 in which astorage device 1230 can be positioned. In accordance with some implementations, thestorage device 1230 includes memory circuitry arranged on a printedcircuit board 1231.Electrical contacts 1232 also are arranged on the printed circuit board for interaction with themedia reading interface 1305 of thecoupler 1150. In one example embodiment, thestorage device 1230 includes an EEPROM circuit arranged on the printedcircuit board 1231. In other embodiments, however, thestorage device 1230 can include any suitable type of non-volatile memory. In the example shown inFIG. 5 , the memory circuitry is arranged on the non-visible side of the printedcircuit board 1231. - The
fiber optic adapter 1300 includes abody 1301 defining at least oneport 1302 in which asleeve 1303 is configured to receive and align theferrules 1222 of twofiber optic connectors 1220. Accordingly, communications data signals (e.g., signals 51 ofFIG. 1 ) carried by an optical fiber terminated by a first of thefiber optic connectors 1220 can be transmitted to an optical fiber terminated by a second of thefiber optic connectors 1220. - In some example implementations, the
fiber optic adapter 1300 can define asingle port 1302 that is configured to optically couple together twofiber optic connectors 1220. In other example implementations, thefiber optic adapter 1300 can define multiple (e.g., two, three, four, eight, twelve, etc.)ports 1302 that are each configured to optically couple together twofiber optic connectors 1220. In other example implementations, eachport 1302 is configured to communicatively couple together afiber optic connector 1220 with a media converter (not shown) to convert the optical data signals into electrical data signals, wireless data signals, or other such data signals. In still other implementations, thecoupler 1150 includes an electrical termination block that is configured to receive punch-down wires, electrical plugs (e.g., for electrical jacks), or other types of electrical connectors. - Each
fiber optic adapter 1300 also includes at least onemedia reading interface 1305 to enable physical layer information to be read from thestorage devices 1230 of theconnectors 1220 mounted at theadapter 1300. In certain implementations, themedia reading interface 1305 also can write physical layer information to the storage device 1230 (e.g., add new information, delete information, or change/update information). For example, in one implementation, theadapter 1300 can include amedia reading interface 1305 associated with eachport 1302. In another implementation, theadapter 1300 can include amedia reading interface 1305 associated with each connection end of aport 1302. - In general, each
media reading interface 1305 is formed from one ormore contact members 1310. In some implementations, theadapter body 1301 definesslots 1304 configured to receive the one or more contact members 1310 (seeFIG. 6 ). In accordance with some aspects, portions of thecontact members 1310 extend into theport 1302 to engage theelectrical contacts 1232 of thestorage member 1230 mounted to thefiber optic connector 1220. Other portions of thecontact members 1310 are configured to engage contacts on a printed circuit board associated with (e.g., positioned on top of) thefiber optic adapter 1300. As discussed below, a processor or other such equipment also can be electrically coupled to the printed circuit board. Accordingly, such a processor can communicate with the memory circuitry on thestorage device 1230 via thecontact members 1310 and the printed circuit board. - Additional information pertaining to some example
fiber optic connectors 1220,storage devices 1230,fiber optic adapters 1300, andcontact members 1310 can be found in copending U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/303,961, filed Feb. 12, 2010, titled “Fiber Plugs and Adapters for Managed Connectivity;” U.S. Application Provisional No. 61/413,828, filed Nov. 15, 2010, titled “Fiber Plugs and Adapters for Managed Connectivity;” U.S. Provisional Application No. 61/437,504, filed Jan. 28, 2011, titled “Fiber Plugs and Adapters for Managed Connectivity,” and U.S. Pat. No. 8,690,593, the disclosures of which are hereby incorporated by reference herein in their entirety. - For example, the
example blades 1100 shown inFIG. 7 each include aprocessor 1140 coupled to a printed circuit board (PCB) 1120.Couplers 1150 also are mounted (or electrically connected) to thePCB 1120. Accordingly, theprocessor 1140 on eachblade 1100 can communicate with themedia reading interfaces 1305 on thecouplers 1150 to manage (e.g., read, store, update, process, etc.) any physical layer information associated with media segments inserted at thecouplers 1150. In some implementations, theblade processor 1140 does not modify, monitor, or otherwise interact with communications signals propagating over media segments received at thecouplers 1150. In certain implementations, theblade processor 1140 is isolated from the signals carried over the media segments. In other implementations, however, eachblade 1100 can include an application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) that can be controlled via a remote host in place of aprocessor 1140. -
FIG. 7 shows twoexample communications blades 1100 exploded out from anexample chassis 1010. Eachblade 1100 includes abase 1110 and asupport member 1115. In the example shown inFIG. 7 , thebase 1110 defines a generally planar surface and thesupport member 1115 extends upwardly from a front end of theplanar base 1110. Thebase 1110 includestabs 1105 defining ariding section 1106 and an engagement section 1107 (FIG. 12 ). The communications couplers (e.g., fiber optic adapters, electrical plugs, etc.) 1150 mount to thesupport member 1115 of the blade 1100 (seeFIG. 7 ). - The
PCB 1120 mounts to thebase 1110. In the implementation shown, thePCB 1120 mounts substantially parallel to thebase 1110. In accordance with some aspects, a central processing unit (e.g., a processor) 1140 also can be mounted to thebase 1110 and electrically coupled to thePCB 1120. In the example implementation shown inFIG. 7 , thecentral processing unit 1140 mounts directly to thePCB 1120 as will be discussed in more detail herein. - The
chassis 1010 includes opposingside walls 1011 interconnected by opposing major surfaces 1012 (seeFIGS. 4 and 7 ) to form ahousing 1013 defining an interior 1014. In the example shown, thechassis housing 1013 defines an open front and an open rear (seeFIG. 7 ). In other implementations, one or both of the front and rear can be at least partially closed. Amanagement module 1050 also can be mounted to thechassis 1010 to organize one or more of the media segments. - Mounting
members 1008 are mounted to the opposingside walls 1011 to facilitate mounting thechassis housing 1013 to a communications rack. In accordance with one implementation shown inFIG. 7 , the mountingmembers 1008 are L-shaped flanges having first sections that attach to theside walls 1011 and second sections that extend generally parallel with an open end face of thechassis housing 1013. In other embodiments, however, other types of mountingmembers 1008 can be used to mount thechassis housing 1013 to a rack. In still other embodiments, other types of mounting equipment can be used (e.g., to mount thechassis housing 1013 to shelves). -
Guides 1015 can be provided within theinterior 1014 of thechassis housing 1013. Theguides 1015 enable theblades 1100 to move relative to thechassis housing 1013. In certain embodiments, eachblade 1100 is configured to move separately from theother blades 1100. In certain implementations, theblades 1100 are configured to travel along the connector insertion direction. For example, theblades 1100 may be configured to travel in a forward-rearward direction. - In some embodiments, the
guides 1015 enable eachblade 1100 to move between at least a first position, in which theblade 1100 is positioned within theinterior 1014 of thechassis housing 1013, and a second position, in which at least a portion of theblade 1100 protrudes outwardly from theinterior 1014 of thechassis housing 1013. For example, moving ablade 1100 to the second position can facilitate access to thecommunications couplers 1150 mounted to theblade 1100. - In some embodiments, the
guides 1015 are implemented asslides 1020 configured to facilitate sliding movement of theblades 1100.FIGS. 8-10 illustrate oneexample slide member 1020 suitable for use as aguide 1015. Theslide member 1020 includes abody 1021 from which mountingpegs 1022 extend. The mounting pegs 1022 are configured to be received within openings defined in thesides 1011 of the chassis housing 1013 (seeFIG. 11 ). Theslide body 1021 defines a longitudinally extending slot orchannel 1024 along a length of theslide body 1021. Thechannel 1024 is sized and configured to receive at least a side edge of theplanar base 1110 of theblade 1100. In certain implementations, the sides of thebody 1021 defining thechannel 1024 have rampedend portions 1025 to facilitate insertion of the base 1110 into thechannel 1024. - The
slides 1020 can be configured to facilitate lateral sliding of theblades 1100. In some implementations, theslides 1020 are mounted to the opposingside walls 1011 of thechassis 1010 to enable theblades 1100 to slide forwardly and rearwardly relative to thechassis 1010. In the example shown, theslides 1015 are mounted to thechassis housing 1013 in a generally parallel, vertically spaced configuration. In other implementations, however, theslides 1015 can be configured to enable theblades 1100 to slide side-to-side or diagonally. In still other implementations, other types ofguides 1015 are used to facilitate other types of blade movement. - In accordance with some aspects, the
chassis housing 1013 and theblades 1100 are configured to inhibit removal of theblades 1100 from thechassis housing 1013. For example, thechassis housing 1013 can define one or more stops configured to interact withtabs 1105 on theblade 1100 to inhibit movement of theblade 1100 in one or more directions. The stops can be positioned on theside walls 1011 of thechassis 1010 adjacent theguides 1015. In some embodiments, at least one stop can be provided for eachguide 1015. - When a
blade 1100 is inserted into one of theguides 1015, an edge of theblade base 1110 slides into thechannel 1024 of theslide 1015. Theriding section 1106 of eachtab 1105 seats on top of theslide body 1021 and theengagement section 1107 extends upwardly from theriding section 1106 to interact with the stops positioned along theside wall 1011 of thechassis housing 1013. In the example implementation shown, eachblade 1100 includes twotabs 1105, each extending outwardly from thebase 1110 at a rear of theblade 1100. In other example implementations, thetabs 1105 can extend outwardly from a front of the base 1110 or from somewhere between the front and rear of thebase 1110. In other example implementations, thetabs 1105 can seat on the bottom of theslide body 1021. - In accordance with some aspects of the disclosure, an
example chassis housing 1010 can include aforward stop 1017 and arearward stop 1018 associated with eachguide 1015. Theforward stop 1017 is configured to inhibit forward movement of ablade 1100 beyond a set pull-out distance to maintain theblade 1100 at least partially within the chassis housing 1010 (e.g., seeFIG. 11 ). Accordingly, theblade 1100 can be partially pulled out of thechassis housing 1013 through the open front to provide access to components mounted on theblade 1100. - In some example implementations, the
forward stop 1017 is positioned to enable theblade 1100 to be pulled out of thechassis housing interior 1014 at least sufficient to provide access to the outgoingphysical media segments 1212 received at a front of thecommunications couplers 1150. Indeed, in some example implementations, theforward stop 1017 is positioned to enable theblade 1100 to be pulled out of thechassis housing interior 1014 at least sufficient to provide access to the incomingphysical media segments 1211 received at a rear of the communications couplers 1150 (seeFIG. 17 ). In some example implementations, theforward stop 1017 is positioned to enable theblade 1100 to be pulled out of thechassis housing interior 1014 at least sufficient to provide access to theprocessor 1140 mounted to theblade 1100. In one example implementation, theblade 1100 can be pulled out about three (3) inches. - Likewise, the
rearward stop 1018 is configured to inhibit rearward movement of theblade 1100 to inhibit theblade 1100 from exiting thechassis housing 1010 through the open rear of the chassis housing 1010 (e.g., seeFIG. 12 ). Accordingly, therear stop 1018 prevents theblade 1100 from being unintentionally pushed too far rearward and into thecable manager module 1050. In some example implementations, therearward stop 1018 is positioned to inhibit even a rear portion of theblade 1100 from exiting theinterior 1014 of thechassis housing 1013 through the rear end of thechassis housing 1013. - In some embodiments, the
chassis housing 1013 is configured to enable insertion of theblades 1100 optionally through either the open front or through the open rear of thechassis housing 1013. In other words, thechassis housing 1013 is configured to enable the user to choose whether to insert eachblade 1100 from the front or from the rear. In one embodiment, eachstop chassis housing 1013 and the ramp of theforward stop 1017 faces the open front of thechassis housing 1013. - In accordance with some aspects, the
blades 1100 can be secured in one or more positions. For example, in some implementations, thechassis housing 1013 includes retention features to secure eachblade 1100 in an extended position and/or a retracted position. In one implementation, the retention feature includes a dimple extending inwardly from theside walls 1011. In another implementation, the retention feature includes a spring-mounted ball extending into thechassis 1010. In other implementations, other types of retention features can be utilized. - When a
blade 1100 is mounted to thechassis housing 1013, theblade 1100 is communicatively connected to a network (e.g., seenetwork 218 ofFIG. 2 ) for management of any physical layer information associated with thephysical media segments 1200 attached to theblade 1100. In accordance with some aspects, a backplane 1400 (FIG. 14 ) is mounted to thechassis housing 1013 to facilitate connecting theblade 1100 to the management network. In general, the printedcircuit boards 1120 on eachblade 1100 communicatively couple (e.g., electrically couple) to a printedcircuit board 1410 on thebackplane 1400 viaconnector ports 1430. Thebackplane 1400 also includes anetwork port 1440 via which thebackplane 1400 connects to the network (FIG. 13 ). - In some example implementations, the
backplane 1400 is mounted at the open rear of thechassis housing 1013. For example,FIG. 13 shows a rear view of thechassis housing 1013 in whichmultiple blades 1100 have been mounted. A rear portion of abackplane 1400 to which theblades 1100 are connected is visible. Thebackplane 1400 includes abracket 1420 that attaches the printedcircuit board 1410 to thechassis housing 1013. Thenetwork port 1440 is mounted to a rear side of the printedcircuit board 1410 of thebackplane 1400. In the example shown, thenetwork port 1440 includes a Power Over Ethernet electrical socket configured to receive DC power source input from the network. In other implementations, however, other types ofports 1440 can be utilized. -
FIGS. 14-16 illustrate one example implementation of connectingblades 1100 to abackplane 1400. For ease in understanding, select details pertaining to thechassis housing 1013 and to theblades 1100 have been removed from the figures. For example, inFIGS. 14-16 , the blades are represented bypanels 1100′ without differentiating thePCB 1120 from thebase 1110. Further, theguides 1015 are shows mounted to a generic side wall. Accordingly, details pertaining to the connection between the blades and thebackplane 1400 are visible. - In accordance with some implementations, a blade can be connected to the
backplane 1400 using anelectrical cable 1450 extending from a first end to a second end. A firstelectrical connector 1452 is attached to and terminates the first end of thecable 1450 and a secondelectrical connector 1454 is attached to and terminates the second end of thecable 1450. Each of theconnectors first connector 1452 is configured to plug into (and electrically communicate with) the printedcircuit board 1120 on theblade 1100. Thesecond connector 1454 is configured to plug into (and electrically communicate with) the printedcircuit board 1410 on thebackplane 1400. - The
cable 1450 is sufficiently long to form an at least partial loop (e.g., half loop) 1455 at a location between the first andsecond connectors blades 1100 is pulled forwardly relative to thechassis housing 1013, thefirst connector 1452 of thecorresponding cable 1450 moves with theblade 1100. Thesecond connector 1454, however, remains attached to thebackplane 1400. Accordingly, thePCBs 1120 mounted to the blades 1100 (and components mounted thereto, e.g., the processor 1140) can remain coupled to the data management network even when theblades 1100 are moved relative to thechassis housing 1013. - For example, if a user wants to add, remove, or replace a
physical media segment 1200 on ablade 1100, then the user can slide theblade 1100 to a forward (i.e., or rearward) extended position to access the desiredsegment 1200, coupler port, or other component (e.g., processor 1140) without disconnecting the remaining components on theblade 1100 from the data management network. For example, moving theblade 1100 to the extended position and removing a media segment attached to one of thecouplers 1150 does not disconnect thestorage devices 1230 of the otherphysical media segments 1200 mounted to theblade 1100 from the network. - In accordance with some aspects of the disclosure, the
processors 1140 mounted to theblades 1100 can be added, removed, or replaced without completely removing theblade 1100 from thechassis 1010 or disconnecting thePCB 1120 from the network. For example, in some implementations, ablade processor 1140 and the PCB section to which it attaches can be accessed by sliding theblade 1100 from the first blade position within thechassis interior 1014 to the second blade position in which a front of theblade 1100 extends through the open front of the chassis 1010 (e.g., seeFIG. 17 ). - In certain implementations, the
blade processor 1140 includes a connector or socket that is configured to mate with a complementary socket or connector on theblade PCB 1120. For example, theblade processor 1140 can be secured to theblade PCB 1120 using one ormore mezzanine connectors 1142. In the example shown inFIG. 17 , theblade processor 1140 is secured to theblade PCB 1120 using twomezzanine connectors 1142. In other implementations, theblade processor 1140 can be secured to thePCB 1120 using other types of connectors (e.g., contact pins). - In some implementations, each
blade processor 1140 includes adisplay arrangement 1145. For example, in the implementation shown inFIG. 18 , eachblade processor 1140 includes at least one light emitting diode (LED) 1146. Ablade processor 1140 can actuate anLED 1146 to identify theprocessor 1140. For example, a user can be directed to aparticular blade 1100 by actuating theLED 1146 on theprocessor 1140. Ablade processor 1140 can actuate anyadditional LEDs 1146 on theblade 1100 to indicate a status (e.g., an error) of theblade 1100, of theprocessor 1140, or of any of thephysical segments 1200 attached to theblade 1100. - In some implementations, each
chassis 1010 is configured to receive afirst blade 1100 having amaster processor 1140 and one or moreadditional blades 1100 having aslave processor 1140. Each slave processor is configured to read any physical layer data through the corresponding media reading interfaces at the direction of the master processor. The master processor coordinates the slave processors and provides the network connection for thechassis 1010. - In one example implementation, the master processor also includes a
user port 1144 through which a user can obtain physical layer information from the master processor and/or can write physical layer data to the master processor for distribution to one or more physical media storage devices. Oneexample user port 1144 is shown inFIG. 18 . In the example shown, theuser port 1144 is a USB connector port. In other implementations, however, other types of ports (e.g., ports suitable for connecting to a cell phone, Smartphone, PDA, laptop, or other mobile computing device) can be used. In some implementations, only theblade 1100 having the master processor includesmultiple LEDs 1146, which provide status indicia for the entire chassis. - Referring now to
FIGS. 19-21 , eachblade 1100 is configured to facilitate media segment management and tracking. For example, as shown inFIG. 19 , some example implementations of ablade 1100 include afascia 1116 fastened (e.g., screwed, welded, riveted, etc.) to thesupport member 1115 of theblade 1100. Thefascia 1116 includes indicia for identifying particular ones of thecouplers 1150 or sets of the couplers 1150 (e.g., duplex couplers). In the example shown, eachfascia 1116 includes a number printed above each coupler port. In other implementations, other types of indicia (letters, colors, etc. also can be used). - Some
example fascia 1116 can include segment management structures. For example, in some implementations, afascia 1116 can include retention tabs orfingers 1118 extending forwardly of thefascia 1116. In the example shown, thefingers 1118 are configured to route communications cables (e.g., optical fibers, optical fiber cables, electrical conductors, electrical cables, etc.) away from thecouplers 1150 along a cable routing path (e.g., seeFIG. 21 ). - Referring to
FIGS. 22-24 , a management module (e.g., cable management module) 1050 can be mounted to thechassis 1010 to organize one or more of the media segments.Example management modules 1050 have astorage area 1055 andsegment ports 1057. In general, thestorage area 1055 is configured to store any excess length of one or more physical media segments. In particular, thestorage area 1055 enables theblades 1100 to be moved relative to thechassis 1010 without unpluggingincoming cables 1211 from theblades 1100. For example, slack cable length may tighten or loosen aroundcable spools 1056 positioned at thestorage area 1055 as theblade 1100 is moved forward and rearward relative to thechassis 1010. - The
segment ports 1057 are configured to route physical media segments onto and off themanagement module 1050. In the example shown inFIG. 22 , themanagement module 1050 is attached to a rear side of thechassis 1010. Accordingly, themanagement module 1050 is configured to receive and direct media segments plugged into the rear sides of thecouplers 1150. For example, each physical media segment plugged into the rear side of thecouplers 1150 can be routed rearwardly from thecouplers 1150, through thestorage area 1055, and out thesegment ports 1057. - In the example shown, the
management module 1050 includes a base 1051 having opposingside walls 1052. The base 1051 can include arearward lip 1060 to aid in retaining the physical media segments on themodule 1050.Spools 1056 are mounted at thestorage area 1055, which is located on the base 1051.Grommets 1058 and seals 1059 are arranged at thesegment ports 1057, which are located on theside walls 1052. - The
management module 1050 is configured to removably attach to thechassis housing 1013. In some example implementations, theside walls 1052 of themodule 1050 includesupport flanges 1053 andfastening brackets 1054. In the example shown, thesupport flanges 1053 define L-shaped members, which are oriented in an outwardly (sideways) facing direction. In other example embodiments, themodule support flange 1053 also could be oriented in a downwardly pointing direction. Thefastening brackets 1054 define through-holes. - The
chassis housing 1013 includes complementary features including asupport flange 1003 and a fastening bracket 1004 (FIG. 22 ). Thesupport flange 1003 of thechassis housing 1013 is oriented in an upwardly pointing direction. In other example embodiments, thechassis support flange 1003 also could be oriented in an outwardly (sideways) facing direction. Thefastening brackets 1004 define through-holes. - To attach the
management module 1050 shown inFIG. 22 to thechassis housing 1013, thesupport flanges 1053 of themanagement module 1050 is seated on thesupport flange 1003 of thechassis housing 1013. Engaging thesupport flanges brackets brackets management module 1050 to thechassis 1010. In other implementations, themanagement module 1050 can be welded, glued, or otherwise secured to thechassis 1010. - To enhance clarity of the application, the following disclosure provides an example walk-through of routing the incoming and
outgoing media segments example blade 1100. One ormore chasses 1010 are provided, for example, on an equipment rack. One ormore blades 1100 are installed in eachchassis 1010. Circuit boards on eachblade 1100 may be connected to abackplane 1400 of the chassis 1010 (e.g., by sliding the blade into thechassis 1010 towards the backplane 2014). Aprocessor 1140 on eachblade 1100 is connected to thebackplane 1400 via the circuit boards. -
Incoming cables 1211 are connected to eachblade 1100 after theblade 1100 has been inserted into thechassis 1010. For example, a technician may secure theincoming cables 1211 at themanagement region 1050 at the rear of thechassis 1010. In some implementations, theincoming cables 1211 include optical fibers separately terminated by a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC-type connector). In other implementations, theincoming cables 1211 include one or more multi-fiber cables, each of which is terminated by a multi-fiber connector (e.g., an MPO-type connector). - The technician plugs connectorized ends of the
incoming cables 1211 into the rear ports of theblade 1100. For example, the technician may feed connectorized ends of theincoming cables 1211 from the rear of thechassis 1010, over thebase 1110 of theblade 1100, toward the adapters 1151. The technician may subsequently access the adapters 1151 through an open top of theblade 1100 at the front of the chassis 1010 (seeFIG. 17 ). For example, the technician may access the adapters 1151 with theblade 1100 in the first or second extended position. In particular, the technician can unplug a dust plug from one of the rear ports of the adapters 1151 and insert one of the connectorized ends into the rear port from the front of thechassis 1010. - Subsequently,
outgoing cables 1212 can be installed at the front ports of theblade 1100 without disconnecting theblade 1100 from thebackplane 1400. In some implementations, theoutgoing cables 1212 include optical fibers separately terminated by a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC-type connector). In other implementations, theoutgoing cables 1212 include one or more multi-fiber cables, each of which is terminated by a multi-fiber connector (e.g., an MPO-type connector). In certain implementations, the technician may plug theconnectors 1220 of theoutgoing cables 1212 into the front ports of the adapters 1151 when theblade 1100 is in the closed or first extended position. In other implementations, however, theconnectors 1220 of theoutgoing fibers 1212 may be plugged into the front adapter ports while theblade 1100 is in any desired position. The technician also routes thefibers 1220 through theretention fingers 1118 at the front of theblade 1100. -
FIGS. 25-44 provide another example connector assembly implemented as abladed panel system 2000 suitable for mounting to a communications equipment rack. Thebladed panel system 2000 includes achassis 2010 configured to receive one ormore communications blades 2100. Thebladed panel system 2000 is configured to connect segments ofcommunications media 2200 carrying communications signals (e.g., signals 51 ofFIG. 1 ). For the sake of convenience,media segments 2200 routed to the rear of thechassis 2010 will be referred to herein as “incoming” media segments 2210 (FIG. 40 ) and themedia segments 2200 routed to the front of thechassis 2010 will be referred to herein as “outgoing” media segments 2220 (FIG. 41 ). However, eachmedia segment - In the example shown in
FIG. 25 , thechassis housing 2010 is substantially similar to thechassis housing 1010 shown inFIGS. 4 and 7 , including opposingside walls 2011 interconnected by opposingmajor surfaces 2012 to form ahousing 2013 defining an interior 2014. Thechassis housing 2013 defines an open front and an open rear (seeFIG. 27 ). In other implementations, one or both of the front and rear can be at least partially closed. Thechassis housing 2013 includes mountingmembers 2008 and guides 2015 that enable theblades 2100 to move relative to thechassis housing 2013. For example, theblades 2100 may be configured to move along a connector insertion direction (e.g., forwardly and rearwardly). Thechassis housing 2013 also includes forward stops 2017 and rearward stops 2018 to inhibit removal of theblades 2100 from thechassis housing 2013. - A management module 2050 (
FIG. 26 ) also can be mounted to thechassis 2010 to organize one or more of the media segments. In certain implementations, themanagement module 2050 also is configured to enable theblades 2100 to be moved relative to thechassis 2010 without unpluggingincoming cables 2210 from theblades 2100. For example, slack cable length may tighten or loosen aroundcable spools 2056 positioned at astorage area 2055 of themanagement module 2050 as theblade 2100 is moved forward and rearward relative to thechassis 2010. - In certain implementations, the
management module 2050 may be substantially similar to themanagement module 1050 shown inFIGS. 22-24 , including abase 2051 having opposingside walls 2052. Thebase 2051 can include arearward lip 2060 to aid in retaining the physical media segments on themodule 2050.Spools 2056 are mounted at thestorage area 2055, which is located on thebase 2051.Grommets 2058 andseals 2059 are arranged at thesegment ports 2057, which are located at the rear of themanagement module 2050. - The example bladed
panel system 2000 includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality. As shown inFIG. 27 , thechassis 2010 includes abackplane 2400 to facilitate connecting theblades 2100 to a data management network (e.g., an Internet Protocol network). Thebackplane 2400 includes a printedcircuit board 2410 includingconnector ports 2430, via whichblades 2100 connect to thebackplane 2400, and a network port (not shown) via which thebackplane 2400 connects to the network. The printedcircuit board 2410 is supported bybracket 2420, which couples to thechassis housing 2010. -
FIGS. 28-30 illustrate one example implementation of ablade module 2100. Eachblade 2100 includes one ormore communications couplers 2150, eachcoupler 2150 defining one or more ports for connecting segments of physical communications media, which carry communications signals. In certain implementations, thecouplers 2150 include media reading interfaces that are configured to read physical layer information from storage devices on or in a connectorized media segments plugged into thecouplers 2150.Adapter 1300 ofFIG. 6 is one example implementation of acoupler 2150.Connector 1220 ofFIG. 5 is one example implementation of aconnectorized end 1220 of a media segment. Additional examples of couplers and connectorized media segments are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/303,961; 61/413,828; 61/437,504; and U.S. Pat. No. 8,690,593 incorporated by reference above. - The
blade 2100 includes a base 2110 configured to ride within theguides 2015 of thechassis housing 2010. Asupport member 2115 extends upwardly from a front end of thebase 2110. Communications couplers (e.g., fiber optic adapters, electrical plugs, etc.) 2150 mount to thesupport member 2115. A printed circuit board (PCB)arrangement 2120, which is discussed in greater detail herein, and a processor (e.g., a microprocessor) 2140 also are mounted to theblade 2100. In some implementations, theblade processor 2140 does not modify, monitor, or otherwise interact with communications signals propagating over media segments received at thecouplers 2150. In certain implementations, theblade processor 2140 is isolated from the signals carried over the media segments. Rather, theblade processor 2140 is configured to manage data signals stored in memory devices of the media segments. - The
base 2110 of eachblade 2100 includes outwardly extendingtabs 2105 that are configured to ride within the chassis guides 2015 and to interact with thestops tabs 2105 can define ariding section 2106 and anengagement section 2107 that function the same as the riding andengagement sections tabs 1105 discussed above. Thebase 2110 also can include an outwardly extendingtab 2108 to facilitate moving theblade 2100 along theguides 2015. For example, thetab 2108 can define a forwardly extending handle with which a user can manipulate movement of theblade 2100. - In certain embodiments, each
blade 2100 is configured to move separately from theother blades 2100. In some embodiments, theguides 2015 enable eachblade 2100 to move between at least a first position, in which theblade 2100 is positioned within theinterior 2014 of the chassis housing 2013 (e.g.,FIG. 31 ), and a second position, in which at least a portion of theblade 2100 protrudes outwardly from theinterior 2014 of the chassis housing 2013 (e.g.,FIG. 32 ). In some embodiments, theguides 2015 are implemented as slides configured to facilitate sliding movement of theblades 2100. In the example shown, theslides 2015 are mounted to the opposingside walls 2011 of thechassis 2010 to enable theblades 2100 to slide forwardly and rearwardly relative to thechassis 2010. - In accordance with some aspects, the
blades 2100 can be secured in one or more positions. Securing ablade 2100 in a particular position can facilitate access to thecommunications couplers 2150 and/or aprocessor 2140 mounted to theblade 2100. For example, securing theblade 2100 in position inhibits the removal of theblade 2100 when adding, removing, or replacingblade couplers 2150 and/or theblade processor 2140. In some implementations, thechassis housing 2013 includes retention features (e.g., as described above with respect to chassis housing 1013) to secure eachblade 2100 in an extended position and/or a retracted position. - In accordance with some aspects, the
communications couplers 2150 of each blade can remain coupled to the data management network (e.g., via the backplane 2400) even when theblade 2100 is moved relative to the chassis housing 2013 (e.g., to a position in which at least part of theblade 2100 extends outwardly from the chassis interior 2014). Thecommunications couplers 2150 are connected to thebackplane 2400 via thePCB arrangement 2120 of the blade and the PCB 2020 of the chassis. - In accordance with some implementations, the
PCB arrangement 2120 of eachblade 2100 can include at least a first printedcircuit board 2122 and a second printedcircuit board 2124. Thecommunications couplers 2150 are coupled to first printedcircuit board 2122 and thebackplane 2400 is coupled to the second printedcircuit board 2124. In the example shown, the second printedcircuit board 2124 is connected to thebackplane 2400 via a card edge connection 2125 (FIG. 29 ). In other implementations, the second printedcircuit board 2124 can be connected to thebackplane 2400 via other types of connections (e.g., a plug/socket connection, a cable connection, a wireless connection, etc.). - The printed
circuit boards circuit board 2124 is configured to slide within aguide arrangement 2160 mounted to theblade base 2110. Theguide arrangement 2160 includes opposingguides 2161 bordered bystops 2162 at opposite ends. In the example shown, the second printedcircuit board 2124 includesarms 2127 that are configured to slide withinchannels 2163 defined by theguides 2161. Thestops 2162 at the ends of theguides 2161 inhibit removal of the second printedcircuit board 2124 from theguides 2161. - The first printed
circuit board 2122 is connected to the second printedcircuit board 2124 using anelectrical cable 2450, which extends from a first end to a second end. A firstelectrical connector 2452 is attached to and terminates the first end of thecable 2450 and a secondelectrical connector 2454 is attached to and terminates the second end of thecable 2450. Thefirst connector 2452 is electrically coupled (e.g., via contact pins) to the first printedcircuit board 2122 and thesecond connector 2452 is electrically coupled (e.g., via contact pins) to the second printedcircuit board 2124. - The
cable 2450 is sufficiently long to enable the second printedcircuit board 2124 to move along theguide channels 2163 relative to the first printedcircuit board 2122 without disconnecting from the first printedcircuit board 2122. For example, when the second printedcircuit board 2124 is positioned at a first end of the channels 2161 (e.g., as shown inFIG. 28 ), thecable 2450 can form ahalf loop 2455 at a location between the first andsecond connectors circuit board 2124 is positioned at a second end of the channels 2161 (e.g., as shown inFIG. 29 ), thecable 2450 straightens out to extend over the distance between the printedcircuit boards - In use, the
guide arrangement 2160 can be configured so that the second printedcircuit board 2124 is located at the first end of theguides 2161 when theblade 2100 is located in the first position within theinterior 2014 of thechassis 2010. Theguide arrangement 2160 also can be configured so that the second printedcircuit board 2124 is located at the second end of theguides 2161 when theblade 2100 is located in the second position protruding outwardly from theinterior 2014 of thechassis 2010. - Accordingly, when a user chooses to pull one of the
blades 2100 forwardly relative to the chassis housing 2013 (e.g., to access a communications coupler or to access the processor 2140), thefirst connector 2452 of thecorresponding cable 2450 moves with theblade 2100. Thesecond connector 2454, however, remains attached to thebackplane 2400. For example, if a user wants to add, remove, or replace aphysical media segment 1200 on ablade 2100, then the user can slide theblade 2100 to a forwardly extended position to access the desiredsegment 1200 or coupler port without disconnecting thestorage devices 1230 of the remainingphysical media segments 1200 mounted to theblade 2100 from the data management network. - In one implementation, the amount of force necessary to overcome the
retention feature 2016, which inhibits removal of theblade 2100 from thechassis 2010, is sufficient to overcome the connection between the second printedcircuit board 2124 and thebackplane 2400. For example, the force necessary to overcome theretention feature 2016 is sufficient to disconnect a card edge connection between the second printedcircuit board 2124 and thebackplane 2400. - As noted above, moving a
blade 2100 to a position at least partially outside thechassis 2010 facilitates access to components on theblade 2100. For example, moving the blade to such an extended position can facilitate access to aprocessor 2140 mounted to the blade. In accordance with certain aspects of the disclosure, theprocessors 2140 mounted to theblades 2100 can be added, removed, or replaced without completely removing theblade 2100 from thechassis 2010. - In certain implementations, the
blade processor 2140 includes a connector or socket that is configured to mate with a complementary socket or connector on the first printedcircuit board 2122 of theblade 2100. For example, theblade processor 2140 can be secured to the first printedcircuit board 2124 using a snap-fit connection (seeFIGS. 33 and 36 ). In other implementations, theblade processor 2140 can be secured to the first printedcircuit board 2122 using other types of connectors (e.g., cable, mezzanine, etc.). - In accordance with some aspects of the disclosure, the
backplane 2400 of thechassis 2010 connects to the data network via achassis processor 2600. Thechassis processor 2600 functions as the interface between thepanel system 2000 and the data management network. In some implementations, thechassis processor 2600 manages theblade processors 2140. For example, thechassis processor 2600 can instruct each of theblade processors 2140 to determine whichcommunications couplers 2150 have media segments inserted therein, to obtain physical layer information from the media segments, and to forward the physical layer information to thechassis processor 2600 for storage and/or transmission to the data network. In one implementation, thechassis processor 2600 has a master/slave relationship with theblade processors 2140. - The
chassis processor 2600 is configured to mount to thechassis housing 2013. For example, in some implementations, thechassis processor 2600 can mount to asupport structure 2070 extending outwardly from a top, rear of the chassis housing 2013 (e.g., seeFIG. 35 ). Thesupport structure 2070 includes a top 2071 andside walls 2072 defining an interior that is sized and configured to receive thechassis processor 2600.Support flanges 2073, which extend outwardly from theside walls 2072, define throughopenings 2074. Thechassis processor 2600 includes abase 2610 and afascia 2612 extending generally perpendicular to thebase 2610. Thefascia 2612 defines openings through which fasteners 2615 (e.g., set screws) can extend. Thefasteners 2615 also extend through the openings defined in thesupport flanges 2073 of thesupport structure 2070 to secure thechassis processor 2600 to thesupport structure 2070. - The
chassis processor 2600 includes a printedcircuit board 2620 mounted to the base 2610 (e.g., using fasteners 2614). The printedcircuit board 2620 of thechassis processor 2600 is configured to connect to the printedcircuit board 2410 of the backplane 2400 (e.g., via a card edge connection, via a plug/socket connection, via a cable connection, etc.). Memory (e.g., an EEPROM chip) and other electronic circuitry can be mounted to the printedcircuit board 2620. Physical layer information obtained by thecommunications couplers 2150 can be stored in the memory of thechassis processor 2600. - In accordance with some implementations, the
fascia 2612 of thechassis processor 2600 includes one or more indicators (e.g., light emitting diodes) 2650 (e.g., seeFIG. 35 ). Theindicators 2650 can display status information (e.g., error information, power information, network connection information, etc.). - A
first network port 2630 is electrically connected to the printedcircuit board 2620 of thechassis processor 2600. In the example shown, thefirst network port 2630 defines an RJ jack configured to receive anelectrical plug 2232 terminating a PLI cable 2230 (FIG. 36 ) connecting thepanel system 2000 to the data network (e.g.,network 218 ofFIG. 2 ,network 101 ofFIG. 1 , etc.). In other implementations, however, thefirst network port 2630 can define a USB socket or other type of cable port. - In accordance with certain aspects, a
second port 2640 also can be connected to the printedcircuit board 2620. In the example shown, thesecond port 2640 defines a DC power socket. In other implementations, however, thesecond port 2640 can define any suitable type of power cable port. In some implementations, thesecond port 2640 provides an alternative port by which thepanel system 2000 can receive power from an auxiliary power source (e.g., when Power Over Ethernet is not available). - In accordance with some aspects of the disclosure, the
chassis 2010 can include one or more data ports 2730 (e.g., seeFIG. 37 ) configured to enable connecting a mobile device to the storage devices on any media segments plugged into thecommunications couplers 2150. Thedata port 2730 enables a user to connect (e.g., using a communications cable) a mobile device (e.g., a handheld scanner, a cell phone, a Smartphone, a PDA, a laptop, etc.) to thepanel system 2000. For example, a user can download physical layer information about the media segments connected to thecommunications couplers 2150 of thepanel system 2000 from thechassis processor 2600 to memory on the mobile device. - The user also can use the mobile device to manipulate (e.g., add, delete, and/or change) the physical layer information stored on the
chassis processor 2600. For example, the user can upload new and/or updated physical layer information (e.g., test results) from the mobile device to thechassis processor 2600. In accordance with certain aspects, the user can upload physical layer information pertaining to media segments that are connected to thecommunications couplers 2150 but are not associated with storage devices (i.e., do not otherwise have PLI and PLM functionality). - In some implementations, each
blade processor 2140 defines such adata port 2730. In other implementations, thechassis 2010 is configured to receive astatus board 2700 defining such a data port (seeFIG. 37 ). For example, thestatus board 2700 can slide into thechassis housing 2013 from a front of thechassis 2010. Thestatus board 2700 includes afascia 2720 mounted to one end of a printedcircuit board 2710. In the example shown, thefascia 2720 definesopenings 2722 through whichfasteners 2725 can extend to be received inopenings 2704 defined by mountingtabs 2702 of the chassis housing 2013 (seeFIGS. 37 and 38 ). In certain implementations, the printedcircuit board 2710 slides along guides mounted within thechassis housing 2013. In other implementations, thestatus board 2700 can be otherwise secured to thechassis 2010. - The
data port 2730 mounts to thefascia 2720 and electrically connects to the printedcircuit board 2710. The other end of the printedcircuit board 2710 is configured to connect to the printedcircuit board 2410 of thebackplane 2400. In the example shown, the printedcircuit board 2710 includes acard edge connector 2715 that plugs into the printedcircuit board 2410 of thebackplane 2400. In other implementations, the printedcircuit board 2710 can connect to thebackplane 2400 using a different type of electrical connector. Accordingly, a mobile device (i.e., as discussed above) can be plugged into thepanel system 2000 and/or data network from the front of thechassis 2010. - Additional components also can be mounted to the
status board 2700. For example, indicators (e.g., LEDs) 2726 can be positioned on thefascia 2720. TheLEDs 2726 can display status information (e.g., error information, power information, network connection information, etc.) for thechassis 2010. Anindicator 2415 on a front of eachblade processor 2140 can identify or display a status for theindividual blade 2100. - In some implementations, a switch (i.e., or other input mechanism) 2728 is positioned on the
fascia 2720. In accordance with some aspects, theinput mechanism 2728 can include a momentary pushbutton signal to thechassis processor 2600. In other implementations, theinput mechanism 2728 can include a fixed position slide or a pushbutton switch for particular signal configuration indications to thechassis processor 2600. - As shown in
FIGS. 39-41 , afascia 2116 can be mounted to thesupport structure 2115 of eachblade 2100. In some implementations, thefascia 2116 includes indicia for identifying particular ones of thecommunications couplers 2150 or sets of the couplers 2150 (e.g., duplex couplers, quad couplers, etc.). In one implementation, eachfascia 2116 includes a number printed above each coupler port. In another implementation, eachfascia 2116 includes a number printed above each predefined set of coupler ports. In other implementations, however, other types of indicia (letters, colors, etc.) can be used. - The
fascia 2116 defines a steppedportion 2117 that is sized and configured to accommodate theblade processor 2140 so that the indicator 2145 on theblade processor 2140 is visible from the front. The steppedportion 2117 of eachblade fascia 2116 also is sized and configured to accommodate thestatus board 2700 so that thefascia 2720 of thestatus board 2700 is visible from the front of thechassis 2010. Accordingly, thedata port 2730 andindicators 2726 are accessible to a user (seeFIG. 39 ). - Some
example fascia 2116 can include segment management structures. For example, in some implementations, afascia 2116 can include retention members orfingers 2118 extending forwardly of the fascia 2116 (seeFIG. 40 ). In the example shown, thefingers 2118 are configured to route communications cables (e.g., optical fibers, optical fiber cables, electrical conductors, electrical cables, etc.) away from thecommunications couplers 2150 along a cable routing path (e.g., seeFIG. 41 ). - In the example shown, each
retention member 2118 includes opposing retainingmembers 2181 interconnected byside members 2182 to define a through passage. Arib 2183 extends between the retainingmembers 2181 within the through passage to define a cable routing passage 2185 (FIG. 40 ). One of the retainingmembers 2181 defines aslot 2184 leading to thecable routing passage 2185. In the example shown, theslot 2184 is defined in atop retaining member 2181 of eachretention member 2118. In other implementations, theslot 2184 can be defined in one of theside members 2182. In still other implementations, theslot 2184 can be closed by a flexible or removable bridge. - One or more segments of physical communications media can be routed from the
communications couplers 2150, through thecable routing passages 2185 defined by the retainingmembers 2181, to the sides of thechassis 2010. In some implementations, theoutermost retention members 2118 have retainingmembers 2181′ that define ramped or curved inner surfaces to facilitate routing the media segments. For example, the curved inner surfaces of the retainingmembers 2181′ can inhibit excessive bending of optical media segments. - Referring to
FIGS. 42-44 , themanagement module 2050 can be secured to a rear side of thechassis housing 2010 without components protruding outwardly from themanagement module 2050. Having a substantially planar interface between thechassis housing 2010 and themanagement module 2050 on each side can facilitate insertion of thepanel system 2000 into an equipment rack or other suitable support structure. - In the example shown, the
management module 2050 includes retainingmembers 2062 that are configured to slide over atab 2005 of thechassis housing 2010. Thetab 2005 defines anopening 2006 into which alug 2064 of themanagement module 2050 can snap to secure the components together (seeFIG. 44 ). In the implementation shown inFIG. 42 , thetabs 2062 andlug 2064 are punched out from theside walls 2052 of themanagement module 2050. - To enhance clarity of the application, the following disclosure provides an example walk-through of routing the incoming and
outgoing media segments 2200 for anexample blade 2100. One ormore chasses 2010 are provided, for example, on an equipment rack. One ormore blades 2100 are installed in eachchassis 2010. Acircuit board arrangement 2120 on eachblade 2100 may be connected to abackplane 2410 of the chassis 2010 (e.g., by sliding theblade 2100 rearwardly into the chassis 2010). For example, asecond circuit board 2124 on eachblade 2100 may be connected to the backplane 2410 (e.g., via a card-edge connection, via a connector, etc.). Theprocessor 2140 on eachblade 2100 is connected to thebackplane 2410 via thecircuit board arrangement 2120. -
Incoming cables 2210 are connected to eachblade 2100 after theblade 2100 has been inserted into thechassis 2010. For example, a technician may secure (e.g., using a cable tie) theincoming cables 2210 to the management structures (cable spools, cable clamp, fanout arrangement, or other securement structure) of themanagement region 2050. The technician plugs connectorized ends of theincoming cables 2210 into the rear ports of theblade 2100. In some implementations, theincoming cables 2210 include optical fibers separately terminated by a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC-type connector). In other implementations, theincoming cables 2210 include one or more multi-fiber cables, each of which is terminated by a multi-fiber connector (e.g., an WO-type connector). - The technician routes the connectorized ends of the
incoming cables 2210 to the rear ports of theblade 2100. In certain implementations, the technician feeds connectorized ends of theincoming cables 2210 from the rear of thechassis 2010, over thebase 2110 of theblade 2100, toward thefront adapters 2151. In some implementations, the technician plugs the connectorized ends of theincoming cables 2210 into the rear ports from the rear of thechassis 2010. In other implementations, the technician may subsequently access theadapters 2151 through an open top of theblade 2100 at the front of thechassis 2010. For example, the technician may access theadapters 2151 with theblade 2100 in the first or second extended position. In particular, the technician can unplug a dust plug from one of the rear ports of thefront adapters 2151 and insert one of the connectorized ends into the rear port from the front of the chassis 2010 (seeFIG. 40 ). - Subsequently,
outgoing cables 2220 can be installed at the front ports of theblade 2100 without disconnecting theblade 2100 from thebackplane 2410. For example, the technician may plug the connectorized ends of theoutgoing cables 2220 into the front ports of theadapters 2151 when theblade 2100 is in the closed or first extended position. In other implementations, however, the connectorized ends of theoutgoing fibers 2220 may be plugged into the front adapter ports while theblade 2100 is in any desired position. The technician also routes theoutgoing cables 2220 through theretention fingers 2118 at the front of theblade 2100. -
FIGS. 45-150 provide other example connector assemblies implemented as bladedpanel systems 3000 suitable for mounting to communications equipment racks, cabinets, or other structures. Thebladed panel system 3000 includes achassis 3010 configured to receive one ormore communications blades 3100. Thebladed panel system 3000 is configured to connect segments ofcommunications media 3200 carrying communications signals (e.g., signals S1 ofFIG. 1 ). In accordance with some aspects, the example bladedpanel system 3000 includes PLI functionality as well as PLM functionality. For example, thebladed panel system 3000 is configured to read physical layer information (e.g., signals S2 ofFIG. 1 ) from one or more of themedia segments 3200. - In some implementations, each
blade 3100 includes one ormore media couplers 3150 that are configured to connect togethermedia segments 3200 and to read physical layer information from themedia segments 3200. For example, themedia couplers 3150 may connectsegments 3200 received at a rear of thechassis 3010 withsegments 3200 received at a front of thechassis 3010. For the sake of convenience,media segments 3200 routed to the rear of thechassis 3010 will be referred to herein as “incoming”media segments 3210 and themedia segments 3200 routed to the front of thechassis 3010 will be referred to herein as “outgoing”media segments 3220. However, each set ofmedia segments 3200 may carry incoming signals, outgoing signals, or both. - One
example chassis 3010 is shown inFIGS. 45-49 . Thechassis 3010 is similar to thechassis housings FIGS. 7 and 27 , including opposingside walls 3011 interconnected by opposingmajor surfaces 3012 to form ahousing 3013 defining an interior 3014. Thechassis housing 3013 defines an open front and an open rear. In other implementations, one or both of the front and rear can be at least partially closed. Thechassis housing 3013 includes agrounding port 3007 at which a grounding wire or cable may enter thechassis housing 3013. - The
chassis housing 3013 includes mountingbrackets 3008 to secure thechassis housing 3013 to the rack, poles, or other structures. In some implementations, the mountingbrackets 3008 extend along only a portion of theside walls 3011 of the chassis 3010 (e.g., seeFIG. 77 ). In other implementations, the mountingbrackets 3008 extend along a majority of theside walls 3011 of the chassis 3010 (seeFIGS. 45-47 ). In the examples shown, thebrackets 3008 are L-shaped. In other implementations, however, other types of mounting brackets may be used. - The
interior 3014 of thechassis housing 3013 includesguides 3015 that enable theblades 3100 to move (e.g., slide forwardly and rearwardly) relative to thechassis housing 3013. For example, theguides 3015 may enable the blades to each move from a closed (retracted) position to one or more extended positions relative to thechassis 3010. In certain implementations, theguides 3015 are substantially the same as guidingslots 1020 ofFIGS. 8-10 . In other implementations, however, other types of guides can be used. - In some implementations, the
chassis 3010 is configured to receive a status board 3070 (FIG. 45 ). Thestatus board 3070 includes afascia 3071 mounted to one end of a printed circuit board (e.g., seestatus board 2700 ofFIG. 37 ). Thestatus board 3070 also may include a base to protect the printed circuit board. In certain implementations, the printed circuit board slides along guides mounted within thechassis housing 3013. For example, thestatus board 3070 can slide into the guides from a front of thechassis 3010. In other implementations, thestatus board 3070 can be otherwise secured to thechassis 3010. - In some implementations, the
fascia 3171 of thestatus board 3070 definesopenings 3172 through which fasteners can extend to secure thestatus board 3070 to the chassis housing 3013 (seeFIG. 45 ). Indicators (e.g., LEDs) 3076 also can be positioned on thefascia 3071 of thestatus board 3070. TheLEDs 3076 can display status information (e.g., error information, power information, network connection information, etc.) for thechassis 3010. In some implementations, a switch (i.e., or other input mechanism) also may positioned on thefascia 3071. - The rear of the
chassis 3010 is configured to facilitate routing and securement of theincoming media segments 3210.FIG. 47 is a rear perspective view of thechassis housing 3013 showing various example management structures.FIGS. 77-79 also show rear perspective views ofchassis 3010 with various management structures. Non-limiting examples of management structures include cable retention clamps 3030, cable retention fingers 3034 (FIG. 79 ), and cable fanouts 3035 (FIG. 77 ). In other implementations, other types of management structures (e.g., spools, radius limiters, cable ties, etc.) may be utilized at the rear of thechassis 3010. - In
FIG. 47 , cable retention clamps 3030 are shown attached to thechassis housing 3013 on the right side of the drawing. The example cable retention clamps 3030 includecompression inserts 3031 through whichmedia segments 3200 can be routed. Theinsert 3031 may include a slot to facilitate routing of themedia segments 3200 through theinsert 3031. The cable retention clamps 3030 also includecompression members 3032 that mount to either side of theinsert 3031 to clamp down on theinsert 3031. The cable clamps 3030 may be attached to thechassis housing 3013 withbrackets 3033. - An
example fanout arrangement 3035 is shown inFIG. 47 attached to thechassis housing 3013 on the left side of the drawing. Thefanout arrangement 3035 includes a mountingpanel 3036 on which one or more fanouts 3037 can be installed. For example, one or more fanouts 3037 can include openings through which pins 3038 may extend to mount thefanouts 3037 to thepanel 3036.Multiple fanouts 3037 can be stacked onto one set ofpins 3038. Eachfanout 3037 is configured to separate amedia segment 3200 into multiple segments. For example, eachfanout 3037 may separate a multiple fiber cable into individual fibers. In certain implementations, each of the individual fibers is terminated at a fiber optic connector. - In some implementations, one or more retention clamps 3030 can be positioned on each side of the
chassis 3010 at the rear. In other implementations, one ormore fanout arrangements 3035 can be positioned on each side of thechassis 3010 at the rear. In certain implementations, each side of thechassis 3010 holds at least oneretention clamp 3030 and at least onefanout arrangement 3035. In accordance with some aspects, the management structures are configured to be releasably attached to thechassis housing 3013 so that an appropriate management structure may be attached to thechassis housing 3013 in the field. In other implementations, other types of fanout configurations may be utilized. - Which
management structure incoming media segments 3210 and the configuration of the coupler arrangement installed on eachblade 3100 to be held within thechassis 3010. In some implementations, theclamps 3030 may be appropriate if theincoming media segments 3210 are terminated byconnectors 3212 that is configured to be received withincouplers coupler arrangement 3150. For example, acable clamp 3030 may be appropriate when amulti-fiber cable 3210 terminated by anMPO connector 3212 is to be plugged into anMPO coupler 3153, 3155 (seeFIGS. 65 and 77 ). In other implementations, thefanout arrangements 3035 may be appropriate if theincoming media segments 3210 are multi-fiber connectors that are to be plugged into LC-adapters. In such implementations, thefanout arrangements 3035 may separate the multi-fiber cables into individual fibers terminated by LC connectors that may be plugged into the LC adapters. - The
chassis 3010 also includes achassis processor 3060 that functions as the interface between thepanel system 3000 and the data management network. Thechassis processor 3060 may be connected to abackplane 3040 to manage the media reading interfaces, either directly or via processors on theindividual blades 3100. Thechassis processor 3060 also may connect thebackplane 3040 to the data management network. In certain implementations, thechassis processor 3060 also may include memory (e.g., an EEPROM chip) and other electronic circuitry so that physical layer information obtained at theblades 3100 can be stored in the memory of thechassis processor 3060. - In some implementations, the
chassis processor 3060 includes a printed circuit board 3061 (FIG. 48 ) that is configured to connect to the port 3044 (FIG. 77 ) of thebackplane 3040. For example, thecircuit board 3061 may include aconnection edge 3062 that is configured to connect toport 3044 via a card edge connection. In other implementations, thecircuit board 3061 may otherwise connects to the port 3044 (e.g., via a plug/socket connection, via a cable connection, etc.). - The
chassis processor 3060 is configured to mount to thechassis housing 3013. For example, in some implementations, thechassis processor 3060 can mount to asupport structure 3020 extending outwardly from a top, rear of the chassis housing 3013 (e.g., seeFIG. 47 ). Thesupport structure 3020 includes a top 3021 andside walls 3022 defining an interior that is sized and configured to receive thechassis processor 3060. In certain implementations, the interior of thesupport structure 3020 includesguides 3025 along which the printedcircuit board 3062 may slide (FIG. 48 ). - In certain implementations, the
chassis processor 3060 includes afascia 3063 coupled to thecircuit board 3061. In some implementations, thefascia 3063 is configured to connect to mounting flanges 3023 (FIG. 47 ) extending inwardly from theside walls 3022 of thesupport structure 3020. For example, thefascia 3063 may mount to theflanges 3023 via fasteners 3064 (FIG. 49 ), via a snap-fit connection, or via other types of attachment members. In other implementations, thechassis processor 3060 may be otherwise secured to thechassis 3010. - In some implementations, a
first network port 3065 is electrically connected to thecircuit board 3061 of thechassis processor 3060. For example, thefirst network port 3065 may define an RJ jack configured to receive an electrical plug terminating a network data cable connecting thepanel system 3000 to the data network. In other implementations, however, thefirst network port 3065 can define a USB socket or other type of cable port. - In certain implementations, the
chassis processor 3060 also may include asecond port 3067. For example, thesecond port 3067 may defines a DC power socket or any suitable type of power cable port. In some implementations, thesecond port 3067 provides an alternative port by which thepanel system 3000 can receive power from an auxiliary power source (e.g., when Power Over Ethernet is not available). - The
chassis processor 3060 also may control one or more indicators (e.g., light emitting diodes) 3066 mounted to thefascia 3063. Theindicators 3066 can display status information (e.g., error information, power information, network, connection information, etc.). In the example shown inFIG. 49 , fiveindicators 3066 are provided on thefascia 3061. In other implementations, however, greater orfewer indicators 3066 may be provided. - In accordance with some aspects, the
chassis 3010 includes a backplane 3040 (e.g., seeFIGS. 50, 77, and 91 ). Thecircuit board arrangement 3120 of eachblade 3100 positioned in thechassis 3010 connect to thebackplane 3040 of thechassis 3010. In some implementations, theblades 3100 are connected to thebackplane 3040 only when theblades 3100 are in the closed position relative to thechassis 3010. In other implementations, however, theblades 3100 are connected to thebackplane 3040 when theblade 3100 is in both the closed position and at least one extended position as will be disclosed in more detail herein. - An
example chassis backplane 3040 are shown inFIGS. 50, 77, and 91 . Thechassis backplane 3040 includes one ormore connector ports 3042 mounted to acircuit board 3041. For example, thebackplane 3040 may include one ormore blade ports 3042, each of which is configured to receive a connection end of the circuit board arrangement of a blade (e.g.,connection end 3125 ofcircuit board arrangement 3120 ofblade 3100 ofFIGS. 55, 64, and 68 ). Thebackplane 3040 also may include astatus board port 3046 configured to receive a connector or connection edge of a status board (e.g.,status board 3070 ofFIG. 45 ). In some implementations, the circuit board arrangements and/or the status boards have card-edge connectors. In other implementations, the circuit board arrangements and/or status boards can connect to thebackplane 3040 using a different type of electrical connector. - In some implementations, the
status board 3070 includes a data port 3073 (FIG. 45 ) at the front of thechassis 3010 that electrically connects a media segment (e.g., a USB cable) inserted therein to thechassis backplane 3040 via the printed circuit board of thestatus board 3070. Accordingly, a mobile device can access thechassis processor 3060 and/or any of theblade processors 3140 from the front of thechassis 3010. In certain implementations, sliding thestatus board 3070 at least partially out of thechassis 3010 disconnects thestatus board 3070 from thebackplane 3040. - In some implementations, a
cover 3050 may be positioned at the rear of thechassis 3010 to provide protection formedia segments 3200 routed to the rear of thechassis 3010. As shown inFIG. 46 , thecover 3050 includes sidewalls 3053 extending between a top 3051 and a bottom 3052. In certain implementations, vents may be provided in the top 3051 and/or the bottom 3052 to inhibit overheating of thechassis processor 3060. Arear wall 3054 extends between thesidewalls 3053 and between the top 3051 and bottom 3052. Cable tie locations may be provided on the exterior of the rear wall 3054 (seeFIG. 48 ). - In certain implementations, the top 3051 and
rear walls 3054 define acutout 3055 that accommodates thesupport structure 3020 of thechassis 3010. Thefascia 3063 of thechassis processor 3060 may be accessible through thecutout 3055. Thecover 3050 definesopen portions 3056 at the sides to facilitate routing ofmedia segments 3200 to the rear of thechassis 3010. For example, thecable management structure open portions 3056 of thecover 3050. In the example shown, theopen portion 3056 extends over only a portion of each side, top, and bottom of thecover 3050. In other implementations, one or both sides of thecover 3050 may be open in their entirety. - In some implementations, the
cover 3050 includes tabs, slots, or other attachment features that interact with tabs, slots, or other attachment features of thechassis 3010 to secure thecover 3050 to thechassis 3010. In the example shown, thecover 3050 includes twoforward tabs 3057 and twosideways tabs 3058 that interact withtabs 3024 of thechassis 3010 to align thecover 3050 on thechassis 3010. In certain implementations, thecover 3050 is secured to thechassis 3010 byfasteners 3059. For example, one ormore fasteners 3059 may extend through therear wall 3054 of the cover and through tabs 3029 (FIG. 47 ) extending outwardly from thesupport structure 3020 of thechassis 3010. - In the example shown in
FIGS. 45-49 , thechassis 3010 ofpanel system 3000 is configured to receive about fourblades 3100. For example, thechassis 3010 includes fourguides 3015, eachguide 3015 being configured to receive oneblade 3100. In other implementations, however, a chassis may be configured to receive greater orfewer blades 3100. For example,FIGS. 50-51 show oneexample panel system 3000′ that is configured to receive eightblades 3100. Thechassis 3010′ includes eightguides 3015 on either side of thechassis 3010′.FIGS. 52-53 show anotherexample panel system 3000″ that is configured to receive twoblades 3100. Thechassis 3010″ includes twoguides 3015″ on each side of thechassis 3010″. -
FIGS. 54-74 showvarious example blades 3100 configured to be mounted within any of thechasses chassis 3010. In accordance with some aspects, different types ofblades 3100 may be mounted within the same chassis 3010 (seeFIGS. 75 and 143 ). In other implementations, however,blades 3100 of the same type may be mounted within thechassis 3010. The type of management structure (e.g.,management arrangements 3030, 3035) provided at the rear of thechassis 3010 may depend on the type or types ofblades 3100 mounted within thechassis 3010. -
FIGS. 54-56 illustrate anexample blades 3100 configured to mount in any of thechassis blade 3100 includes a generallyplanar base 3110 having a front, a rear, and opposing sides. Ahandle 3108 extends from the front of the base 3110 to facilitate positioning of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010 as will be described in more detail herein.Outer extensions 3112 extend from the rear of thebase 3110. At least one of theouter extensions 3112 defines anotch 3105 in an external side (FIG. 54 ).Inner extensions 3113 also extend from the rear of thebase 3110. In the example shown, thebase 3110 includes two spaced apartinner flanges 3113. Eachinner flange 3113 defines a tab (e.g., cable tie location) 3114 at which media segments can be secured as will be described in more detail herein. - Each
blade 3100 also includes acoupler arrangement 3150. Aframe 3115 holds at least a portion of thecoupler arrangement 3150 to theblade 3100. In some implementations, the coupler arrangement defines one or more rear ports at which incoming media segments are received and one or more front ports at which outgoing media segments are received. As noted above, the terms “incoming” and “outgoing” are used for convenience only and do not imply that communication signals flow in only one direction. In some implementations, the front and rear ports are defined bycouplers 3151 3153 located at the front of theblade 3100. In other implementations, the rear ports are defined bycouplers 3155 located at the rear of theblade 3100. - In some implementations, each
coupler coupler arrangement 3150 is an adapter configured to receive and optically couple optical fiber cables. As the term is used herein, optical fiber cables refer to one or more strands of optical fibers. In certain implementations, the optical fibers are jacketed or buffered. In some implementations, the optical fibers of a cable are individually connectorized (e.g., with LC connectors, SC connectors, ST connectors, FC connectors, LX.5 connectors, etc.). In other implementations, multiple optical fibers may be terminated at the same connector (e.g., an MPO connector). - In other implementations, one or
more couplers coupler arrangement 3150 is configured to electrically connect two or more electrical media segments. For example, the coupler arrangement may include a socket for receiving an electrical connector terminating a conductor cable. The socket may connect to one or more IDCs at which other conductors are terminated. In other implementations, the coupler arrangement may include other types of terminations of electrical conductors. In still other implementations, the coupler arrangement may include media converters that are configured to receive one or more optical fiber and one or more electrical conductors to create a communications pathway therebetween. - In some implementations, the
blade 3100 is a smart blade as described in more detail herein with reference toFIGS. 128-130 . Thecoupler arrangement 3150 of thesmart blade 3100 also includes one or more media reading interfaces that are configured to read physical layer information stored on or in themedia segments 3200 received at thecoupler arrangement 3150. In certain implementations, each coupler arrangement includes at least one media reading interface. Indeed, in some implementations, each front port of the coupler arrangement includes a media reading interface. In other implementations, adjacent pairs of front ports each include a media reading interface. In still other implementations, one or more rear ports also may include media reading interfaces. Example media reading interfaces are disclosed in U.S. Provisional Application Nos. 61/303,961; 61/413,828; 61/437,504; and U.S. Pat. No. 8,690,593 incorporated by reference above. - In some implementations, an example
smart blade 3100 includes acircuit board arrangement 3120 and ablade processor 3140. Thecircuit board arrangement 3120 connects theblade processor 3140 to the media reading interfaces of thecoupler arrangement 3150. In some implementations, theblade processor 3140 does not modify or otherwise interfere with communications signals (e.g., signals 51 ofFIG. 1 ) propagating over media segments plugged into ports of thecoupler arrangement 3150. In certain implementations, theblade processor 3140 does not monitor such communications signals. In certain implementations, theblade processor 3140 is isolated from such communications signals. - A first portion of the
circuit board arrangement 3120 extends across the front of theblade 3100. Thefront couplers 3151, 3153 (FIGS. 57, 65, and 70 ) are coupled to the first portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120. The second portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120 extends rearwardly from the first portion. In some implementations, the second portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120 is sufficiently narrow to fit between theintermediate flanges 3113 of theblade base 3110. In some implementations, thecircuit board arrangement 3120 includes a single printed circuit board. - In other implementations, however, the
circuit board arrangement 3120 includes multiple circuit boards that are electrically connected together. In certain implementations, thecircuit board arrangement 3120 includes afirst circuit board 3122 and asecond circuit board 3124. In one implementation, thefirst circuit board 3122 defines at least the first portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120 and thesecond circuit board 3124 defines at least part of the second portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120. In certain implementations, the first andsecond boards - In certain implementations, the mounting
frame 3115 is interrupted (e.g., defines a reduced height) at an intermediate section of theframe 3115, thereby defining a gap between two adjacent groups ofcouplers 3151. Theblade processor 3140 is mounted to the first portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120 at the interrupted section of the frame 3115 (seeFIG. 57 ). In one implementation, theprocessor 3140 is mounted to thecircuit board arrangement 3120 via s SIM-card type connector. In other implementations, however, theprocessor 3140 may be otherwise connected to the circuit board arrangement 3120 (e.g., mezzanine connectors). - In some implementations, the
blade 3100 may have an open top. In such implementations, the rear ports of thecouplers 3151 may be accessible through the open top of theblade 3100. Accordingly, the connectorized ends of theincoming media segments 3210 may be accessible through the open top of theblade 3100. Theprocessor 3140 also may be accessible through the open top of theblade 3100. The interruptedtop portion 3116 of theframe 3115 enhances access to theblade processor 3140 through the open top. - In certain implementations, the
blade base 3110 defines one or more openings 3109 (FIGS. 57 and 62 ) at the rear of thefront couplers 3151. In some implementations, the first portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120 does not extend rearwardly of thefront couplers 3151. Accordingly, theopenings 3109 provide finger access to the rear ports of thecouplers 3151 from a bottom of theblade 3100. In the example shown, thebase 3110 defines oneopening 3109 on either side of theprocessor 3140. - In some implementations, one or
more retention fingers 3160 are mounted to the front of theblade 3100 to manage and/or organize theoutgoing media segments 3220.FIG. 56 illustrates oneexample retention finger 3160 configured to facilitate fiber cable management. In certain implementations, thecable retention fingers 3160 may be installed on the mountingframe 3115. For example, eachcable retention finger 3160 includes a base 3161 that may be fastened or otherwise attached to a portion (e.g., bracket 3117) of theframe 3115. In other implementations, thebase 3161 of eachretention finger 3160 may attach to thebase 3110 or cover 3103 of ablade 3100. - Bottom and
top arms finger 3160 extend outwardly from thebase 3161 to anend 3167. Thearms base 3161, and end 3167 define anopening 3166 through which one or more media segments (e.g., optical fiber cables) can be routed. In the example shown, thetop arm 3164 defines abreak 3165 through which media segments can pass into theopening 3166 without routing an end (e.g., an end terminated by a connector) of the media segment between thearms break 3165 may be provided in theend 3167 or bottom 3164. Asupport flange 3163 extends between the bottom andtop arms base 3161. Thesupport flange 3163 inhibits the media segments retained within theopening 3166 from being bent too far. -
FIGS. 57-62 show afirst example blade 3100A including a mountingframe 3115A at which the front ports of a firstexample coupler arrangement 3150A are positioned. The firstexample coupler arrangement 3150A (FIG. 57 ) defines the front and rear ports of theblade 3100A. In some implementations, the mountingframe 3115A holds at least part of thecoupler arrangement 3150A to theblade base 3110. For example, in some implementations, thecoupler arrangement 3150A includes a first plurality ofcouplers 3151 held within the front openings of the mountingframe 3115A. - The mounting
frame 3115A generally includes a top 3116 connected to thebase 3110 by two ormore brackets 3117 to define a generally open front.Additional brackets 3117 may extend between the top 3116 and base 3110 to separate the front opening into multiple openings. In certain implementations, the mountingframe 3115A includestabs 3118 andflanges 3119 that extend partially into the frame openings. Thetabs 3118 andflanges 3119 aid in holding thecouplers 3151. In the example shown, the mountingframe 3115A defines four openings. In other implementations, however, the mountingframe 3115A may form greater or fewer openings. In some implementations, the mountingframe 3115A is integral with thebase 3110. For example, theframe 3115A may be formed by bending a front portion of thebase 3110. In other implementations, however, theframe 3115A can be a separate piece that is assembled to thebase 3110. - In some implementations,
multiple couplers 3151 are mounted within each frame opening. In other implementations, however, asingle coupler 3151 may be mounted within each frame opening. In the example shown, threecouplers 3151 are mounted within each opening in theframe 3115A. Thecouplers 3151 have front ports that define the front ports of theblade 3100A that are configured to receive the outgoing media segments 3210 (e.g., seeFIGS. 61-62 ). In some implementations, thecouplers 3151 of thefirst coupler arrangement 3150A also define the rear ports of theblade 3100A that are configured to receive the incoming media segments 3210 (e.g., seeFIGS. 61-62 ). For example, in certain implementations, eachcoupler 3151 defines one or more through-openings 3159 (FIG. 60 ) extending between the front and rear ports. In other implementations, thefirst coupler arrangement 3150A includes additional couplers that define the rear ports of theblade 3100A (e.g., seeblade 3100C ofFIGS. 67-71 ). - In the example shown, each
coupler 3151 includes four through-openings 3159, thereby providing a total of forty-eight through-openings 3159 on theblade 3100A. Accordingly, thefirst example blade 3100A is configured to connect forty-eight pairs ofmedia segments 3200. In other implementations, however, theblade 3100 may include greater orfewer couplers 3151 and eachcoupler 3151 may include greater or fewer through-openings. For example, eachcoupler 3151 may include one, two, eight, ten, or twelve through-openings 3159. In accordance with other aspects, eachcoupler 3151 may define an unequal number of front and rear ports. - In some implementations, the
couplers 3151 include fiber optic adapters configured to receive one or more pairs of connectorized fiber cables (e.g., two LC-connector terminated cables, two SC-connector terminated cables, two ST-connector terminated cables, two MPO-connector terminated cables, etc.). In the example shown inFIG. 60 , thecouplers 3151 are quadruplexfiber optic adapters 3151 that optically couple together four pairs of LC connectors. In other implementations, however, thecouplers 3151 can include monoplex fiber optic adapters, duplex fiber optic adapters, or other types of adapters. In still other implementations, thecouplers 3151 may include one or more electrical sockets. - In certain implementations,
dust caps 3152 can be provided in the ports of one or more of the through-openings 3159 of theadapters 3151. In the example shown, eachdust cap 3152 is configured to plug into two adjacent ports of an adapter 3151 (e.g., seeFIG. 60 ). In another implementation, however, each dust caps 3152 may be configured to plug into a single port of anadapter 3151. In other implementations, eachdust cap 3152 may be configured to plug into three or more ports of anadapter 3151. - As shown in
FIGS. 57 and 60 , thecouplers 3151 are mounted to acircuit board arrangement 3120A. In the example shown, thecircuit board arrangement 3120A is generally T-shaped. A first portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120A extends across the front of thebase 3110 and a second portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120A extends to a rear of thebase 3110. The first plurality ofcouplers 3151 are mounted on top of the first portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120A. - For example, in
FIG. 57 , a row of spaced groups of thecouplers 3151 are mounted to the first portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120A. In some implementations, thecouplers 3151 within each group are positioned directly next to each other (seeFIG. 57 ). In other implementations, thecouplers 3151 within each group are spaced from each other. In the example shown, each group ofcouplers 3151 is positioned to align with one of the openings of theframe 3115A. Accordingly, the front ports of eachcoupler 3151 are accessible through the front openings of theframe 3115A at the front of theblade 3100A. - In certain implementations, the
first example blade 3100A includes one or morevisual indicators 3128 to indicate status information of theblade 3100A (e.g., seeFIGS. 57-59 ). For example, thevisual indicators 3128 may be used to indicate a coupler port, a set of coupler ports, acoupler 3151, or thefirst blade 3100A, itself. In one implementation, thefirst example blade 3100A includes avisual indicator 3128 positioned adjacent each front port (e.g.,FIG. 59 ). In another implementation, thefirst example blade 3100A includes avisual indicator 3128 positioned adjacent each pair of front ports. In still other implementations, thefirst example blade 3100A includes a singlevisual indicator 3128 per blade. - In one example implementation, the
visual indicators 3128 include light emitting diodes (LEDs). In accordance with some aspects, theblade processor 3140 can indicate a particular coupler port (e.g., to show a technician which port should receive a plug) by applying power to light the correspondingLED 3128. In accordance with other aspects, theprocessor 3140 can apply power to anLED 3128 to indicate a status of the corresponding port, set of ports, or blade. For example, theprocessor 3140 may apply power to theLED 3128 when a plug has been received at a respective port. - In accordance with certain aspects, the
processor 3140 can send instructions to theLED 3128 to display a particular color. For example, theprocessor 3140 may cause anLED 3128 to display a first color (e.g., green) when a plug is inserted and physical layer information is successfully read, a second color (e.g., amber) when a plug is inserted and physical layer is not successfully read, and a third color (e.g., red) when a plug is partially (or otherwise improperly) inserted into the port. In other implementations, however, theLEDs 3128 can display greater or fewer colors or can indicate other types of statuses or errors. In other implementations, however, other types of visual indicators may be used (e.g., an LCD screen, a touch screen a monitor, etc.). -
FIGS. 61-62 show one example routing path for incoming andoutgoing media segments first example blade 3100A.Outgoing media segments 3220 are routed to thecouplers 3151 at the front of theblade 3100A. Connectorized ends 3222 of theoutgoing media segments 3220 are plugged into the front ports of thecouplers 3151. For example, the connectorized ends 3222 may be inserted through the openings of theframe 3115A and into the front port of the through-openings 3159 defined by thecouplers 3151. Themedia segments 3220 may be managed by one or more of theretention fingers 3160 coupled to theblade 3100A. - At least a first group of one or more
incoming media segments 3210 are routed to one of theintermediate flanges 3113. Theincoming media segments 3210 of the first group are secured to theblade 3100A at theintermediate flange 3113. For example, the first media segments of the first group may be secured to thetab 3114 at theflange 3113 using a cable tie 3039 (e.g., seeFIGS. 77-79 ). For example, thecable tie 3039 may be wrapped around themedia segments 3200 and looped through thetab 3114. Connectorized ends 3212 of themedia segments 3210 are routed over thebase 3110 towards the front of theblade 3100A and plugged into the rear ports of thecouplers 3151. -
FIGS. 63-66 show various views of asecond example blade 3100B. Thesecond example blade 3100B includes a generallyplanar base 3110, ahandle 3108,outer extensions 3112, andinner extensions 3113. At least one of theouter extensions 3112 defines anotch 3105 in an external side. One ormore tabs 3114 are provided at eachinner flange 3113 to aid in securing a group of optical fibers to theblade 3100B.Retention fingers 3160 may extend forwardly of theblade 3100B to aid in managingoutgoing media segments 3220. - The
second example blade 3100B includes a secondexample coupler arrangement 3150B configured to connect incoming and outgoing fibers terminated with WO-connectors. Thesecond coupler arrangement 3150B includes a row of couplers 3153 (FIG. 66 ) at the front of theblade 3100B. In the example shown, thecouplers 3153 are fiber optic adapters configured to receive MPO-type fiber optic connectors. For example, in one implementation, eachadapter 3153 is configured to optically couple together a pair of MPO-connectors. In other implementations, eachadapter 3153 may coupler together multiple pairs of MPO-connectors. In the example shown, dust plugs 3154 are mounted in front and rear ports of theadapters 3153. - In certain implementations, the
second example blade 3100B includes acircuit board arrangement 3120B that includes multiple circuit boards. For example, inFIGS. 65 and 66 , thecircuit board arrangement 3100B includes afirst circuit board 3122, asecond circuit board 3124, and athird circuit board 3126. Aprocessor 3140 connects to thefirst circuit board 3122. TheMPO adapters 3153 are sandwiched between thefirst circuit board 3122 and thethird circuit board 3126. Accordingly, each of theadapters 3153 may include a first media reading interface that communicates with theprocessor 3140 through thefirst circuit board 3122 and a secondmedia reading interface 3157 that communicates with theprocessor 3140 through the third circuit board 3126 (seeFIG. 66 ). - The
third circuit board 3126 is communicatively (e.g., electrically) connected to thefirst circuit board 3122. For example, in some implementations, thethird circuit board 3126 is connected to thefirst circuit board 3122 usingpins 3129, which can be guided in ahousing 3128 positioned on the first circuit board 3122 (e.g., seeFIG. 66 ). Accordingly, thefirst circuit board 3122 connects theprocessor 3140 to thethird circuit board 3126. In some implementations, thecircuit board arrangement 3120B includes multiplethird circuit boards 3126. For example, in the implementation shown inFIG. 65 , thecircuit board arrangement 3120B includes onethird circuit board 3126 positioned over thecouplers 3153 on a first side of theprocessor 3140 and anotherthird circuit board 3126 positioned over thecouplers 3153 on a second side of theprocessor 3140. - The
second example blade 3100B includes a secondexample mounting frame 3115B coupling thesecond coupler arrangement 3150B to the base 3110 (seeFIGS. 65-66 ). The mountingframe 3115B is configured to hold thecouplers 3153 at the front of theblade 3100B while allowing access to the front and rear ports of thecouplers 3153. The mountingframe 3115B includes afascia 3091 extending upwardly from the base 3110 (FIG. 66 ). Thefascia 3091 defines one ormore openings 3092 through which the front ports of thecouplers 3153 may be accessed. In the example shown, the mountingframe 3115B defines four openings. In other implementations, however, the mountingframe 3115B may form greater or fewer openings. -
Tabs 3093 extend from thebase 3110 of theblade 3100B and into theopenings 3092 to aid in retaining thecouplers 3153. In some implementations, theframe 3115B includes atab 3093 for eachcoupler 3153. In other implementations, thetabs 3093 extend between adjacent couplers 3153 (seeFIG. 63 ). In the example shown, fourcouplers 3153 are mounted at eachopening 3092. In other implementations, however, greater orfewer couplers 3153 can be mounted at eachopening 3092. In some implementations, thecouplers 3153 of each opening are positioned directly next to each other. In other implementations,adjacent couplers 3153 are spaced from each other. - A
top member 3095, which extends generally perpendicular to thebase 3110, can be removeably connected to the fascia 3091 (seeFIG. 66 ). For example, thetop member 3095 can includebrackets 3096 that defineopenings 3097 and thefascia 3091 may defineopenings 3094. Fasteners can be inserted through theopenings top member 3095 to thefascia 3091. In certain implementations, thetop member 3095 may include a series ofopenings 3098. In the example shown, theopenings 3098 accommodate fasteners holding thethird circuit board 3126 to thecouplers 3153. - A finishing member 3099 (
FIG. 65 ) can be mounted to theframe 3115B. The finishingmember 3099 defines a curved surface that extends over a length of theopenings 3092 defined in thefascia 3091. In some implementations, the finishingmember 3099 is configured to be held to theframe 3115B using the retention fingers 3160 (discussed above with reference toFIG. 60 ). For example, the finishingmembers 3099 may include hooked or bent ends that are held between theretention fingers 3160 and the frame fascia 3091 (seeFIG. 65 ). - In certain implementations, each
coupler 3153 defines one or more through-openings 3159 (FIG. 66 ) extending between front and rear ports of thecoupler 3153. In the example shown, eachcoupler 3153 includes a single through-opening 3159, thereby providing a total of sixteen through-openings 3159 on thesecond example blade 3100B. Accordingly, thesecond blade 3100B is configured to connect sixteen pairs ofmulti-fiber cables 3200. In other implementations, however, thesecond example blade 3100B may include greater orfewer couplers 3153 and eachcoupler 3153 may include greater or fewer through-openings 3159. In accordance with other aspects, thecouplers 3153 may define an unequal number of front and rear ports. -
FIGS. 67-71 show different views of athird example blade 3100C. Thethird example blade 3100C includes a generallyplanar base 3110C (FIGS. 70-71 ) that is substantially similar to thebase 3110 of thefirst example blade 3100A. However, thebase 3110C of thethird blade 3100C includes brackets 3102 (FIG. 70 ). Thebase 3110C of thethird blade 3100C also includes ahandle 3108,side flanges 3112, andinner flanges 3113. At least one of theside flanges 3112 defines anotch 3105 in an external side. One ormore tabs 3114 are provided at eachinner flange 3113 to aid in securing a group of optical fibers to theblade 3100C. - A cover arrangement 3103 (
FIG. 67 ) may be mounted to thebase 3110C atbrackets 3102. Thecover arrangement 3103 includes one or more covers that extend over the top of theblade 3100 between theframe 3115C and a rear of thebase 3110C. In one implementation, asingle cover 3103 extends over theentire blade 3100C. In other implementations, however,multiple covers 3103 can be installed on theblade 3100C. Each cover cooperates with thebase 3110 to define ablade interior 3111. In some implementations, eachcover 3103 includes side and/or rear walls that extend down to the base 3110 (seeFIG. 68 ). In other implementations, however, eachcover 3103 is mounted to a separate rear wall and/or to separate side walls of theblade 3100C. In still other implementations, eachcover 3103 may be mounted to theframe 3115C. In the example shown, the outer andinner flanges cover arrangement 3103. In other implementations, however, thecover arrangement 3103 may extend over the outer andinner flanges - The
third example blade 3100C also includes a thirdexample coupler arrangement 3150C that is configured to connectincoming media segments 3210 andoutgoing media segments 3220. In the example shown, theincoming media segments 3210 are optical fibers terminated with MPO-type connectors and theoutgoing media segments 3200 are optical fibers terminated with LC-type connectors. Thecoupler arrangement 3150C includes a first set ofcouplers 3151 defining the front ports of theblade 3100C and a second set ofcouplers 3155 defining the rear ports of theblade 3100C. In the example shown, theblade 3100C includes a left coupler region at which a plurality of thefiber optic adapters 3151 is located, an intermediate region at which ablade processor 3140 is located, and a right coupler region at which another plurality of thefiber optic adapters 3151 is located. A cover is installed over each coupler region. In accordance with some aspects, the intermediate region of theblade 3100 is uncovered. Accordingly, thecover arrangement 3103 does not inhibit access to theblade processor 3140. - The
third blade 3100C also includes a mountingframe 3115C that aids in holding the first set ofcouplers 3151 to thebase 3110C. In the example shown, the mountingframe 3115C is substantially the same as the mountingframe 3115A of thefirst blade 3100A.Retention fingers 3160 may be coupled to theframe 3115C to aid in managingoutgoing media segments 3220. In some implementations, the top 3116 of the mountingframe 3115A is about flush with thecover arrangement 3103. In other implementations, thecover arrangement 3103 encompasses part of theframe 3115A. In other implementations, the top 3116 of theframe 3115A extends over a portion of thecover arrangement 3103. In still other implementations, however, thethird blade 3100C may include aframe 3115C with a different configuration thanframe 3115A. - In the example shown in
FIGS. 69-71 , thefront couplers 3151 define through-openings that are configured to optically couple optical fibers terminated with LC connectors to optical fibers terminated with LC connectors and therear couplers 3155 are configured to optically couple optical cables terminated with MPO connectors to optical cables terminated with MPO connectors. In other implementations, however, each front andrear couplers FIG. 67 ) are mounted in front and rear sides of thefront couplers 3151 and dust plugs 3156 (FIG. 68 ) are mounted to therear couplers 3155. - The
third blade 3100C also includes a thirdcircuit board arrangement 3120C having a first portion extending across the front of thebase 3110C and a second portion of the circuit board arrangement extending to a rear of thebase 3110C. In certain implementations, the thirdcircuit board arrangement 3120C also includes a third portion that extends at last partially along a rear side of theblade base 3110C (seeFIGS. 69-71 ). The first plurality ofcouplers 3151 are mounted on top of the first portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120C and thesecond couplers 3155 are mounted on top of the third portion of thecircuit board arrangement 3120C. - One or more
connecting media segments 3230 connect thefront couplers 3151 to therear couplers 3155. In accordance with some aspects, the connectingmedia segments 3230 extend through the blade interior 3113 defined between the base 3110 and thecover arrangement 3103. Thecover arrangement 3103 inhibits access to and/or provides protection for the connectingmedia segments 3230. Thecover arrangement 3103 also may inhibit access to and/or provides protection for the rear ports of the first set ofcouplers 3151 and/or the front ports of the second set ofcouplers 3155. - In the example shown, the connecting
media segment 3230 includes a hydra cable that includes amulti-fiber cable 3233 terminated at a multi-fiber connector (e.g., an MPO connector) 3231 (FIGS. 69-71 ). Certain types ofhydra cable 3230 also includes one or more fanouts 3235 at which the fibers of themulti-fiber cable 3233 are separated into individualoptical fibers 3237. Each of theindividual fibers 3237 is terminated at a fiber optic connector (e.g., an LC connector, an SC connector, an FC connector, an ST connector, an LX.5 connector, etc.) 3239. Other types ofhydra cables 3230 may include a cable breakout as part of an MPO boot instead of a separate fanout. - In some implementations, the
hydra cable 3230 can be secured to thebase 3110 of theblade 3100C. For example, thefanout arrangement 3235 of thehydra cable 3230 can be secured to a raised tab 3104 (FIG. 91 ) positioned on thebase 3110. In the example shown, a tie (e.g., a cable tie, a zip tie, etc.) 3232 is looped through the raisedtab 3104 and wrapped around the fanout arrangement 3235 (seeFIGS. 69-71 ). In other implementations, thetie 3232 may wrap around any portion of thehydra cable 3230. In still other implementations, thefanout arrangement 3235 may include a clip that allows thefanout arrangement 3235 to be directly attached to the raisedtab 3104. In still other implementations, other types of connectingmedia segments 3230 may optically couple the front ports of theblade 3100C to the rear ports of theblade 3100C. - As shown in
FIGS. 72-74 , one ormore labeling panels 3180 may be installed on the blades 3100 (e.g.,blade 3100A,blade 3100B, andblade 3100C) to provide labeling of the front coupler ports. Eachlabeling panel 3180 extends across one or more front ports of theblade 3100. Labels (e.g., displaying numbers, letters, graphics, names, etc.) for the front ports may be provided on thelabeling panel 3180. For example, a printed label may be removably mounted to thelabeling panel 3180. - Each of the
labeling panels 3180 may be configured to connect to one or more of theretention fingers 3160 extending forwardly of theblade 3100. In the example shown, eachlabeling panel 3180 extends betweendistal ends 3167 of twoadjacent retention fingers 3160. In certain implementations, theretention fingers 3160 are sufficiently long that a gap defined between the front ports and eachlabeling panel 3180 allows each optical fiber plugged into one of the front ports a sufficient bend radius between the front port and the through-opening 3166 of the retention finger 3160 (e.g., seeFIGS. 70 and 71 ). - One
example labeling panel 3180 may be found inFIG. 74 . Thelabeling panel 3180 includes a generallyplanar labeling surface 3181 on which a label may be provided. For example, in one implementation, a label may be affixed to thelabeling surface 3181. In other implementations, thelabeling panel 3180 also includestabs 3182 at the top and/or bottom of thepanel 3180 andnubs 3183 at opposing sides of thepanel 3180 to aid in retaining one or more labels. In the example shown, thelabeling panel 3180 includes onenub 3183 at each side of thelabeling surface 3183, twotabs 3182 at the top of thelabeling surface 3181 intermediate the twonubs 3183, and twotabs 3182 at the bottom of thelabeling surface 3181 intermediate the twonubs 3183. - The
labeling panel 3180 includes one ormore attachment members 3184 configured to secure thelabeling panel 3180 to theends 3167 of theretention fingers 3160. In some implementations, theattachment members 3184 include grip fingers configured to snap to the distal ends 3167 of theretention fingers 3160. In the example shown, eachlabeling panel 3180 includes top andbottom grip fingers 3184 at each side of thepanel 3180. In some implementations, theend 3167 of eachretention finger 3160 includes at least one vertically extending mountingpin 3168. In some such implementations, thegrip fingers 3184 of thelabeling panel 3180 snap-fits or otherwise attaches to the mounting pins 3168. - In certain implementations, the
end 3167 of eachfinger 3160 includes two spaced mounting pins 3168 (e.g., seeFIG. 56 ). Accordingly, eachretention fingers 3160 is configured to receive and support two adjacent labeling panels 3180 (e.g., seeFIG. 72 ). In some implementations, each mountingpin 3168 defines one or morereduced diameter sections 3169. For example, in the implementation shown inFIG. 56 , the ends of eachpin 3168 define reduceddiameter sections 3169. In some implementations, thegrip fingers 3184 are sized to snap-fit to the reduceddiameter sections 3169 of the mounting pins 3168. In other implementations, thegrip fingers 3184 are configured to snap-fit to mountingpins 3168 at any point along the length. - In one implementation, the
labeling panel 3180 has a height that allows both the top andbottom grip fingers 3184 at each side of thepanel 3180 to attach to thesame retention finger 3160. In other implementations, thelabeling panel 3180 is sufficiently tall to provide labeling for the front ports on two ormore blades 3100. For example, thelabeling panel 3180 may be sufficiently tall to extend across the front ports of multiple (e.g., two, three, four, eight, etc.)blades 3100. In such implementations, thetop grip fingers 3184 may attach to theretention fingers 3160 extending from afirst blade 3100 and thebottom grip fingers 3184 may attach to theretention fingers 3160 extending from asecond blade 3100. - In certain implementations, the
grip fingers 3184 are configured to rotate about the mounting pins 3168. Rotating thelabeling panels 3180 about one of the mountingpins 3168 may facilitate accessing the front ports of theblade 3100 that are located behind thelabeling panel 3180. In some implementations, thelabeling panels 3180 can be rotated by detaching one side of thelabeling panel 3180 from one of the mounting pins 3168. For example, inFIG. 73 , theattachment members 3184 on one side of the bottom, leftlabeling panel 3180 have been disengaged from anexample mounting pin 3168 to allow thelabeling panel 3180 to rotate outwardly about another mountingpin 3168 at the opposite side of thelabeling panel 3180. In certain implementations, thelabeling panels 3180 also may be fully detached from theretention fingers 3160. -
FIGS. 75 and 76 illustrate one examplebladed panel system 3000 in which a plurality ofblades 3100 is mounted within anexample chassis 3010. In the example shown, the plurality ofblades 3100 includes each type ofblade second example blade 3100B disclosed above with reference toFIGS. 63-66 ; the middle blade is configured the same as thefirst example blade 3100A disclosed above with reference toFIGS. 57-62 ; and the lower blade is configured the same as thethird example blade 3100C disclosed above with reference toFIGS. 67-71 . Accordingly, the upper blade is configured to receive incoming andoutgoing media segments middle blade 3100A is configured to receive incoming andoutgoing media segments lower blade 3100C is configured to receiveincoming media segments 3210 terminated with MPO connectors andoutgoing media segments 3220 terminated with LC connectors. - In accordance with some aspects, the
bladed panel system 3000 is configured to enable theblades 3100 to move relative to thechassis 3010 into one or more positions. Moving one of theblades 3100 to a different position relative to theother blades 3100 in thechassis 3010 may aid a user in accessing the coupler ports of theblade 3100 and/or any media segments inserted therein. For example, moving one of theblades 3100 forward of theother blades 3100 may provide space for a user to grasp a connector inserted into one of the coupler ports of theblade 3100. In accordance with certain aspects, moving one of theblades 3100 to a different position also may provide access to theblade processor 3140. - In some implementations, each
blade 3100 may move between a closed position and a first extended position. In the closed position, theblade 3100 is positioned within the chassis so that the front ports of theblade 3100 are located at the open front of thechassis 3010 and the retention fingers extend forwardly of thechassis 3010. In the first extended position, at least the front ports of theblade 3100 are located forwardly of the open front of thechassis 3010. In certain implementations, the rear ports of thefront couplers 3151 also are located forwardly of the open front of thechassis 3010 when theblade 3100 is in the first extended position. - In some implementations, the
blades 3100 also may move to a second extended position. In the second extended position, the front ports of theblade 3100 are located farther forward of the front chassis opening compared to their location in the first extended position. In some implementations, theblade processor 3140 is accessible when theblade 3100 is in the second extended position. In certain implementations, theblade processor 3140 is accessible when theblade 3100 is in the first extended position. In certain implementations, each of theblades 3100 may be latched or otherwise releasably secured into at least one of the positions as will be discussed in more detail with respect toFIGS. 91-127 . - By way of example, in
FIGS. 75 and 76 , theupper blade 3100B is in a closed position; themiddle blade 3100A is in a first extended position, and thelower blade 3100C is in a second extended position. The front ports of theupper blade 3100B generally align with the open front of thechassis housing 3010. The rear ports of thefront couplers 3153 and theprocessor 3140 of theupper blade 3100B are not accessible. The front ports of themiddle blade 3100A are spaced forward of the open front of thechassis 3010. The rear ports of thefront couplers 3151 and/or theprocessor 3140 may be accessible from the front of thechassis 3010. The front ports of thelower blade 3100C are spaced farther forward of the open front of thechassis 3010 than the front ports of themiddle blade 3100A. Acover arrangement 3103 blocks access from the front of thechassis 3010 to the rear ports of thefront couplers 3151 of thelower blade 3100C. - The
bladed panel system 3000 is configured to enable theblades 3100 to move (e.g., slide) relative to the chassis 3010 (e.g., seeFIGS. 47 and 48 ). In certain implementations, theblades 3100 are configured to travel along the direction of the connector insertion axis AI (FIG. 91 ). For example, theblades 3100 may travel forwardly and rearwardly relative to thechassis 3010. In some implementations, eachblade 3100 is configured to travel over a distance ranging from about one inch to about five inches between the closed position and the first extended position. Indeed, in some implementations, eachblade 3100 travels over a distance ranging from about two inches to about four inches between the closed position and the first extended position. In one example implementation, eachblade 3100 travels about three inches between the closed position and the first extended position. - In some implementations, each
blade 3100 travels over a distance ranging from about four inches to about eight inches between the closed position and the second extended position. Indeed, in some implementations, eachblade 3100 travels over a distance ranging from about five inches to about seven inches between the closed position and the second extended position. In one example implementation, eachblade 3100 travels about six inches between the closed position and the second extended position. In some implementations, eachblade 3100 travels about three inches between the first and second extended positions. In other implementations, however, eachblade 3100 may travel a greater or lesser amount between the first and second extended positions (e.g., one inch, two inches, three inches, four inches, etc.). - Referring to
FIGS. 77-90 , management structures at the front and rear of thechassis 3010,blades 3100, and frames (e.g., racks, cabinets, etc.) secure theincoming media segments 3210 andoutgoing media segments 3220 to thechassis 3010 while accommodating movement of theblades 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. For example, theincoming cables 3210 may be routed to the rear of thechassis 3010 so as to provide aslack length 3215 of the incoming media segments 3210 (seeFIG. 78 ). In some implementations, theincoming media segments 3210 may include a curvedslack length segment 3215 between the management structures (e.g., clamps 3030, fanouts 3035, etc.) at the rear of thechassis 3010 and the management structures (e.g., cable ties 3039) at the rear of theblade 3100. - The
slack length 3215 enables the connectorized ends 3212 of themedia segments 3210 to remain plugged into the blade couplers (e.g., rear couplers 3155) when theblade 3100 is moved to an extended position. For example, in some implementations, the curved slack length may straighten as theblades 3100 are moved forward of thechassis 3010. In certain implementations, the management structures (e.g., cable ties 3039) on theblade 3100 secure themedia segments 3210 to theblade 3100 while allowing for movement of themedia segments 3210 relative to theblade 3100 to accommodate movement of theblades 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. For example, theslack length 3215 can slide through thecable ties 3039 as theblades 3100 are moved forward and rearward of thechassis 3010. - In some implementations, the cable tie region is positioned so that the
incoming media segments 3210 extend rearwardly from the chassis management structures to thecable ties 3039 when theblade 3100 is in the closed position. In certain implementations, the cable tie region on eachinner extension 3113 is aligned with the chassis management structures when theblade 3100 is in the closed position. In some implementations, the cable tie region is positioned so that theincoming media segments 3210 extend generally sideways or forwardly from the chassis management structures to thecable tie region 3039 when theblade 3100 is in the first extended position. In certain implementations, the cable tie region on eachinner extension 3113 is aligned with the backplane 2030 when theblade 3100 is in the first extended position (FIG. 79 ). - The
outgoing media segments 3220 plugged into the front ports of theblades 3100 may be secured to an equipment rack or other structure to which thechassis 3010 mounted. Accordingly, movement of theblades 3100 relative to thechassis 3010 moves themedia segments 3220 relative to the rack. Theopenings 3166 defined in thecable retention fingers 3160 are sufficiently long to aid in accommodate movement of theoutgoing media segments 3220 within theopenings 3166 when theblades 3100 are moved between closed and extended positions. - In accordance with some aspects, additional management structures also may be provided on the rack to accommodate movement of the blades. For example,
FIGS. 80-90 illustrate an example bladed panel system in which at least onechassis 3010 and at least onebracket 4300 are mounted to aframe 4400. Thebrackets 4300 are mounted at thechassis 3010 to aid in routing theoutgoing media segments 3220 from the front of theblades 3100 to elsewhere on theframe 4400. - The
chassis 3010 is configured to receive one ormore blades 3100 defining a plurality of front ports at whichoutgoing media segments 3220 may be positioned. In the example shown, eachblade 3100 also includesmultiple retention fingers 3160FIG. 56 ) extending forwardly of theblade 3100 to manage theoutgoing media segments 3220. Each of theblades 3100 is configured to move relative to thechassis 3010 between a closed position and at least one extended position. In certain implementations, eachblade 3100 is configured to move between a closed position, a first extended position, and a second extended position. - In some implementations, the
brackets 4300 are mounted to theframe 4400 through the mounting brackets of thechassis 3010. In other implementations, thebrackets 4300 may be mounted directly to theframe 4400 adjacent thechassis 3010. In the example shown, onebracket 4300 is mounted at each side of thechassis 3010. In other implementations, however, greater orfewer brackets 4300 may be provided. For example, in some implementations,multiple brackets 4300 may be provided at each side of achassis 3010. In other implementations, asingle bracket 4300 may span multipleadjacent chasses 3010. - Each
bracket 4300 is configured to manage (e.g., secure and/or organize) slack length ofoutgoing media segments 3220 routed to the front ports of theblades 3100. The slack length of theoutgoing media segments 3220 accommodates movement of theblades 3100 between the various positions. For example, compare the cable routing ofFIGS. 80-82 . InFIG. 80 , oneexample blade 3100 is positioned within thechassis 3010 in the closed position.Outgoing media segments 3220, which are plugged into the front ports of theblade 3100, are routed to a side of thechassis 3010. Slack length of theoutgoing media segments 3220 is routed around anexample bracket 4300 positioned at the side of thechassis 3010. Theoutgoing media segments 3220 may be secured to the side of thechassis 3010 or to theframe 4400 after being routed around thebracket 4300. - In
FIG. 81 , theblade 3100 has been moved to the first extended position relative to thechassis 3010. The front ports of theblade 3100 are positioned forwardly of the open front of thechassis 3010. Thebracket 4300 enables movement of theoutgoing media segments 3220 plugged into the blade front ports without pulling on the outgoing media segments 3220 (e.g., at the point where theoutgoing media segments 3220 secure to thechassis 3010 or frame 4400). For example, theoutgoing media segments 3220 may unwrap/lift away from at least a portion of thebracket 4300. In certain implementations, thebracket 4300 continues to manage (e.g., secure and/or organize) the slack length of theoutgoing media segments 3220 while theblade 3100 is in the extended position. - In
FIG. 82 , theblade 3100 has been further moved to the second extended position relative to thechassis 3010. The front ports of theblade 3100 are positioned farther forwardly of thechassis 3010 than in the first extended position. Thebracket 4300 enables the further movement of theoutgoing media segments 3220 plugged into the front ports without pulling on the outgoing media segments 3220 (e.g., at the point where theoutgoing media segments 3220 secure to thechassis 3010 or frame 4400). For example, theoutgoing media segments 3220 may continue to unwrap/lift away from at least a portion of thebracket 4300. In certain implementations, theoutgoing media segments 3220 may be at least partially disconnected from thebracket 4300 when theblade 3100 is moved to the second extended position. -
FIGS. 83-89 show oneexample bracket 4300 configured to manage the slack length ofoutgoing media segments 3220 plugged into the front ports of theblades 3100. Theexample bracket 4300 is suitable for use in managing the slack length of any media segments positioned at the front of any blade disclosed herein. Thebracket 4300 includes a mountingbase 4310 at which thebracket 4300 may be secured to theframe 4400 and/or to thechassis 3010. For example, the mountingbase 4310 may define one ormore holes 4312 through which afastener 4314 may extend to secure thebase 4310 to theframe 4400 and/orchassis 3010. - A
spacer flange 4320 extends forwardly of the mountingbase 4310. In some implementations, thespacer flange 4320 extends over a distance comparable to the distance between the closed blade position and the first extended position. In some implementations, thespacer flange 4320 extends forwardly less than about 4 inches. Indeed, in some implementations, thespacer flange 4320 extends forwardly less than about 3 inches. In other implementations, thespacer flange 4320 extends forwardly about 2 inches. - At least one bend
radius limiter arrangement 4330 extends from thespacer flange 4320 opposite the mountingbase 4310. In some implementations, the bendradius limiter arrangement 4330 defines a single arced surface. For example, the bendradius limiter arrangement 4330 may define a half-spool. In other implementations, the bendradius limiter arrangement 4330 includes two or more bend radius limiters. For example, the bendradius limiter arrangement 4330 shown inFIG. 83 includes a firstbend radius limiter 4333 and a secondbend radius limiter 4337 joined by aspacer 4335. - The convex surface of the bend
radius limiter arrangement 4330 defines a surface over which the slack length of one or moreoutgoing media segments 3220 may be routed. The concave surface of the bendradius limiter arrangement 4330 defines achannel 4340 along which one or more of theoutgoing media segments 3220 can be routed along theframe 4400 as will be described in more detail herein. - One or more
cable retention fingers 4350 are mounted to thebracket 4300 to aid in managing theoutgoing media segments 3220 routed around thebracket 4300. In certain implementations, thecable retention fingers 4350 are mounted to thebracket 4300 at the bendradius limiter arrangement 4330. For example, as shown inFIG. 83 , thecable retention fingers 4350 may be mounted to thespacer 4335 separating two of thebend radius limiters cable retention fingers 4350 are positioned in a column between thebend radius limiters - Each
cable retention finger 4350 is includes abody 4352 defining anopening 4354 that is configured to receive one or moreoutgoing media segments 3220. For example, in some implementations, eachretention finger 4350 includes aclosing member 4356 that is configured to provide access to theopening 4354 to enable routing of theoutgoing media segments 3220 through thecable retention fingers 4350 without inserting the ends of theoutgoing media segments 3220 through theopenings 4354. In one implementation, the closingmember 4356 defines a living hinge that enables the closingmember 4356 to move relative to thefinger body 4352. In other implementations, eachfinger 4350 defines an uncovered slot through which theoutgoing media segments 3220 may be inserted into and removed from thefinger 4350. In certain implementations, the closingmember 4356 may be opened to accommodate movement of themedia segments 3220 when theblade 3100 is moved to the second extended position (seeFIG. 82 ). - As best seen in
FIG. 90 , thebracket 4300 also may include aguide member 4360 at an opposite side of the bendradius limiter arrangement 4330 from thespacer flange 4320. Theguide member 4360 guides theoutgoing media segments 3220 routed around the bendradius limiter arrangement 4330 to thechannel 4340. In some implementations, theguide 4360 includes abody 4362 that defines anopening 4365 through which one or more of theoutgoing media segments 3220 may be routed. In certain implementations, thebody 4362 of theguide 4360 defines aslot 4364 or other opening through which theoutgoing media segments 3220 may be inserted into theopening 4365 without feeding the ends of theoutgoing media segments 3220 through theguide member 4360. - One or
more securement members 4370 may be provided to aid in routing theoutgoing media segments 3220 to theguide member 4360 and/or in securing theoutgoing media segments 3220 to thebracket 4300. In the example shown inFIG. 90 , thesecurement members 4370 include zip ties. In other implementations, however, other types of securement members (e.g., cable ties, twist ties, straps, hooks, etc.) may be provided. - Referring to
FIGS. 91-127 , in accordance with some aspects, each blade (e.g., any ofblades blade 3100 may be latched or otherwise secured in the closed position. For example, as shown inFIGS. 91-94 , eachblade 3100 may cooperate with adetent 3017 on thechassis housing 3013 to releasably lock theblade 3100 in the closed position. Sufficient force to overcome the resistance of thedetent 3017 is applied to theblade 3100 to move theblade 3100 to one of the extended positions (e.g., seeFIG. 94 ). Sufficient force to overcome thedetent 3017 also is applied to lock theblade 3100 in the closed position (e.g., seeFIG. 92 ). - In some implementations, one or
more detents 3017 may be provided at a rear of thechassis housing 3013. For example, a column ofdetents 3017 may be provided on (e.g., snapped into holes defined in) at least one of thechassis side walls 3011 at the rear of the chassis 3010 (seeFIG. 93 ). Thenotch 3105 defined in at least one of theside flanges 3112 of eachblade 3100 cooperates with one of thedetents 3017 to inhibit forward movement of theblade 3100. In the example shown, only one of theside flanges 3112 defines a notch 3105 (e.g., seeFIGS. 54, 63, and 67 ). In other implementations, however, thedetents 3017 may be provided on both sides of thechassis housing 3013 and thenotches 3105 may be provided on bothside flanges 3112. - In some implementations, the
chassis housing 3013 may be configured to inhibit ablade 3100 from being moved too far rearward relative to thechassis 3010. For example, one ormore stops 3018 may be provided on theside walls 3011 of the chassis housing 3013 (FIG. 92 ). In the example shown, thestops 3018 are positioned forwardly of thedetents 3017. In the example shown inFIG. 92 , therearward shoulder 3175 of thesecond latching tab 3176 of ablade 3100 abuts against one of thestops 3018 to inhibit further rearward motion of theblade 3100. - In accordance with some aspects, each
blade 3100 includes a latching arrangement that is configured to secure theblade 3100 in one or more positions.FIGS. 95-97 illustrate one example latching arrangement by which ablade 3100 may be latched or otherwise secured in the first extended position. Eachblade 3100 with the example latching arrangement includes one or more latching tabs 3170 (FIGS. 55, 64, and 68 ) configured to engage with thechassis housing 3010 to lock theblade 3100 in one of a plurality of positions. - In such implementations, at least one side of the
chassis housing 3010 defines one ormore latching recesses 3009 or openings (FIGS. 91 and 95 ) that receive thelatching tabs 3170. In certain implementations, both sides of theblade 3100 may include one ormore latching tabs 3170 configured to cooperate with one ormore latching openings 3009 defined in both sides of thechassis housing 3010. In some implementations, thechassis 3010 defines onelatching opening 3009 for eachblade 3100 at the front of thechassis 3010. In other implementations, thechassis 3010 defines alatching opening 3009 at the front of eachside wall 3011 for eachblade 3100 to be received (e.g., seeFIG. 101 ). In still other implementations, eachside 3011 of thechassis 3010 may definemultiple openings 3009 for each blade 3100 (e.g., seeFIG. 120 ). - Example
blade latching tabs 3170 are shown inFIGS. 55, 63, and 68 . Eachlatching tab 3170 includes aresilient body 3171 having a mountingend 3172 and a free end. The mountingend 3172 of thetab body 3171 is secured to the blade base 3110 (e.g., via fasteners, welding, etc.). The free end of thebody 3171 defines alatching surface 3173 having first andsecond shoulders FIGS. 54 and 55 ). When theblade 3100 is inserted into thechassis 3010, thefirst shoulder 3174 faces the front of thechassis housing 3013 and thesecond shoulder 3175 faces the rear of the chassis housing 3013 (seeFIG. 98 ). - When a
blade 3100 is located in thechassis 3010 in the closed position, the distal end of thefirst latching tab 3170 abuts against theside walls 3011 of thechassis housing 3013. When theblade 3100 is moved forwardly (e.g., by pulling handle 3108), the latchingsurface 3173 of thetab 3170 moves along theside wall 3011 until thelatching surface 3173 aligns with thelatching recess 3009 of thechassis housing 3013. When aligned, the latchingsurface 3173 pops into the latching recess 3009 (seeFIG. 96 ). Front andrear shoulders latching tab 3170 abut against edges of theside wall 3011 to inhibit forward and rearward movement of the blade 3100 (seeFIG. 96 ). Pushing thelatching surface 3173 sufficiently inwards for theshoulders blade 3100, thereby enabling forward and rearward movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. - In accordance with some aspects, each
blade 3100 also may be latched or otherwise secured in a second extended position. For example, in some implementations, eachblade 3100 may include at least asecond latching tab 3176 positioned further rearward on theblade 3100 than the first latching tab 3170 (seeFIGS. 55, 63, and 68 ). In the example shown, thesecond latching tab 3176 is structured the same as thefirst latching tab 3170. In other implementations, however, thesecond latching tab 3176 may have a different structure. In some implementations, thesecond latching tab 3176 is configured to engage with theopenings 3009 of thechassis housing 3013 to lock theblade 3100 in the second extended position (seeFIG. 97 ). In other implementations, thesecond latching tab 3176 interacts with a different set of latching recesses or openings than thefirst latching tab 3170. - In the example shown in
FIGS. 75 and 76 , the latchingtabs upper blade 3100B are contained within thechassis housing 3013 and, accordingly, are not visible. No portion of thetabs chassis opening 3009. The first latching tab 3170B of themiddle blade 3100A is latched into one of the latchingopenings 3009 of thechassis 3013. Thesecond latching tab 3176 of themiddle blade 3100A is contained within thehousing 3013. Thefirst latching tab 3170C of thelower blade 3100C is external of thechassis housing 3013. Thesecond latching tab 3176C of thelower blade 3100C is latched into anotheropening 3009 of thechassis housing 3013. - In accordance with some aspects, the
blade 3100 can be completely removed from thechassis housing 3013. For example, to remove theblade 3100 from thechassis housing 3010, ablade 3100 may first be moved to the first extended position at which thefirst latching tab 3170 snaps into thelatching opening 3009 of thechassis housing 3013. By depressing thefirst latching tab 3170 free of theopening 3009, theblade 3100 may be moved further forward of thechassis 3010 to the second extended position. By depressing thesecond latching tab 3176 of theblade 3100 through thechassis opening 3009, theblade 3100 may be pulled still further forward of thechassis 3010 until theblade 3100 is free of thechassis housing 3013. -
FIGS. 99-127 show some alternative latching arrangements by which a blade may be secured in one or more positions relative to a chassis. In accordance with certain aspects, the latching arrangements are configured to be operated from the front of the chassis. In accordance with certain aspects, each of the latching arrangements is configured to be operated using one hand. In accordance with certain aspects, the latching arrangements include actuation members that are positioned outside of fiber routing paths. Indeed, in accordance with some aspects, the latching arrangements include actuators extending forwardly from central sections of the chasses. - For ease in understanding, the various latching arrangements will be shown installed on
blade 3100 described above.FIGS. 99-113 show oneexample latching arrangement 4500 that is configured to secureblade 3100 in one or more positions relative to chassis 3010 (e.g., seeFIGS. 101-106 ). For example, thelatching arrangement 4500 may secure theblade 3100 in a first extended position (seeFIGS. 103-104 ) and in a second extended position (seeFIGS. 105-106 ) relative to thechassis 3010. Thelatching arrangement 4500 includes anactuation member 4515, a first set ofreleasable stops 4525, and a second set of releasable stops 4535. Each of thestops - When in the locking positions, the
stops FIG. 101 ) defined in thechassis 3010 to inhibit movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. When in the releasing positions, thestops openings 3009 to enable movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. In certain implementations, eachstop chassis 3010. A user manipulates theactuation member 4515 to selectively release thestops - In the example shown in
FIG. 102 , thefirst stops 4525 are located on first ends offirst release arms 4520 and thesecond stops 4525 are located on first ends ofsecond release arms 4530. In some implementations, each of therelease arms chassis 3010. For example, each of therelease arms sidewalls 3011 of thechassis 3010. Thesidewalls 3011 inhibit thestops stops openings 3009 defined in thechassis 3010. Thechassis latching openings 3009 enable thestops stop openings 3009. - The
actuation member 4515 is configured to move relative to theblade 3100 to actuate thestops actuation member 4515 is located at one end of anactuation arm 4510. Theactuation arm 4510 also couples to second ends of the first andsecond release arms actuation member 4515 moves theactuation arm 4510, resulting in movement of one or more of therelease arms respective stops actuation member 4515 is configured to move forward and/or rearward relative to theblade 3100 when actuated. - In some implementations, the
actuation member 4515 extends forwardly of theblade couplers blade 3100. In accordance with some aspects, thehandle 3108 and theactuation member 4515 are configured to be manipulated concurrently by a user using one hand. In certain implementations, theactuation member 4515 extends from a generally central portion of the front of theblade 3100. In certain implementations, theactuation member 4515 extends over at least a portion of ablade handle 3108 that is configured to be manipulated (e.g., pulled and/or pushed) by a user. Indeed, in certain implementations, theactuation member 4515 is configured to move along thehandle 3108 when actuated. - In some implementations, the coupling between the
release arms actuation arm 4510 is configured to produce movement of thefirst release arms 4520 when theactuation arm 4510 is moved in a first direction and to produce movement of thesecond release arms 4530 when theactuation arm 4510 is moved in a second direction. In certain implementations, the first and second directions are opposite directions. - For example, in the implementation shown, rearward movement of the actuation member 4515 (e.g., caused by a user pushing on the
actuation member 4515 relative to the blade handle 3108) produces rearward movement of theactuation arm 4510 relative to theblade base 3110. Rearward movement of theactuation arm 4510 causes a retracting movement of the first release arms 4520 (as will be described in more detail herein), which moves thefirst stops 4525 to the respective retracted positions. Forward movement of the actuation member 4515 (e.g., caused by a user pulling on theactuation member 4515 relative to the blade handle 3108) produces forward movement of theactuation arm 4510 relative to theblade base 3110. Forward movement of theactuation arm 4510 causes a retracting movement of the second release arms 4530 (as will be described in more detail herein), which moves thesecond stops 4535 to releasing positions. -
FIGS. 103-106 show oneexample blade 3100 positioned relative to anexample chassis 3010 in three positions: a closed position, a first extended position, and a second extended position. Thechassis 3010 includes sidewalls 3011 and endwalls 3012 that define an interior in which one ormore blades 3100 may be installed. One ormore guides 3015 are positioned within thechassis 3010 to receive theblades 3100. Eachguide 3015 enables movement of oneblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. For example, eachguide 3015 may enable forward and rearward sliding movement of oneblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. - In some implementations, the
stops blade 3100 ride over theguide 3015 at which theblade 3100 is received. In one example implementation, thestops respective guide 3015 and an adjacent guide 3015 (e.g., seeFIG. 101 ). In certain implementations, one or bothsidewalls 3011 of thechassis 3010 define alocking opening 3009 through which one of thestops blade 3100 into position relative to thechassis 3010. In the example shown, bothsidewalls 3011 define anopening 3009 for eachblade 3100 to be received at thechassis 3010. - In
FIGS. 101 and 102 , oneexample blade 3100 is located in thechassis 3010 in the closed position. Theexample blade 3100 is mounted in thebottommost guide 3015 of thechassis 3010. Thefront couplers blade 3100 are generally positioned at the open front of thechassis 3010. Retainingfingers 3160 extend forwardly of thefront couplers blade 3100 to enable a user to pull theblade 3100 forwardly relative to thechassis 3010. - When the
blade 3100 is in the closed position, thestops sidewalls 3011 of thechassis 3010 may maintain thestops sidewalls 3011 counteract the biasing force on therelease arms stops second stops sidewalls 3011 and over theguides 3015. - In accordance with some aspects, the
blade 3100 is locked relative to thechassis 3010 when theblade 3100 is in the closed position. In some implementations, theblade 3100 is releasably locked relative to thechassis housing 3010. In other implementations, theblade 3100 is moved out of the closed position only when a locking force is overcome (e.g., by a pulling force on the blade 3100). In still other implementations, theblade 3100 is not locked relative to thechassis 3010 when theblade 3100 is in the closed position. - In certain implementations, one or more detents may be provided at a rear of the chassis 3010 (e.g., see
detents 3017 ofFIG. 91 ). For example, a column of detents may be provided on (e.g., snapped into holes defined in) at least one of thechassis side walls 3011 at the rear of thechassis 3010. Anotch 3105 defined in at least one of eachblade 3100 cooperates with one of the detent to inhibit movement of theblade 3100 out of the closed position until a locking force (e.g., the force required to snap the detent out of the notch) is overcome. In one implementation, only one side of theblade 3100 defines anotch 3105 and detents are provided on only onesidewall 3011 of thechassis 3010. In other implementations, however, the detents may be provided on bothsidewalls 3011 of thechassis 3010 and thenotches 3105 may be provided on both sides of theblade 3100. - In
FIGS. 103 and 104 , theexample blade 3100 is located in the first extended position relative to thechassis 3010. Theblade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along theguides 3015 from the closed position. Thefront couplers 3150 of theblade 3100 are positioned forward of the open front of thechassis 3010. In some implementations, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about three inches. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about two inches. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about four inches. - The first stops 4525 are arranged in locking position, thereby inhibiting movement of the
blade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. For example, thefirst stops 4525 extend through theopenings 3009 in thechassis sidewalls 3011 to inhibit forward or rearward movement of theblade 3100. In some implementations, therelease arms 4520 bias thefirst stops 4525 through theopenings 3009 when thestops 4525 are aligned with theopenings 3009. In such implementations, thestops 4525 automatically lock theblade 3100 into the first extended position when theblade 3100 reaches the first extended position. In other implementations, however, thestops 4525 may be configured to move to the locking positions only when actuated by a user. - To move the
blade 3100 from the first extended position (e.g., to the second extended position, out of the chassis, or back to the closed position), a user manipulates theactuation member 4515 to release the first stops 4525. When thefirst stops 4525 are released, the user may pull or push theblade 3100 to a different position relative to thechassis 3010. For example, manipulating theactuation member 4515 produces movement of theactuation arm 4510, which causes movement of thefirst release arms 4520, which move each of thefirst stops 4525 to a respective release position. In some implementations, the movement of theactuation arm 4510 produces movement only in thefirst release arms 4520 and not in thesecond release arms 4530. In other implementations, the movement of theactuation arm 4510 also moves thesecond release arms 4530. - In
FIGS. 105 and 106 , theexample blade 3100 is located in the second extended position relative to thechassis 3010. Theblade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along theguides 3015 from the first extended position. Thefront couplers blade 3100 are positioned farther forward of the open front of thechassis 3010 as compared to the first extended position. A rear portion of theblade 3100 is still positioned within theguides 3015 or otherwise retained within thechassis 3010. - In some implementations, the
base 3110 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about three inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about two inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about four inches from the first extended position. In some implementations, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about three to nine inches from the closed position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about five inches from the closed position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about seven inches from the closed position. - The second stops 4535 are arranged in locking positions, thereby inhibiting movement of the
blade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. For example, in certain implementations, thesecond stops 4535 extend through theopenings 3009 in thechassis sidewalls 3011 to inhibit forward or rearward movement of theblade 3100. In some implementations, thesecond release arms 4530 bias thesecond stops 4535 through theopenings 3009 when thestops 4535 are aligned with theopenings 3009. In such implementations, thestops 4535 automatically lock theblade 3100 into the second extended position when theblade 3100 reaches the second extended position. In other implementations, however, thesecond stops 4535 may be configured to move to the locking position only when actuated by a user. - To move the
blade 3100 from the second extended position (e.g., out of the chassis or back to the closed or first extended positions), a user manipulates theactuation member 4515 to release the second stops 4535. For example, manipulating theactuation member 4515 produces movement of theactuation arm 4510, which causes movement of thesecond release arms 4530, which move each of thesecond stops 4535 to a respective release position. In some implementations, the movement of theactuation arm 4510 produces movement only in thesecond release arms 4530 and not in thefirst release arms 4520. In other implementations, the movement of theactuation arm 4510 also moves thefirst release arms 4520. -
FIGS. 107-110 show example implementations of some of the components of thelatching system 4500.FIGS. 111-113 illustrate how these components are assembled on anexample blade 3100. In some implementations, the components of thelatching arrangement 4500 are positioned over thebase 3110 of theblade 3100 beneath one or more of the blade components. For example, as shown inFIG. 100 , at least a portion of thelatching arrangement 4500 may be coupled to theblade base 3110 beneath the processor 4140. At least a portion of thelatching arrangement 4500 also may be coupled to theblade base 3110 beneath thecircuit board arrangement 3120. One or more cables may be routed over the latchingarrangement 4300 from the rear of theblade 3100 to be plugged into rear ports of thecoupler arrangement 3150 at the front of theblade 3100. In accordance with certain aspects, operation of thelatching arrangement 4500 does not interfere with the blade components. -
FIG. 107 shows one example implementation of anactuation arm 4510 including afirst section 4511 extending from abase section 4512. Thefirst section 4511 may extend from a central portion of thebase section 4512. Second andthird sections base section 4512. In some implementations, the second andthird sections first section 4511. In certain implementations, the second andthird sections first section 4511. - The
first section 4511 defines theactuation member 4515. For example, in some implementations, thefirst section 4511 may define ahandle 4516 or other grip portion at a distal end thereof. In one implementation, thehandle 4516 is formed as a bent, rolled, or folded portion of thefirst section 4511. In other implementations, ahandle 4516 may be molded, fastened, or otherwise connected to thefirst section 4511. In other implementations, the distal end of thefirst section 4511 may be flat. - In certain implementations, the
first section 4511 also defines at least oneopening 4517 through which a fastener may extend to secure theactuation arm 4510 to theblade base 3110. As shown inFIG. 111 , theblade base 3110 may define receivingmembers 4541 at which the fastener may be secured. Theopening 4517 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable movement of theactuation arm 4510 relative to the fastener and receivingmember 4541. For example, theopening 4517 may define a generally oblong shape through which the fastener may move relative to theactuation arm 4510. In the example shown inFIG. 107 , thefirst section 4511 defines twoopenings 4517 aligned in the direction of movement of theactuation arm 4510. In other implementations, greater orfewer openings 4517 may be defined in thefirst section 4511. - Each of the second and
third sections release arms latching arrangement 4500. In some implementations, each of the second andthird sections first release arms 4520 and one of thesecond release arms 4530. For example, in certain implementations, each of the second andthird sections first opening 4518 and asecond opening 4519 spaced from thefirst opening 4518. Each of theopenings respective release arm - In accordance with some aspects, each of the
openings third sections first opening 4518 defines the camming surface and an opposite end of eachsecond opening 4519 defines the camming surface. In the example shown inFIG. 107 , thefirst openings 4518 define camming surfaces at forward ends of thefirst openings 4518 and thesecond openings 4519 define camming surfaces at rearward ends of thesecond openings 4519. In some implementations, the camming surfaces taper inwardly. In other implementations, the camming surfaces taper outwardly. -
FIG. 108 shows one example implementation of afirst release arm 4520 including afirst stop 4525 defined at one end of abody 4521. In certain implementations, thebody 4521 extends generally linearly. In other implementations, however, thebody 4521 may have any other suitable shape (e.g., L-shaped, J-shaped, C-shaped, V-shaped, U-shaped, etc.). In the example shown, thefirst stop 4525 is generally cube or cuboid shaped. In other implementations, thefirst stop 4525 may be flat, angled, curved, or may have any other suitable shape. - The
body 4521 of thefirst release arm 4520 is configured to interact with theactuation arm 4510. For example, thebody 4521 may define a lug 4522 (FIG. 113 ) or other follower at a different end of thefirst release arm 4520 from thestop 4525. In one implementation, thebody 4521 may define alug 4522 at an opposite end of thefirst release arm 4521 from thestop 4525. In certain implementations, thelug 4522 extends downwardly from asection 4523 of thefirst release arm 4520 having a reduced thickness (seeFIG. 108 ). - Each
first release arm 4520 is coupled to theblade 3100 so as to be moveable relative to theblade base 3110. In some implementations, thefirst release arm 4520 defines at least oneopening 4524 through which afastener 4543 may extend to couple thefirst release arm 4520 to theblade 3100. In the example shown, eachfastener 4543 extends into a respective receiving structure 4542 (FIG. 111 ) defined on theblade base 3100. In other implementations, however, thefasteners 4543 may otherwise couple thefirst release arms 4520 to theblade 3100. - The
opening 4524 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable thefastener 4543 to move within theopening 4524 when thefirst release arm 4520 is moved relative to theblade 3100. In the example shown, eachfirst release arm 4520 defines two spacedopenings 4524 within whichrespective fasteners 4543 may travel. In other implementations, eachfirst release arm 4520 may define a greater number ofopenings 4524. - In some implementations, each
first release arm 4520 includes aspring 4526 that biases thefirst release arm 4520 toward a locking position. In certain implementations, thesprings 4526 are mounted at theopenings 4524 of eachfirst release arm 4520. One end of eachspring 4526 seats on a mount 4527 (FIG. 113 ) at one end of theopening 4524 and the other end of eachspring 4526 abuts against thefastener 4543 holding thefirst release arm 4520 to theblade 3100. Thespring 4526 pushes thefirst release arm 4520 away from thefastener 4543 to move thestop 4525 toward a locking position. To release thestop 4525, thefirst release arm 4520 is moved counter to the bias of thespring 4526 to compress thespring 4526 toward thefastener 4543. -
FIGS. 109 and 110 show example implementations ofsecond release arms 4530. The second release arm shown inFIG. 109 is flipped 180° from the second release arm shown inFIG. 113 . Eachsecond release arm 4530 includes asecond stop 4535 defined at one end of anarm body 4531. In certain implementations, thebody 4531 extends generally in an L-shape. In other implementations, however, thebody 4521 may have any other suitable shape (e.g., linear, J-shaped, C-shaped, V-shaped, U-shaped, etc.). In the example shown, thesecond stop 4535 is generally cube or cuboid shaped. In other implementations, thesecond stop 4535 may be flat, angled, curved, or may have any other suitable shape. - The
body 4531 of thesecond release arm 4530 is configured to interact with theactuation arm 4510. For example, thebody 4531 may define a lug 4532 (FIG. 113 ) or other follower at a different end of thesecond release arm 4530 from thestop 4535. In one implementation, thebody 4531 may define alug 4532 at an opposite end of thesecond release arm 4531 from thestop 4535. In certain implementations, thelug 4532 extends downwardly from asection 4533 of thesecond release arm 4530 having a reduced thickness (seeFIGS. 109 and 110 ). - Each
second release arm 4530 is coupled to theblade 3100 so as to be moveable relative to theblade base 3110. In some implementations, thesecond release arm 4530 defines at least oneopening 4534 through which afastener 4543 may extend to couple thesecond release arm 4530 to theblade 3100. In the example shown, eachfastener 4543 extends into a respective receiving structure 4542 (FIG. 111 ) defined on theblade base 3100. In other implementations, however, thefasteners 4543 may otherwise couple thesecond release arms 4530 to theblade 3100. - The
opening 4534 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable thefastener 4543 to move within theopening 4534 when thesecond release arm 4530 is moved relative to theblade 3100. In the example shown, eachsecond release arm 4530 defines two spacedopenings 4534 within whichrespective fasteners 4543 may travel. In other implementations, eachsecond release arm 4530 may define a greater number ofopenings 4534. - In some implementations, each
second release arm 4530 includes a spring 4536 (FIG. 113 ) that biases thesecond release arm 4530 toward a locking position. In certain implementations, thesprings 4536 are mounted at theopenings 4534 of eachsecond release arm 4530. One end of eachspring 4536 seats on a mount 4537 (FIG. 113 ) at one end of theopening 4534 and the other end of eachspring 4536 abuts against thefastener 4543 holding thesecond release arm 4530 to theblade 3100. Thespring 4536 pushes thesecond release arm 4530 away from thefastener 4543 to move thestop 4535 toward a locking position. To release thestop 4535, thesecond release arm 4530 is moved counter to the bias of thespring 4536 to compress thespring 4536 toward thefastener 4543. - As noted above, when a
blade 3100 is located in achassis 3010 in a closed position, the first andsecond stops latching arrangement 4500 are biased to abut thesidewalls 3011 of the chassis 3010 (e.g., seeFIGS. 101 and 102 ). A user moves theblade 3100 from the closed position to a first extended position by pulling on thehandle 3108 of theblade 3100. Thestops sidewalls 3011 as theblade 3100 is moved along theguides 3015 of thechassis 3010. - When the
blade 3100 reaches the first extended position, thesprings 4526 bias thestops 4525 of thefirst release arms 4520 into theopenings 3009 of the chassis 3010 (seeFIGS. 103 and 104 ). The spring-biasedstops 4525 inhibit forward and rearward movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. Thesidewalls 3011 of thechassis 3010 maintain thesecond stops 4535 in unlocked positions (seeFIGS. 103 and 104 ). To move theblade 3100 from the first extended position, a user releases (e.g., retracts) thefirst stops 4525 and applies a force to (e.g., pulls or pushes on) thehandle 3108 of theblade 3100. - In accordance with certain implementations, a user releases the
first stops 4525 by pushing rearwardly on theactuation member 4515 relative to thehandle 3108. In certain implementations, the user pushes on theactuation member 4515 and pulls/pushes on thehandle 3108 using the same hand. Indeed, in certain implementations, the user pulls/pushes on thehandle 3108 while pushing on theactuation member 4515 using the same hand. - Pushing on the
actuation member 4515 moves theactuation arm 4510 rearwardly relative to theblade 3100, which moves the first andsecond openings release arms openings lug 4522 of eachfirst release arm 4520 to cam inwardly along a camming surface of the respective first opening 4518 (seeFIG. 113 ). Camming thelugs 4522 inwardly causes thefirst release arms 4520 to move inwardly, thereby retracting thefirst stops 4525 from theopenings 3009 of thechassis 3010. In certain implementations, thesecond openings 4519 of theactuation arm 4510 are sized and shaped so that the rearwardly movement of thesecond openings 4519 does not affect thelugs 4532 of the second release arms 4530 (seeFIG. 113 ). - When the
blade 3100 reaches the second extended position, thesprings 4536 bias thestops 4535 of thesecond release arms 4530 into theopenings 3009 of the chassis 3010 (seeFIGS. 105 and 106 ). The spring-biased second stops 4535 inhibit forward and rearward movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010 until thesecond stops 4535 are released from theopenings 3009. Thefirst release arms 4520 are located outside of thechassis 3010 when theblade 3100 is in the second extended position. Accordingly, thechassis sidewalls 3011 do not inhibit thesprings 4526 of thefirst release arms 4520 from biasing the first release arms to the locking position (e.g., seeFIGS. 105 and 109 ). However, thefirst stops 4525 do not engage thechassis 3010 and, accordingly, do not inhibit movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. - To move the
blade 3100 from the second extended position (e.g., out of the chassis or to the first extended position), a user releases (e.g., retracts) thesecond stops 4535 and pulls/pushes on thehandle 3108 of theblade 3100. In accordance with certain implementations, a user releases thesecond stops 4535 by pulling on theactuation member 4515 relative to the handle 4108. In certain implementations, the user pulls on theactuation member 4515 and pulls on thehandle 3108 using the same hand. Indeed, in certain implementations, the user pulls on thehandle 3108 while pulling on theactuation member 4515 using the same hand. Pulling on theactuation member 4515 moves theactuation arm 4510 forwardly relative to theblade 3100, which moves the first andsecond openings release arms - Moving the
actuation arm 4510 forwardly causes thelug 4532 of eachsecond release arm 4530 to cam inwardly along a camming surface of the respective second opening 4519 (seeFIG. 113 ). Camming thelugs 4532 inwardly causes thesecond release arms 4530 to move inwardly, thereby retracting thesecond stops 4535 from theopenings 3009 of thechassis 3010. Thefirst openings 4518 of theactuation arm 4510 are sized and shaped so that forward movement of thefirst openings 4518 does not affect thelugs 4522 of the first release arms 4520 (seeFIG. 113 ). -
FIGS. 114-117 show anotherexample latching arrangement 4600 that is configured to secure ablade 3100 in one position relative to a chassis 3010 (e.g., seeFIGS. 114-116 ). For example, in one implementation, thelatching arrangement 4600 may secure theblade 3100 only in the first extended position (seeFIG. 115 ). In such an implementation, thelatching arrangement 4600 does not secure theblade 3100 in a closed position or a second extended position. In another example implementation, thelatching arrangement 4600 may secure theblade 3100 only in the second extended position (seeFIG. 116 ). In yet another example implementation, thelatching arrangement 4600 may secure theblade 3100 only in the closed position (seeFIG. 114 ). - The
latching arrangement 4600 includes anactuation member 4615 and a set of releasable stops 4625. Theactuation member 4615 is configured to move relative to theblade 3100 to actuate thestops 4625. In certain implementations, theactuation member 4615 is configured to move forward and/or rearward relative to theblade 3100 when actuated. Movement of theactuation member 4615 moves anactuation arm 4610, resulting in movement of one or more ofrelease arms 4620, which results in movement of the respective stops 4625. -
FIGS. 114-116 show oneexample blade 3100 positioned relative to anexample chassis 3010 in three positions: a closed position, a first extended position, and a second extended position. As disclosed above, thechassis 3010 includes sidewalls 3011 and endwalls 3012 that define an interior in which one ormore blades 3100 may be installed. One ormore guides 3015 are positioned within thechassis 3010 to receive theblades 3100. In the example shown inFIG. 117 , theblade 3100 is mounted in thebottommost guide 3015 of thechassis 3010. Eachguide 3015 enables movement of oneblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. For example, eachguide 3015 may enable forward and rearward sliding movement of oneblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. In some implementations, the one ormore stops 4625 of ablade 3100 ride over theguide 3015 at which theblade 3100 is received. In one example implementation, thestops 4625 ride between therespective guide 3015 and anadjacent guide 3015. - In certain implementations, one or both
sidewalls 3011 of thechassis 3010 define alocking opening 3009 through which one of thestops 4625 may extend to releasably lock theblade 3100 into position relative to thechassis 3010. In the example shown, bothsidewalls 3011 define anopening 3009 for eachblade 3100 to be received at thechassis 3010. In certain implementations, theopenings 3009 are located at a front of thechassis sidewalls 3011. In other implementations, theopenings 3009 are located at a central region of thechassis sidewalls 3010. In still other implementations, theopenings 3009 are located at a rear of thechassis sidewalls 3011. In still other implementations, thesidewalls 3011 may define openings at front, central, and/or rear locations. - In
FIG. 114 , oneexample blade 3100 with thesecond latching arrangement 4600 is located in thechassis 3010 in the closed position. The front ports of thecoupler arrangement 3150 of theblade 3100 are generally positioned at the open front of thechassis 3010. Retaining fingers extend forwardly of the front ports. The blade handle 3108 also extends forwardly from the front of theblade 3100 to enable a user to pull theblade 3100 forwardly relative to thechassis 3010. Thesidewalls 3011 of thechassis 3010 maintain thestops 4625 in releasing positions by counteracting the biasing force on therelease arms 4620. Accordingly, thestops 4625 are configured to slide against thesidewalls 3011 and over theguides 3015. - In
FIG. 115 , theexample blade 3100 is located in the first extended position relative to thechassis 3010. Theblade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along theguides 3015 from the closed position. In some implementations, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about three inches. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about two inches. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about four inches. Thestops 4625 are arranged in locking position, thereby inhibiting movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. For example, thestops 4625 extend through theopenings 3009 at the front of thechassis sidewalls 3011 to inhibit forward or rearward movement of theblade 3100. The front ports of theblade 3100 are positioned forward of the open front of thechassis 3010. - In
FIG. 116 , theexample blade 3100 is located in the second extended position relative to thechassis 3010. Theblade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along theguides 3015 from the first extended position. Thefront couplers 4150 of theblade 3100 are positioned farther forward of the open front of thechassis 3010 as compared to the first extended position. A rear portion of theblade 3100 is still positioned within theguides 3015 or otherwise retained within thechassis 3010. - In some implementations, the
blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about three inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about two inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about four inches from the first extended position. In some implementations, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about three to nine inches from the closed position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about five inches from the closed position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about seven inches from the closed position. - A user moves the
blade 3100 between the positions using ablade handle 3108. For example, a user may push or pull on a forwardly extendingblade handle 3108. In some implementations, theblade handle 3108 extends forwardly of theblade 3100 from a central portion at the front of theblade 3100. In other implementations, theblade handle 3108 may extend forwardly of theblade 3100 from a side portion at the front of theblade 3100. In other implementations, theblade handle 3108 may extend from a side or rear of theblade 3100. In still other implementations, the two or more blade handles 4108 may extend from theblade 3100. - To move the
blade 3100 from a latched position (e.g., from the first extended position shown inFIG. 115 ), a user manipulates theactuation member 4615 of thelatching arrangement 4600 to release thestops 4625. When thestops 4625 are released, the user may pull or push theblade handle 3108 to move theblade 3100 to a different position relative to thechassis 3010. In some implementations, theactuation member 4615 defines a handle or other grip portion for the user. In certain implementations, the handle is formed as a bent, rolled, or folded portion of theactuation member 4615. In other implementations, a handle may be molded, fastened, or otherwise connected to theactuation member 4615. In still other implementations, the distal end of theactuation member 4615 may be flat. - In accordance with other aspects, the
handle 3108 andactuation member 4615 are configured to be manipulated using one hand. In accordance with some aspects, thehandle 3108 and theactuation member 4615 are configured to be manipulated concurrently by a user. For example, in some implementations, theactuation member 4615 extends forwardly of theblade 3100. In certain implementations, theactuation member 4615 extends over at least a portion of ablade handle 3108. Indeed, in certain implementations, theactuation member 4615 is configured to move along thehandle 3108 when actuated. - In some implementations, a user releases the
stops 4625 by pushing rearwardly on theactuation member 4615 relative to thehandle 3108. In other implementations, a user releases thestops 4625 by pushing forwardly on theactuation member 4615 relative to thehandle 3108. For example, in certain implementations, the user pulls/pushes on thehandle 3108 while pushing/pulling on theactuation member 4615 using the same hand. In still other implementations, the user releases thestops 4625 by otherwise manipulating theactuation member 4615. - As noted above, moving the
actuation member 4615 produces movement of theactuation arm 4610. Eachrelease arm 4620 is operably coupled to theactuation arm 4610. Each of therelease arms 4620 is configured to move therespective stop 4625 between a respective locking position and a respective releasing position when operated by theactuation arm 4610. When in the locking positions, eachstop 4625 engages anopening 3009 defined in thechassis 3010 to inhibit movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. When in the releasing position, thestop 4625 is moved out of engagement with theopenings 3009 to allow movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 3010. - Each
release arm 4620 is coupled to theblade 3100 so as to be moveable relative to theblade base 3110. In some implementations, eachrelease arm 4620 defines at least oneopening 4624 through which a fastener 4643 (FIG. 115 ) may extend to couple therelease arm 4620 to theblade 3100. In the example shown, eachfastener 4643 extends into a respective receiving structure defined on theblade base 3100. In other implementations, however, thefasteners 4643 may otherwise couple therelease arms 4620 to theblade 3100. Eachopening 4624 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable thefastener 4643 to move within theopening 4624 when therelease arm 4620 is moved relative to theblade 3100. - In certain implementations, each
stop 4625 of thelatching arrangement 4600 is normally biased toward a locking position relative to thechassis 3010. In such implementations, thestops 4625 automatically latch theblade 3100 into position when theblade 3100 is located relative to thechassis 3010 to align thestops 4625 and thechassis openings 3009. In some implementations, eachrelease arm 4620 includes aspring 4626 that biases thestop 4625 toward a locking position. In certain implementations, thesprings 4626 are mounted at theopenings 4624 of eachrelease arm 4620. One end of eachspring 4626 seats on a mount 4627 (FIG. 114 ) at one end of theopening 4624 and the other end of eachspring 4626 abuts against thefastener 4643 holding therelease arm 4620 to theblade 3100. Thespring 4626 pushes therelease arm 4620 away from thefastener 4643 to move thestop 4625 toward a locking position. In other implementations, however, thestops 4625 may be configured to move to the locking positions only when actuated by a user. - In some implementations, one or
more release arms 4620 and stops 4625 are substantially the same as thefirst release arms 4520 andfirst stops 4525 disclosed herein. In other implementations, one ormore release arms 4620 and stops 4625 are substantially the same as thesecond release arms 4530 andsecond stops 4535 disclosed herein. In still other implementations, thearms 4620 and stops 4625 have a different configuration from therelease arms - In some implementations, the
stops 4625 are located at a generally central region of theblade base 3110 between the front and rear of the blade 3100 (seeFIG. 114 ). In other implementations, thestops 4625 may be located at the rear of the blade base 3110 (e.g., see thesecond stops 4535 ofFIG. 99 ), at the front of theblade base 3110, or at any other suitable location on theblade 3100. - In the example shown, the
latching arrangement 4600 includes tworelease arms 4620. In other implementations, thelatching arrangement 4600 may define greater orfewer release arms 4620. Eachrelease arm 4620 defines two spacedopenings 4624 within whichrespective fasteners 4643 may travel. In other implementations, eachrelease arm 4620 may define a greater number ofopenings 4624. - To release the
stop 4625, therelease arm 4620 is moved counter to the bias of therelease arms 4620. Therelease arm 4620 is configured to engage and be operated by theactuation arm 4610. For example, therelease arm 4620 may define a lug or other follower at a different end of therelease arm 4620 from thestop 4625. In one implementation, therelease arm 4620 may define a lug at an opposite end of therelease arm 4620 from thestop 4625. In certain implementations, the lug extends downwardly from a section of therelease arm 4620 having a reduced thickness (seeFIG. 117 ). The lug extends through an opening defined in theactuation arm 4610. - For example, the
actuation arm 4610 may include one or more sections that are each configured to interact with the lug of arelease arm 4620. In certain implementations, each of the actuation arm sections defines at least one opening configured to receive a lug or other follower of therespective release arm 4620. In accordance with some aspects, each of the openings defines a camming surface. In the example shown inFIGS. 114-116 , the actuation arm sections define camming surfaces at forward ends of the openings. In other implementations, however, the actuation arm sections define camming surfaces at rearward ends of the second openings. In some implementations, the camming surfaces taper inwardly. In other implementations, the camming surfaces taper outwardly. - In certain implementations, the
actuation arm 4610 also is movably fastened to theblade 3100. For example, one or more fastener may extend through one or more openings defined in theactuation arm 4610 to secure theactuation arm 4610 to theblade base 3110. For example, theblade base 3110 may define receiving members at which thefastener 4643 may be secured. The opening is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable movement of theactuation arm 4610 relative to the fastener and receiving member. For example, the opening may define a generally oblong shape through which thefastener 4643 may move relative to theactuation arm 4610. - A user moves the
actuation arms 4620 to selectively release thestops 4625 from the respective locking positions. In the example shown inFIGS. 114-117 , pushing on theactuation member 4615 moves theactuation arm 4610 rearwardly relative to theblade 3100, which moves openings defined in theactuation arm 4610 rearwardly relative to therelease arms 4620. Moving the openings rearwardly causes the lug of eachrelease arm 4620 to cam inwardly along a camming surface of the respective opening. Camming the lugs inwardly causes therelease arms 4620 to move away from therespective sidewall 3011, thereby retracting thestops 4625 from theopenings 3009 of thechassis 3010. - In accordance with some aspects, the
blade 3100 may be locked relative to thechassis 3010 when theblade 3100 is in the closed position without using thelatching arrangement 4600. In some implementations, theblade 3100 is moved out of the closed position only when a locking force is overcome. For example, in certain implementations, one or more detents may be provided at a rear of thechassis 3010. Anotch 3105 defined in at least one of eachblade 3100 cooperates with one of the detent to inhibit movement of theblade 3100 out of the closed position until a locking force (e.g., the force required to snap the detent out of the notch) is overcome. -
FIGS. 118-127 show another example bladedchassis system 5000 including anexample chassis 5010 that is configured to receive one ormore blades 3100. Thechassis 5010 includes sidewalls 5011 and endwalls 5012 that define an interior in which one ormore blades 3100 may be installed. One ormore guides 5015 are positioned within thechassis 5010 to receive theblades 3100. Eachguide 5015 enables movement of oneblade 3100 relative to thechassis 5010. For example, eachguide 5015 may enable forward and rearward sliding movement of oneblade 3100 relative to thechassis 5010. - In certain implementations, one or both
sidewalls 5011 of thechassis 5010 each define at least onelocking opening 5009. In the example shown, eachsidewall 5011 defines afront opening 5009A, anintermediate opening 5009B, and arear opening 5009C for eachblade 3100 to be received at thechassis 5010. Thefront openings 5009A are located at the front of thechassis sidewalls 5011, theintermediate openings 5009B are located at middle portions of thechassis sidewalls 5011, and therear openings 5009C are located at the rear of thechassis sidewalls 5011. In other implementations, eachsidewall 5011 may define greater orfewer openings 5009. - In accordance with some aspects, each
blade 3100 includes anexample latching arrangement 5500 configured to secure theblade 3100 in one or more positions relative to achassis 5010. For example, theexample latching arrangement 5500 may secure the blade in a closed position, a first extended position, and/or a second extended position relative to the chassis 5010 (e.g., seeFIGS. 120-122 ). Thelatching arrangement 5500 includes anactuation member 5515 and a set ofreleasable stops 5525 that selectively extend through theopenings 5009 of thechassis 5010 to releasably lock theblade 3100 into position relative to thechassis 5010. - Each of the
stops 5525 is configured to move between a respective locking position and a respective releasing position. When in the locking positions, eachstop 5525 engages one of theopenings 5009 defined in thechassis 5010 to inhibit movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 5010. When in the releasing positions, thestops 5525 are moved out of engagement with theopenings 5009 to enable movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 5010. When theblade 3100 moves relative to thechassis 5010, thestops 5525 of ablade 3100 ride over theguide 5015 at which theblade 3100 is received. In one example implementation, thestops 5525 ride between therespective guide 5015 and an adjacent guide 5015 (e.g., seeFIG. 120 ). - In certain implementations, each
stop 5525 is normally biased toward a locking position relative to thechassis 5010. A user manipulates theactuation member 5515 to selectively release thestops 5525 from the respective locking positions. In the example shown inFIG. 118 , moving theactuation member 5515 rearwardly relative to theblade 3100 retracts thestops 5525 inwardly relative to theblade 3100. In other implementations, however, thelatching arrangement 5500 is configured so that forward movement of theactuation member 5515 retracts thestops 5525. In still other implementations, thelatching arrangement 5500 is configured so that another type of movement (e.g., vertical, sideways, diagonal, rotational, etc.) of theactuation member 5515 retracts thestops 5525. -
FIGS. 120-122 show oneexample blade 3100 positioned relative to anexample chassis 5010 in three positions: a closed position, a first extended position, and a second extended position. A user moves theblade 3100 between the positions using ablade handle 3108. For example, a user may push or pull on a forwardly extendingblade handle 3108. In some implementations, theblade handle 3108 extends forwardly of theblade 3100 from a central portion at the front of theblade 3100. In other implementations, theblade handle 3108 may extend forwardly of theblade 3100 from a side portion at the front of theblade 3100. In other implementations, theblade handle 3108 may extend from a side or rear of theblade 3100. In still other implementations, the two or more blade handles 3108 may extend from theblade 3100. - In
FIG. 120 , oneexample blade 3100 with thesecond latching arrangement 5500 is located in thechassis 5010 in the closed position. In the example shown, theblade 3100 is mounted in thebottommost guide 5015 of thechassis 5010. The front ports of thecoupler arrangement 3150 of theblade 3100 are generally positioned at the open front of thechassis 5010. Retainingfingers 3160 extend forwardly of the front ports. The blade handle 3108 also extends forwardly from the front of theblade 3100 to enable a user to pull theblade 3100 forwardly relative to thechassis 5010. Thestops 5525 extend through therear openings 5009C in thechassis sidewalls 5011, thereby inhibiting movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 5010. - In
FIG. 121 , theexample blade 3100 is located in the first extended position relative to thechassis 5010. Theblade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along theguides 5015 from the closed position. The front ports of theblade 3100 are positioned forward of the open front of thechassis 5010. Thestops 5525 extend through theintermediate openings 5009B in thechassis sidewalls 5011, thereby inhibiting movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 5010. In some implementations, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about three inches. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about two inches. In one implementation, thebase 3110 has been moved forwardly about four inches. - In
FIG. 122 , theexample blade 3100 is located in the second extended position relative to thechassis 5010. Theblade base 3110 has been moved (e.g., slid) forwardly along theguides 5015 from the first extended position. The front ports of theblade 3100 are positioned farther forward of the open front of thechassis 5010 as compared to the first extended position. A rear portion of theblade 3100 is still positioned within theguides 5015 or otherwise retained within thechassis 5010. Thestops 5525 extend through thefront openings 5009A in thechassis sidewalls 5011, thereby inhibiting movement of theblade 3100 relative to thechassis 5010. - In some implementations, the
blade 3100 has been moved forwardly about one to six inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about three inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about two inches from the first extended position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about four inches from the first extended position. In some implementations, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about three to nine inches from the closed position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about six inches from the closed position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about five inches from the closed position. In one implementation, theblade 3100 has been moved forwardly about seven inches from the closed position. - To move the
blade 3100 from a latched position (e.g., from the first extended position shown inFIG. 121 or from the second extended position shown inFIG. 122 ), a user manipulates theactuation member 5515 of thelatching arrangement 5500 to release thestops 5525. When thestops 5525 are released, the user may pull or push theblade handle 3108 to move theblade 3100 to a different position relative to thechassis 5010. In some implementations, theactuation member 5515 defines a handle or other grip portion for the user. In certain implementations, the handle is formed as a bent, rolled, or folded portion of theactuation member 5515. In other implementations, a handle may be molded, fastened, or otherwise connected to theactuation member 5515. In still other implementations, the distal end of theactuation member 5515 may be flat. - In accordance with other aspects, the handle 5508 and
actuation member 5515 are configured to be manipulated using one hand. In accordance with some aspects, thehandle 3108 and theactuation member 5515 are configured to be manipulated concurrently by a user. For example, in some implementations, theactuation member 5515 extends forwardly of theblade 3100. In certain implementations, theactuation member 5515 extends over at least a portion of ablade handle 3108. Indeed, in certain implementations, theactuation member 5515 is configured to move along thehandle 3108 when actuated. -
FIGS. 123-125 show example implementations of some of the components of thelatching system 5500. Thelatching system 5500 includes anactuation arm 5510, at least onerelease arm 5520, and at least oneswing arm 5570 operably connecting theactuation arm 5510 to therelease arm 5520. Theswing arm 5570 operates so that forward and/or rearward movement of theactuation arm 5510 results in a retracting motion of therelease arms 5520. In the example shown, thelatching system 5500 includes tworelease arms 5520 and twoswing arms 5570. In other implementations, however, thelatching system 5500 may include a greater or fewer number ofrelease arms 5520 and swingarms 5570. - The
actuation arm 5510 is configured to move forwardly and/or rearwardly relative to theblade 3100. Therelease arms 5520 are configured to move relative to theblade 3100 to extend and retract thestops 5525. Theswing arms 5570 are configured to rotate at least partially relative to theblade 3100. In accordance with some aspects, forward and/or rearward movement of theactuation arm 5510 causes theswing arms 5570 to rotate, which causes the extension and retraction of the stops 5525 (seeFIG. 118 ). In certain implementations, theactuation arm 5510 and therelease arms 5520 slidably move along thebase 3110 of theblade 3100. -
FIGS. 126-127 illustrate how these components are assembled on anexample blade 3100. In some implementations, the components of thelatching arrangement 5500 are positioned over thebase 3110 of theblade 3100 beneath one or more of the blade components. For example, as shown inFIG. 118 , at least a portion of thelatching arrangement 5500 may be coupled to theblade base 3110 beneath theprocessor 3140. At least a portion of thelatching arrangement 5500 also may be coupled to theblade base 3110 beneath thecircuit board arrangement 3120. One or more cables may be routed over the latchingarrangement 5500 from the rear of theblade 3100 to be plugged into rear ports of thecoupler arrangement 3150 at the front of theblade 3100. In accordance with certain aspects, operation of thelatching arrangement 5500 does not interfere with the blade components. -
FIG. 123 shows one example implementation of anactuation arm 5510 including abody 5511 defining theactuation member 5515 extending in a first direction and at least oneprong 5513 extending in a second direction. In some implementations, thebody 5511 of theactuation arm 5510 also includes asecond prong 5514. In certain implementations, thesecond prong 5514 extends in a different direction from thefirst prong 5513. In certain implementations, eachprong actuation member 5515. For example, in one implementation, thebody 5511 defines a Y-shape. - In some implementations, the
actuation member 5515 defines ahandle 5516 or other grip portion at a distal end thereof. In one implementation, thehandle 5516 is formed as a bent, rolled, or folded portion at the distal end of theactuation member 5515. In other implementations, ahandle 5516 may be molded, fastened, or otherwise connected to the distal end of theactuation member 5515. In other implementations, the distal end of the actuation member may be flat. - In certain implementations, the
body 5511 of theactuation arm 5510 also defines at least oneopening 5512 through which a fastener may extend to secure theactuation arm 5510 to theblade base 3110. As shown inFIG. 126 , theblade base 3110 may define one ormore receiving members 5541 at which the fastener may be secured. Theopening 5512 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable movement of theactuation arm 5510 relative to the fastener and receivingmember 5541. For example, theopening 5512 may define a generally oblong shape through which the fastener may move relative to theactuation arm 5510. In the example shown inFIG. 123 , thebody 5511 defines twoopenings 5512 aligned in the direction of movement of theactuation arm 5510. In other implementations, greater orfewer openings 5512 may be defined in thebody 5511. - Each of the
prongs release arms 5520 of thelatching arrangement 5500. For example, in certain implementations, each of theprongs lug 5516 or other guide member extending upwardly from thebody 5511. Thelugs 5516 are configured to interact with theswing arms 5570, which are configured to interact with therelease arms 5520 as will be described in more detail herein. In certain implementations, eachprong lug 5516 located ata distal end of theprong lug 5516 includes a hollow cylinder. In other implementations, thelug 5516 may include a solid bump or other protrusion. -
FIG. 124 shows one example implementation of arelease arm 5520 including astop 5525 defined at one end of abody 5521. In certain implementations, thebody 5521 extends generally linearly. In other implementations, however, thebody 5521 may have any other suitable shape (e.g., L-shaped, J-shaped, C-shaped, V-shaped, U-shaped, etc.). In the example shown, therelease arm body 5521 includes a generallylinear extension section 5527, a raisedsection 5523 at one end of theextension section 5527, and anangled section 5526 at another end of theextension section 5527. - Each
release arm 5520 is coupled to theblade 3100 so as to be moveable relative to theblade base 3110. In some implementations, theextension section 5527 of therelease arm 5520 defines at least oneopening 5524 through which a fastener 5543 (FIG. 126 ) may extend to couple therelease arm 5520 to theblade 3100. In the example shown, eachfastener 5543 extends into a respective receiving structure 5542 (FIG. 126 ) defined on theblade base 3110. In other implementations, however, thefasteners 5543 may otherwise couple therelease arms 5520 to theblade 3100. Theopening 5524 is sufficiently sized and shaped to enable thefastener 5543 to move within theopening 5524 when therelease arm 5520 is moved relative to theblade 3100. In the example shown, eachfirst release arm 5520 defines oneopening 5524 within which afastener 5543 may travel. In other implementations, eachrelease arm 5520 may define two ormore openings 5524. - Each
stop 5525 is located at theangled section 5526 of one of therelease arms 5520. In some implementations, thestop 5525 is integral with theangled section 5526. In other implementations, thestop 5525 is fastened to theangled section 5526. In one implementation, thefirst stop 5525 is generally cube or cuboid shaped. In the example shown, thecuboid stop 5525 is oriented so that two surfaces of thestop 5525 aligned with thechassis openings 5009 and two surfaces aligned with the front and rear of thechassis 5010. In other implementations, thestops 5525 may be flat, angled, curved, or may have any other suitable shape. - The raised
section 5523 of therelease arm 5520 is configured to rotatably connect to a respective one of theswing arms 5570. For example, in certain implementations, the raisedsection 5523 defines anopening 5522 at which therelease arm 5520 connects to theswing arm 5570. In some implementations, the raisedsection 5523 has the same thickness as theextension section 5527. In other implementations, the raisedsection 5523 has a reduced thickness as compared to theextension section 5527. -
FIG. 125 shows one example implementation of aswing arm 5570 that is configured to operably couple together arelease arm 5520 to theactuation arm 5510. In accordance with some aspects, theswing arms 5570 translate movement of theactuation member 5515 in one direction into movement of thestops 5525 in a different direction. For example, theswing arms 5570 may translate rearward motion of theactuation member 5515 relative to theblade 3100 into a retracting motion of thestops 5525 relative to thechassis sidewalls 5011. Theswing arm 5570 includes amounting section 5571 by which theswing arm 5570 may be rotatably connected to theblade 3100. For example, the mountingsection 5571 may define a mountingopening 5572 through which a fastener may extend to connect theswing arm 5570 to theblade 3100. Theswing arm 5570 is configured to be selectively rotated at least partially relative to theblade 3100. - One end of the
swing arm 5570 includes afirst connection section 5573 at which theswing arm 5570 may be coupled to theactuation arm 5510. For example, in certain implementations, thefirst connection section 5573 defines anopening 5574 through which thelug 5516 of theactuation arm 5510 may extend to rotatably couple theswing arm 5570 to theactuation arm 5510. Another end of theswing arm 5570 includes asecond connection section 5575 at which theswing arm 5570 may be coupled to therelease arm 5520. For example, in certain implementations, thesecond connection section 5575 includes one ormore lugs 5576 that are configured to extend through theopening 5522 defined in therelease arm 5520. - In some implementations, each
swing arm 5570 is biased towards an initial position. For example, in certain implementations, eachswing arm 5570 is biased towards a position at which thelugs 5576 push the raisedsection 5523 of therelease bar 5520 to bias thestops 5525 into the locking position. In some such implementations, each of thestops 5525 is biased through one of theopenings 5009 when thestop 5525 is aligned with theopenings 5009. In such implementations, thestops 5525 automatically lock theblade 3100 into a predetermined position when theblade 3100 reaches the predetermined position. In other implementations, however, thestops 5525 may be configured to move to the locking positions only when actuated by a user. - In certain implementations, each
swing arm 5570 includes a spring 5578 (FIG. 126 ) that biases theswing arm 5570 towards the initial position. In certain implementations, the springs 5528 are mounted beneath the mountingsections 5571 of theswing arms 5570. In some implementations, theswing arms 5570 have a planar configuration. In other implementations, the mountingsection 5571 of theswing arm 5570 is raised (e.g., stepped) above the first and second connection sections to define a space at which thespring 5578 may be mounted. In the example shown, thespring 5578 is a torsion spring. In other implementations, however, thespring 5578 may be any type of spring that will apply a rotational or pivotal load to theswing arm 5570. In still other implementations, springs may be mounted directly to therelease arms 5520 to bias thestops 5525 to the locking positions, with or without the swing arm springs 5578. - A user releases the
stops 5525 from thechassis openings 5009 by moving theactuation arm 5510, to rotate theswing arms 5570, to retract therelease arms 5520. The user applies sufficient force to theactuation arm 5510 to overcome the biasing force applied to theswing arms 5570. In certain implementations, theactuation member 4515 is configured to move forward and/or rearward relative to theblade 3100 when actuated. - For example, in the implementation shown, rearward movement of the
actuation member 5515 with sufficient force to overcome the bias of thesprings 5578 produces rearward movement of theactuation arm 5510 relative to theblade base 3110. In certain implementations, the rearward movement is caused by a user pushing on theactuation member 5515 relative to theblade handle 3108. Rearward movement of theactuation arm 5510 applies a rotational force to theswing arms 5570. In the example shown, the rearward movement of theactuation arm 5510 applies a clockwise rotational force to theright-most release arm 5520 and a counter-clockwise rotational force to theleft-most release arm 5520. - The rotational movement of the
swing arms 5570 produces a sliding movement of eachrelease arm 5520. In the example shown, the rotational movements of theswing arms 5570 produce forward and inward movements of therelease member 5520. In certain implementations, therelease arms 5520 slide diagonally across theblade base 3110. The inward motion of therelease arms 5520 retracts thestops 5525 from thechassis sidewalls 5011. In some implementations, the inward motion of therelease arms 5520 pulls thestops 5525 substantially sideways relative to thechassis 5010. In one implementation, therelease arms 5520 are configured to pull thestops 5525 sideways only. In other implementations, the inward motion of therelease arms 5520 pulls thestops 5525 partially forward and partially sideways. - Releasing the
actuation member 5515 enables thesprings 5578 to bias theswing arms 5570 back to the initial positions. The return movement of theswing arms 5570 pushes theactuation arm 5510 forward. The return movement of theswing arms 5570 also pushes therelease arms 5520 outwardly, thereby biasing thestops 5525 back towards the locking positions. In certain implementations, the return movement of theswing arms 5570 pushes therelease arms 5520 rearwardly and outwardly. - To move the
blade 3100 from the closed position (FIG. 120 ) to the first extended position, a user grasps thehandle 3108 and pushes rearwardly on theactuation member 5515. When thestops 5525 retract from therear openings 5009C, the user pulls on thehandle 3108 to move theblade 3100 forward relative to thechassis 5010. In some implementations, the user releases theactuation member 5515 when theblade 3100 is moved sufficiently forward so that thestops 5525 clear therear openings 5009C. In such implementations, thestops 5525 are biased towards thechassis walls 5011 as theblade 3100 slides within thechassis 5010. When the user has moved theblade 3100 to the first extended position, thestops 5525 snap into theintermediate openings 5009B defined in thechassis 5010. - In other implementations, the user retains the
actuation member 5515 in the rearward position. In such implementations, thestops 5525 remain in the releasing positions as theblade 3100 moves relative to thechassis 5010. When the user pulls theblade 3100 to the desired position (e.g., the first extended position), the user releases theactuation member 5515 to enable thestops 5525 to extend into the appropriate openings (e.g., theintermediate openings 5009B) defined in thechassis 5010. Of course, the user also may pull theblade 3100 to the second extended position before releasing theactuation member 5515. In such implementations, thestops 5525 will extend into thefront openings 5009A when released. In still other implementations, the user may pull theblade 3100 out of thechassis 5010. - In accordance with some aspects, one or more blades positioned in the
chassis 3010 may be “smart” blades. As the term is used herein, a “smart” blade is a blade having PLI functionality. Smart blades may include a circuit board arrangement, a blade processor, and one or more “smart” couplers. The smart couplers include one or more media reading interfaces configured to read physical layer information stored on or in physical media segments. The blade processor may manage the media reading interfaces via the circuit board arrangement. - A smart blade may be installed at a “smart” chassis, which includes a backplane (e.g.,
chassis backplane 3040 ofFIG. 91 ). The circuit board arrangement of each smart blade connects the blade processors to the backplane. A chassis processor (e.g.,chassis processor 3060 ofFIG. 48 ) connects to the blade processors via the backplane. The chassis processor may be connected to a data network. For example,FIG. 91 illustrates one examplesmart chassis 3010 having abackplane 3040 includingmultiple blade ports 3042. Eachblade port 3042 is configured to connect to the circuit board arrangement of any smart blade positioned in thechassis 3010. - In accordance with other aspects, one or more of the blades may be “passive” blades. As the term is used herein, a “passive” blade is a blade that does not have PLI functionality. For example, in some implementations, a passive blade may have one or more “passive” couplers that do not include media reading interfaces as will be described in more detail herein. In certain implementations, the passive blade does not have a circuit board arrangement or a blade processor.
- In accordance with some aspects, a passive blade may be installed at a smart chassis. For example, the passive blade may have the same or similar dimensions of the smart blade to enable the passive blade to fit within the smart chassis. In other implementations, the passive blade may be installed at a “passive” chassis. As the term is used herein, a “passive” chassis is a chassis that does not include a backplane or a chassis processor. In certain implementations, a smart blade may be installed at the passive chassis.
-
FIGS. 128-142 illustrate various example implementations ofsmart blades 6100. In general, thesmart blade 6100 includes a base 6110 that is the same as thebase 3110 ofblade 3100 ofFIGS. 54-127 . Thesmart blade 6100 also includes acircuit board arrangement 6120, ablade processor 6140,retention fingers 6160, and latchingtabs 6170 that are substantially the same as thecircuit board arrangement 3120,blade processor 3140,retention fingers 3160, and latchingtabs 3170 ofblade 3100. Theblade processor 6140 connects to the chassis backplane (e.g.,chassis backplane 3040 ofFIG. 91 ) via thecircuit board arrangement 6120 as will be described in more detail herein. - In the example shown, the
example blade 6100 includes a plurality ofsmart couplers 6151 at the front of theblade 6100. Eachsmart coupler 6151 includes one or more media reading interfaces 6158. The media reading interfaces of thesmart couplers 6151 are coupled to thecircuit board arrangement 6120 of theblade 6100. Theblade processor 6140 also is coupled to the circuit board arrangement 6120 (seeFIG. 128 ). A connection end 6125 (FIG. 131 ) of thecircuit board arrangement 6120 is plugged into one of theblade ports 3042 of the backplane 3040 (e.g., seeconnection end 3125 ofblade 3100 plugged intoport 3042 inFIG. 91 ). In various implementations, theconnection end 6125 of thecircuit board 6120 and thebackplane 3040 forms a card edge connection, a plug/socket connection, a cable connection, a wireless connection, or another type of connection. - In some implementations, the media reading interface determines that a
media segment 6250 has been received at a port of thesmart coupler 6151. For example, a media reading interface at a front port of theblade 6100 may determine when anoutgoing media segment 3220 has been received at the front port. In other implementations, each media reading interface of asmart coupler 6151 forms an electrical connection between astorage device 6254 of amedia segment 6250 and thecircuit board arrangement 6120 of the blade 6100 (seeFIG. 129 ). For example, thestorage device 6254 may store physical layer information about themedia segment 6250. - The media reading interfaces are electrically connected (or otherwise communicatively coupled) to the
blade processor 6140. Theblade processors 6140 connect to the data network via thechassis backplane 3040 and thechassis processor 3060. In some implementations, eachblade processor 6140 operates the media reading interfaces of eachblade 6100. In some such implementations, thechassis processor 3060 is a master processor that connects to and manages theblade processors 6140 of theblades 6100 in thechassis 3010. For example, thechassis processor 3060 can instruct each of theblade processors 6140 to determine whichcommunications couplers 6150 havemedia segments 3200 inserted therein, to obtain physical layer information from themedia segments 3200, or to forward the physical layer information to thechassis processor 3060 for storage and/or transmission to the data network. -
FIGS. 129A and 129B show example implementations ofsmart couplers 6151 including example media reading interfaces 6158. Thesmart coupler 6151 ofFIG. 129A is configured to receive two or more LC-type optical connectors and thesmart coupler 6151 ofFIG. 129B is configured to receive two MPO-type optical connectors. In general, eachmedia reading interface 6158 is formed from one ormore contact members 6159. As shown inFIG. 129B , some types ofcoupler bodies 6151 definesslots 6154 configured to receive the one ormore contact members 6159. As shown inFIG. 129A , portions of thecontact members 6159 extend into the through-passages of thecouplers 6151 to engage the electrical contacts of thestorage devices 6254 of thefiber optic connector 6250. Other portions of the contact members are configured to engage contacts on a printed circuit board 6120 (FIG. 129A ) associated with (e.g., positioned on top of) thecoupler 6151. As discussed above, theblade processor 6140 also can be electrically coupled to the printedcircuit board 6120 for locally managing the media reading interfaces 6158. Such aprocessor 6140 can communicate with the memory circuitry on theconnector storage devices 6254 via the contact members and the printedcircuit board arrangement 6120. -
FIGS. 130A and 130B show example implementations ofphysical media segments 6250 configured to terminate at least one optical fiber.FIG. 130A shows aphysical media segment 6250 implemented as an LC-type fiber optic connector and FIG. 130B shows aphysical media segment 6250 implemented as an MPO-type fiber optic connector. Eachfiber optic connector 6250 includes abody 6251 enclosing anoptical ferrule 6252 through which at least one optical fiber extends. Thebody 6251 also includes akey area 6253 at which thestorage device 6254 may be positioned. For example, thekey area 6253 may define a depression or cavity in which astorage device 6254 can be positioned. In accordance with some implementations, thestorage device 6254 includes memory circuitry (e.g., an EEPROM chip) arranged on a printed circuit board. Electrical contacts also are arranged on the printed circuit board for interaction with themedia reading interface 6158 of thesmart coupler 6151. - Additional information pertaining to some example
fiber optic connectors 6250,storage devices 6254,fiber optic adapters 6151, and contact members can be found in copending U.S. provisional Application Nos. 61/303,961; 61/413,828; 61/437,504; and U.S. Pat. No. 8,690,593 incorporated by reference above. -
FIGS. 131-142 illustrate various example bladed panel systems in which thesmart couplers 6151 of theblades 6100 remain electrically connected to achassis backplane 3040 while theblades 6100 move relative to thechassis 3010 between at least two positions. For example, thecouplers 6151 may remain electrically connected to thebackplane 3040 as theblade 6100 moves between the closed and first extended positions. In some implementations, theexample blade 6100 includes acircuit board arrangement 6120 having at least afirst board 6122 and asecond board 6124. Thesmart couplers 6151 defining the front ports of theblade 6100 connect to thefirst board 6122. Theconnection end 6125 of thecircuit board arrangement 6125 is defined by thesecond board 6124. - The
blade 6100 also includes afirst connection system 6130 that electrically connects thefirst board 6122 and thesecond board 6124. Thefirst connection system 6130 also enables movement between thefirst board 6122 and thesecond board 6124 without disrupting the electrical connection between the twoboards first connection system 6130 enables thecircuit board arrangement 6120 to remain connected to thebackplane 3040 of thechassis 3010 during movement of theblade 6100. Accordingly, thechassis processor 3060 may manage themedia reading interfaces 6158 of thesmart couplers 6151 when theblade 6100 has been moved to the first extended position (e.g., to facilitate insertion and/or removal of media segments at the front ports. - In general, each
connection assembly 6130 includes a first portion secured to thefirst circuit board 6122 and a second portion secured to thesecond circuit board 6124. The first portion of theconnection assembly 6130 is moveably secured to the second portion. For example, the first portion of certain types ofconnection assemblies 6130 is slideably secured to the second portion. Certain types ofconnection assemblies 6130 also include a flexible electrical connector that maintains an electrical connection between thefirst board 6122 and thesecond board 6124. -
FIGS. 131-135 illustrate oneexample connection assembly 6130 suitable for use with ablade 6100. Theconnection assembly 6130 includes at least a first mounting member 6134 (FIG. 132 ) that holds or otherwise connects to thesecond circuit board 6124. For example, the first mountingmember 6134 may be fastened, glued, soldered, welded, snap-fit, or otherwise installed on thesecond circuit board 6124. For example,FIG. 135 shows an example first mountingmember 6134 being fastened (e.g., via screws) to a top of thesecond board 6124. A rail 6135 (FIG. 132 ) extends outwardly from the first mountingmembers 6134. In some implementations, therail 6135 is axially fixed relative to the first mountingmember 6134. In one implementation, therail 6135 is unitary with the first mountingmember 6134. - The
connection assembly 6130 also includes at least a second mounting member 6136 (FIG. 133 ) that is connected to thefirst circuit board 6122. In the example shown inFIG. 135 , the second mountingmember 6136 is fastened to the first circuit board 6122 (e.g., via screws). In other implementations, however, the second mountingmember 6136 may be glued, soldered, welded, snap-fit, or otherwise installed on thefirst circuit board 6136. For example,FIG. 135 shows an example second mountingmember 6136 being fastened to a top of thefirst board 6122. In some implementations, therails 6135 slide through anopening 6137 defined in thesecond mounting members 6136 to move the first mountingmember 6134 toward and away from the second mountingmember 6136. Moving the first mountingmember 6134 toward and away from the second mountingmember 6136 moves thesecond circuit board 6124 toward and away from thefirst circuit board 6122. - In some implementations, the
connection assembly 6130 includes only a singlefirst mounting member 6134, asingle rail 6135, and a singlesecond mounting member 6136. In other implementations, however, theconnection assembly 6130 can include two or more sets of mountingmembers connection assembly 6130 shown inFIGS. 131-135 includes two spaced first mountingmembers 6134, each holding onerail 6135. Theconnection assembly 6130 ofFIGS. 131-135 also includes two spaced second mountingmembers 6136 configured to slideably receive therails 6135. - One example first mounting
member 6134 is shown inFIG. 132 . Thefirst mounting member 6134 is configured to secure to thesecond circuit board 6124. Certain types of first mountingmembers 6134 include rectangular bases that are configured to be installed on thesecond circuit board 6124. Certain types of first mountingmembers 6134 also include curved tops. In the example shown, the curved top of the first mountingmember 6134 defines axial ribs. In other implementations, however, the first mountingmember 6134 may include a body defining a different shape (e.g., a rectangle, a triangle, etc.). - One
example rail 6135 is shown inFIG. 132 . In the example shown, eachrail 6135 has a circular transverse cross-section. In other implementations, however, therails 6135 may have different cross-sectional shapes (e.g., square, rectangle, oval, trapezoid, etc.) that complement the cross-sectional shapes ofchannels 6137 of the second mounting members 6136 (FIG. 133 ). Each of therails 6135 is configured to receive a fastener 6138 (FIG. 131 ) that secures therail 6135 to the second mountingmember 6136 to inhibit therail 6135 from sliding completely through the second mountingmember 6136. - One example second mounting
member 6136 is shown inFIG. 133 . Thesecond mounting member 6136 is configured to secure to the first circuit board 6122 (e.g., seeFIGS. 134-135 ). Thesecond mounting member 6136 defines achannel 6137 through which arail 6135 may extend. Certain types of second mountingmembers 6136 define a stepped profile on one side. In other implementations, however, thesecond mounting members 6136 may define any suitable shape. - The
connection assembly 6130 also includes acable 6131 that connects to thefirst circuit board 6122 at afirst plug 6132 and that connects to thesecond circuit board 6124 at a second plug 6133 (seeFIG. 131 ). Thecable 6131 is generally flexible and is sufficiently long to enable the second printedcircuit board 6124 to move relative to the first printedcircuit board 6122 without disconnecting from the first printedcircuit board 6122. For example, when the second printedcircuit board 6124 is in the retracted position (e.g., as shown inFIG. 134 ), thecable 6131 forms a half loop at a location between the first andsecond plugs 6132, 6133. When the second printedcircuit board 6124 is in the extended position (e.g., as shown inFIG. 131 ), thecable 6131 straightens out to extend over the distance between the printedcircuit boards - In certain implementations, the
connection assembly 6130 also includes aflange 6139 around which thecable 6131 may fold to manage the bending of thecable 6131 during extension and retraction of thecircuit board arrangement 6120. For example, theflange 6139 may include an elongated, planar body extending generally parallel with thefirst circuit board 6122. In the example shown, the free end of theelongated flange 6139 is bent, folded, or curved to inhibit damage to thecable 6131. In such implementations, thecable 6131 may form the half-loop around the distal end of theflange 6139 when thecircuit board arrangement 6120 is in the retracted position (seeFIG. 91 ). - For example, when the
blade 6100 is being inserted into thechassis 3010 and thesecond circuit board 6124 has not yet been connected to thebackplane 3040, the first mountingmembers 6134 abut thesecond mounting members 6136 and a majority of eachrail 6135 protrudes forwardly of the second mounting members 6136 (seeFIG. 91 ). The first andsecond plugs 6132, 6133 of thecable 6131 are positioned adjacent each other with thefirst plug 6132 being positioned below theelongated flange 6139. Thecable 6131 wraps around the distal end of theflange 6139 and extends substantially along the length of both major sides of theelongated flange 6139. - Moving the
blade 6100 out of thechassis 3010 to the first extended position moves thesecond mounting members 6136 forwardly relative to thebackplane 3040. Thebackplane 3040 retains theconnector end 6125 of the second printedcircuit board 6124 with sufficient force to retain the connection to the second printedcircuit board 6124. Accordingly, thesecond mounting members 6136 slide forwardly along therails 6135. In some implementations, thesecond mounting members 6136 slide along therails 6135 until thesecond mounting members 6136 abut the ends of therails 6135. In the example shown inFIG. 131 , thesecond mounting members 6136 abut screw heads on the ends of therails 6135. - Accordingly, when a user chooses to pull one of the
blades 6100 forwardly relative to the chassis housing 3010 (e.g., to access a communications coupler 6150), thefirst cable plug 6132 of thecorresponding cable 6131 moves with theblade 6100. The second cable plug 6133, however, remains at a fixed position relative to thebackplane 3040. For example, if a user wants to add, remove, or replace anoutgoing media segment 3200 on ablade 6100, then the user can slide theblade 6100 to the first extended position to access the desired segment or coupler port without disconnecting the storage devices of the remaining physical media segments 6200 mounted to theblade 6100 from the data management network. - In some implementations, moving the
blades 6100 further out of the chassis 3010 (e.g., to the second extended position) disconnects theblades 6100 from thebackplane 3040 and, hence, from the data network. As discussed above, moving theblade 6100 to the second extended position may facilitate access the rear ports of thefront couplers 6151 through an open top of theblade 6100. In other implementations, the moving theblade 6100 to the second extended position enables a user to access (e.g., add, remove, or replace) theblade processor 6140. In other implementations, however, the user can access theprocessor 6140 when theblade 6100 is in the first extended position. - In
FIGS. 136-142 , theexample blade 6100 includes a secondexample connection system 6130′ that connects theprocessor 6140 to thebackplane 3040 of thechassis 3010. Thesecond connection assembly 6130′ includes at least a first mountingmember 6134′ that holds or otherwise connects to thesecond circuit board 6124. Thefirst mounting member 6134′ mounts thesecond circuit board 6124 onrails 6135′ that are connected to thefirst circuit board 6122 via second mountingmembers 6136′. In some implementations, therails 6135′ slide through thesecond mounting members 6136′ to move the second printedcircuit board 6124 relative to the first printedcircuit board 6122. In other implementations, the first mountingmembers 6134′ move over therails 6135′ to move the second printedcircuit board 6124 relative to the first printedcircuit board 6122. - One example first mounting
member 6134′ is shown inFIG. 140 . Thefirst mounting member 6134′ is configured to mount onrails 6135′. In the example shown, the first mountingmember 6134′ includes a generally T-shaped body that defines an open-ended slot through which arail 6135′ can extend. In other implementations, however, the first mountingmember 6134′ may include a body defining a different shape (e.g., a rectangle, a triangle, etc.). In other implementations, the first mountingmember 6134′ may define through-opening instead of a slot. In some implementations, one first mountingmember 6134′ is installed at a first side of the second printedcircuit board 6124 and another first mountingmember 6134′ is installed at a second side of the second printedcircuit board 6124. In certain implementations, the second printedcircuit board 6124 is held between two first mountingmembers 6134′. In other implementations, the first mountingmembers 6134′ are mounted on top of the second printed circuit board 6124 (e.g., seeFIG. 139 ). - The
rails 6135′ are connected to the first printedcircuit board 6122 by second mountingmembers 6136′. One example second mountingmember 6136 is shown inFIG. 141 . Thesecond mounting member 6136′ defines achannel 6137′ through which one of therails 6135′ may extend. Oneexample rail 6135′ is shown inFIG. 142 . In the example shown, eachrail 6135′ has a circular transverse cross-section. In other implementations, however, therails 6135′ may have different cross-sectional shapes (e.g., square, rectangle, oval, trapezoid, etc.) that complement the cross-sectional shapes ofchannels 6137′ of thesecond mounting members 6136′. Each of therails 6135′ includes astop 6138′ at one end to inhibit therail 6135′ from sliding completely through the first mountingmember 6134′. - The
connection assembly 6130′ also includes thecable 6131 that connects to thefirst circuit board 6122 at the first plug 6132 (FIG. 138 ) and that connects to thesecond circuit board 6124 at the second plug 6133 (FIGS. 131 and 138 ). Thecable 6131 is generally flexible and is sufficiently long to enable the second printedcircuit board 6124 to move relative to the first printedcircuit board 6122 without disconnecting from the first printedcircuit board 6122. For example, when the second printedcircuit board 6124 is in the retracted position (e.g., as shown inFIG. 137 ), thecable 6131 can form a half loop at a location between the first andsecond connectors 6132, 6133. When the second printedcircuit board 6124 is in the extended position (e.g., as shown inFIG. 138 ), thecable 6131 substantially straightens out to extend over the distance between the printedcircuit boards - In certain implementations, the
second connection assembly 6130′ also includes theflange 6139 around which thecable 6131 may fold to manage the bending of thecable 6131 during extension and retraction of thecircuit board arrangement 6120. For example, theflange 6139 may include an elongated, planar body extending generally parallel with thefirst circuit board 6122. In the example shown, the free end of theelongated flange 6139 is bent, folded, or curved to inhibit damage to thecable 6131. In such implementations, thecable 6131 may form the half-loop around the distal end of theflange 6139 when thecircuit board arrangement 6120 is in the retracted position (seeFIG. 136 ). - For example, in the example shown in
FIG. 137 , theblade 6100 is being inserted into thechassis 3010 and thesecond circuit board 6124 has not yet been connected to thebackplane 3040. Thefirst mounting members 6134 abut thesecond mounting members 6136′ and a majority of eachrail 6135′ protrudes forwardly of thesecond mounting members 6136′. The first andsecond plugs 6132, 6133 are positioned adjacent each other with thefirst plug 6132 positioned below theelongated flange 6139. Thecable 6131 wraps around the distal end of theflange 6139 and extends substantially along the length of both major sides of theelongated flange 6139. - Moving the
blade 6100 out of thechassis 3010 to the first extended position moves thesecond mounting members 6136′ forwardly relative to thebackplane 3040. Thebackplane 3040 retains theconnector end 6125 of the second printedcircuit board 6124 with sufficient force to retain the connection to the second printedcircuit board 6124. Accordingly, thesecond mounting members 6136′ slide forwardly along therails 6135′. In some implementations, thesecond mounting members 6136′ slide along therails 6135′ until thesecond mounting members 6136′ abut the ends of therails 6135′. In the example shown inFIG. 139 , thesecond mounting members 6136′ abut screw heads on the ends of therails 6135′. - Accordingly, when a user chooses to pull one of the
blades 6100 forwardly relative to the chassis housing 3010 (e.g., to access a communications couplers 6151), thefirst cable plug 6132 of thecorresponding cable 6131 moves with theblade 6100. The second cable plug 6133, however, remains at a fixed position relative to thebackplane 3040. For example, if a user wants to add, remove, or replace anoutgoing media segment 3200 on ablade 6100, then the user can slide theblade 6100 to the first extended position to access the desired segment or coupler port without disconnecting the storage devices of the remainingphysical media segments 3200 mounted to theblade 6100 from the data management network. - In some implementations, moving the
blades 6100 further out of the chassis 3010 (e.g., to the second extended position) disconnects theblades 6100 from thebackplane 3040 and, hence, from the data network. As discussed above, moving theblade 6100 to the second extended position may facilitate access the rear ports of thefront couplers 6151 through an open top of theblade 6100. In other implementations, the moving theblade 6100 to the second extended position enables a user to access (e.g., add, remove, or replace) theblade processor 6140. In other implementations, however, the user can access theprocessor 6140 when theblade 6100 is in the first extended position. -
FIGS. 143-150 illustrate one examplebladed panel system 7000 including a “passive”chassis 7010 and a plurality of “passive”blades 7100. In other implementations, however, one or moresmart blades 6100 may be mounted to thepassive chassis 7010. Thechassis 7010 includesside walls 7011 interconnected by top andbottom walls 7012 to define an open front and an open rear. Arear cover 7050 may be mounted to thechassis 7010. In certain implementations, therear cover 7050 is substantially the same asrear cover 3050 disclosed above. In contrast tochassis 3010 above, however, theexample chassis 7010 does not include a backplane. In some implementations, apanel 7040 may be mounted in place of a backplane. In other implementations, the rear of thechassis 7010 may be left open. - One or
more guides 7015 are positioned along theside walls 7011. Theblades 7100 are moveably positioned in thechassis 7010 using theguides 7015. For example, theblades 7100 may be slid along theguides 7015. In certain implementations, theguides 7015 extend between the front and rear of thechassis 7010. In the example shown, thechassis 7010 includes eight guides 7015. In other implementations, however, thechassis 7010 may include greater or fewer guides (e.g., one guide, two guides, three guides, four guides, ten guides, twelve guides, etc.). -
FIG. 146 shows one example implementation of a firstpassive blade 7100A including a coupler arrangement 7150A having one or morepassive couplers 7151. As the term is used herein, a “passive”blade 7100 is a blade that does not include PLI/PLM functionality. In some implementations, apassive blade 7100 does not include a circuit board arrangement. In other implementations, apassive blade 7100 may includecouplers 7151 that do not have media reading interfaces. In certain implementations, thepassive couplers 7151 are configured to receivemedia segments 3200 regardless of whether themedia segment 3200 includes a storage device storing physical layer information. In the example shown,dust caps 7152 are positioned at the front ports of theblade 7100A. - In the example shown, the first
passive blade 7100A includes a generallyplanar base 7110 having outer andinner extensions outer extensions 7111 defines anotch 7005 that enables theblade 7100A to be locked in a closed position within thechassis 7010 as described above. Theinner extensions 7113 definecable tie locations 7039 at which media segments may be secured to thebase 7110. One or morelatching tabs base 7110 to enable theblade 7100A to be locked into one or more positions relative to thechassis 7010. In other implementations, other types of latching systems may be used withblade 7100A. - A
handle 7108 extends forwardly of the base 7110 to facilitate movement of theblade 7100A relative to thechassis 7010. Aframe 7115 is positioned at the front of the firstpassive blade 7100A. Theframe 7115 is configured to secure one or morepassive couplers 7151 to thebase 7110. In some implementations, thecouplers 7151 are configured to receive bothincoming media segments 3210 andoutgoing media segments 3220. In other implementations, thecouplers 7151 receive onlyoutgoing media segments 3220 and couplers positioned at the rear of thebase 7110 receive theincoming media segments 3210.Retention fingers 7160 extend forwardly of theframe 7115. In certain implementations, theretention fingers 7160 are substantially the same asretention fingers 3160 described above. -
FIGS. 147 and 148 show one example implementation of theframe 7115. Theexample frame 7115 includes parallel top and bottom members 7090, 7091, respectively, connected by afront panel 7192. Thefront panel 7192 defines one ormore openings 7193 configured to receive thecoupler arrangement 7150 of theblade 7100A. In some implementations, anintermediate section 7198 of theframe 7115 has a reduced height compared to outer sections of theframe 7115. In some implementations, the reducedheight section 7198 also definesopenings 7196 configured to receivecouplers 7151. In other implementations, the reducedheight section 7198 defines a blank flange extending between the outer sections of theframe 7115. - In some implementations, each
opening 7193 is sized to receive asingle coupler 7151 and theopenings 7193 are separated by dividingflanges 7194. For example, in one implementation, eachopening 7193 may be sized to receive asimplex coupler 7151. In another implementation, eachopening 7193 is sized to receive aduplex coupler 7151. In yet another implementation, eachopening 7193 is sized to receive aquadruplex coupler 7151. In still other implementations, eachopening 7193 may be sized to receive various other sized couplers. In some implementations, theopenings 7193 are separated into two or more groups by dividing sections 7195 (FIG. 148 ). The dividingsections 7195 are thicker than dividingflanges 7194. - In some implementations, the
frame 7115 is configured to receive one ormore couplers 7151 configured to receive media segments terminated with SC-type connectors (seeFIG. 146 ). In other implementations, theframe 7115 is configured to receive one ormore couplers 7151 configured to receive media segments terminated with LC-type connectors (seecouplers 7157 of the second examplepassive blade 7100B ofFIG. 149 ). In still other implementations, theframe 7115 may be configured to receive media segments terminated with various other types of connectors (e.g., ST-type connectors, FC-type connectors, MPO-type connectors). - For example,
FIG. 150 shows a third examplepassive blade 7100C including abase 7110, latchingtabs retention fingers 7160. Aframe 7115′ is positioned at the front of the base 7110 to secure a plurality ofcouplers 7153 to theblade 7100C. In the example shown, thecouplers 7153 are configured to receive MPO-type connectors. In other implementations, however, theframe 7115′ may be configured to receive other types of couplers. Theframe 7115′ includes a reducedheight section 7116 that is not configured to hold any couplers. Rather, the reducedheight section 7116 of theframe 7115′ includes a generally planar face that extends between groups offront couplers 7153. In the example shown,dust caps 7154 are received at the front ports of thecouplers 7153. - As shown in
FIGS. 143 and 144 , asingle chassis 7010 may receive one or more types ofblades 7100. For example, thechassis 7010 shown inFIG. 144 has received a third examplepassive blade 7100C at each of the top twoguides 7015, a second examplepassive blade 7100B at each of the threeintermediate guides 7015, and a first examplepassive blade 7100A at each of the three bottom guides 7015. In other implementations, theguides 7100 may be arranged in thechassis 7010 in a different configuration. - In still other implementations, any of the
passive blades chassis 3010 disclosed above). For example, in some implementations, the rear of each of thepassive chasses backplane 3040 when thechassis smart chassis 3010 in a closed position. In certain implementations, the reducedheight section frames passive chasses status board 3070 ofFIG. 45 ) when received at a top of asmart chassis 3010. Further, the reducedheight sections frames handle 7108 whenoutgoing media segments 3220 are routed to the front of theblades FIG. 144 ). - To enhance clarity of the application, the following disclosure provides an example walk-through of routing the incoming and
outgoing media segments 3200 for an example blade. One or more chasses (e.g.,chasses rack 4400 ofFIGS. 80-82 ). One or more blades (e.g.,blades blade 3100, is being mounted to a smart chassis, such aschassis 3010 havingbackplane 3040. Astatus board 3070 also may be installed at thechassis 3010 and connected to thebackplane 3040. - The
blade 3100 is slid rearwardly alongguides 3015 from the front of thechassis 3010. Acircuit board arrangement 3120 of theblade 3100 is connected to abackplane 3040 of thechassis 3010 by sliding theblade 3100 rearwardly into thechassis 3010 along theguides 3015. For example, asecond circuit board 3124 on eachblade 3100 may be connected to the backplane 3040 (e.g., via a card-edge connection, via a connector, etc.). Theblade processor 3140 on thesmart blade 3100 also is connected to thebackplane 3040 via thecircuit board arrangement 3120. -
Incoming cables 3210 may be connected to the rear ports of eachblade 3100 after theblade 3100 has been inserted into thechassis 3010. For example, a technician may plug connectorized ends 3212 of theincoming cables 3210 into the rear ports of theblade 3100. The technician also may secure theincoming cables 3210 to theblade 3100, thechassis 3010, and/or the frame. For example, the technician may routes theincoming cables 3210 to acable clamp 3030,fanout arrangement 3035, or other securement structure at thechassis 3010 before securing theincoming cables 3210 to theblades 3100. The technician also may secure (e.g., using a cable tie 3039) theincoming cables 3210 to the tabs on the intermediate flanges at the rear of the blades to provide slack length of theincoming cables 3210 between thechassis 3010 and theblade 3100. - The technician routes the connectorized ends 3212 of the
incoming cables 3210 to the rear ports of theblade 3100. In some implementations, the technician plugs the connectorized ends 3212 of theincoming cables 3210 into ports 3195 (FIG. 78 ) defined by couplers at the rear of theblade 3100. In such implementations, the technician accesses therear ports 3195 from the rear of thechassis 3010. In particular, the technician can unplug a dust plug 3158 (FIG. 79 ) from one of therear ports 3195 of the rear couplers and insert one of the connectorized ends 3212 into therear port 3195 from the rear of thechassis 3010. - In other implementations, the technician feeds connectorized ends 3212 of the
incoming cables 3210 from the rear of thechassis 3010, over the base of the respective blade, toward the front couplers. The technician may subsequently access the rear ports of the front couplers through an open top of the blade from the front of thechassis 3010. For example, the technician may access the front couplers when theblade 3100 is in a first or second extended position. In particular, the technician can unplug a dust plug from one of the rear ports of the front couplers and insert each of the connectorized ends 3212 of theincoming media segments 3210 into one of the rear ports from the front of thechassis 3010. -
Outgoing cables 3220 may be installed at the front ports of theblades 3100. If the blade is a smart blade, then theoutgoing cables 3220 may be installed at the front ports without disconnecting theblade 3100 from thebackplane 3040. For example, the technician may plug theconnectors 3222 of theoutgoing cables 3220 into the front ports of the front couplers when theblade 3100 is in the closed or first extended position. In other implementations, however, theconnectors 3222 of theoutgoing fibers 3220 may be plugged into the front coupler ports while theblade 3100 is in any desired position. The technician also routes thefibers 3220 through theretention fingers 3160 at the front of theblade 3100. - The above specification, examples and data provide a complete description of the manufacture and use of the composition of the invention. Since many embodiments of the invention can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention, the invention resides in the claims hereinafter appended.
Claims (20)
Priority Applications (2)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US16/180,628 US20190075676A1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2018-11-05 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US17/197,691 US20210267084A1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2021-03-10 | Communications bladed panel systems |
Applications Claiming Priority (7)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US30394810P | 2010-02-12 | 2010-02-12 | |
US41384410P | 2010-11-15 | 2010-11-15 | |
US201161439693P | 2011-02-04 | 2011-02-04 | |
US13/025,750 US8923013B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-02-11 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/574,596 US9265172B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2014-12-18 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US15/043,897 US10123444B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2016-02-15 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US16/180,628 US20190075676A1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2018-11-05 | Communications bladed panel systems |
Related Parent Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US15/043,897 Continuation US10123444B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2016-02-15 | Communications bladed panel systems |
Related Child Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US17/197,691 Continuation US20210267084A1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2021-03-10 | Communications bladed panel systems |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20190075676A1 true US20190075676A1 (en) | 2019-03-07 |
Family
ID=44368168
Family Applications (14)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/025,743 Expired - Fee Related US9020319B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-02-11 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US13/025,750 Expired - Fee Related US8923013B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-02-11 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US13/025,730 Active 2032-09-23 US8934252B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-02-11 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US13/025,737 Active 2033-01-15 US8934253B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-02-11 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/574,596 Expired - Fee Related US9265172B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2014-12-18 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/574,663 Expired - Fee Related US9213363B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2014-12-18 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/593,681 Expired - Fee Related US9198320B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-01-09 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/686,948 Expired - Fee Related US9223105B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-04-15 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/946,931 Active US9549484B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-11-20 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/968,398 Active US9532481B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-12-14 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/979,912 Active US9532482B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-12-28 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US15/043,897 Expired - Fee Related US10123444B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2016-02-15 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US16/180,628 Abandoned US20190075676A1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2018-11-05 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US17/197,691 Abandoned US20210267084A1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2021-03-10 | Communications bladed panel systems |
Family Applications Before (12)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US13/025,743 Expired - Fee Related US9020319B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-02-11 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US13/025,750 Expired - Fee Related US8923013B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-02-11 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US13/025,730 Active 2032-09-23 US8934252B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-02-11 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US13/025,737 Active 2033-01-15 US8934253B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-02-11 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/574,596 Expired - Fee Related US9265172B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2014-12-18 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/574,663 Expired - Fee Related US9213363B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2014-12-18 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/593,681 Expired - Fee Related US9198320B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-01-09 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/686,948 Expired - Fee Related US9223105B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-04-15 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/946,931 Active US9549484B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-11-20 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/968,398 Active US9532481B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-12-14 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US14/979,912 Active US9532482B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2015-12-28 | Communications bladed panel systems |
US15/043,897 Expired - Fee Related US10123444B2 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2016-02-15 | Communications bladed panel systems |
Family Applications After (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US17/197,691 Abandoned US20210267084A1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2021-03-10 | Communications bladed panel systems |
Country Status (5)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (14) | US9020319B2 (en) |
EP (2) | EP2534846B1 (en) |
CN (4) | CN102860032B (en) |
CA (2) | CA2789159A1 (en) |
WO (4) | WO2011100611A2 (en) |
Cited By (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11139639B1 (en) * | 2020-07-09 | 2021-10-05 | Ge Aviation Systems Limited | Modular power distribution assembly and method of assembly thereof |
WO2022111805A1 (en) * | 2020-11-25 | 2022-06-02 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Systems for rack mountable electronic devices |
WO2023287998A1 (en) * | 2021-07-16 | 2023-01-19 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Panel systems with slidable cassettes |
Families Citing this family (169)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US7570861B2 (en) | 2007-01-19 | 2009-08-04 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Adapter panel with lateral sliding adapter arrays |
US7570860B2 (en) | 2007-01-19 | 2009-08-04 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Adapter panel with lateral sliding adapter arrays |
WO2011047288A1 (en) | 2009-10-16 | 2011-04-21 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Managed connectivity in fiber optic systems and methods thereof |
CA2789159A1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-08-18 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Communications bladed panel systems |
ES2731679T3 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2019-11-18 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Communications connection system |
US9081537B2 (en) * | 2011-03-25 | 2015-07-14 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Identifier encoding scheme for use with multi-path connectors |
WO2012134932A2 (en) | 2011-03-25 | 2012-10-04 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Event-monitoring in a system for automatically obtaining and managing physical layer information using a reliable packet-based communication protocol |
US8715012B2 (en) | 2011-04-15 | 2014-05-06 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Managed electrical connectivity systems |
US8942722B2 (en) | 2011-06-09 | 2015-01-27 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Integration of wired information and wireless information to locate a wireless device |
US9417418B2 (en) | 2011-09-12 | 2016-08-16 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Flexible lensed optical interconnect device for signal distribution |
US9170391B2 (en) | 2011-10-07 | 2015-10-27 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Slidable fiber optic connection module with cable slack management |
US9002166B2 (en) | 2011-10-07 | 2015-04-07 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Slidable fiber optic connection module with cable slack management |
US9069150B2 (en) * | 2011-10-07 | 2015-06-30 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Slidable fiber optic connection module with cable slack management |
AU2012321127B2 (en) | 2011-10-07 | 2016-02-04 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Fiber optic cassette |
US20140149785A1 (en) * | 2011-10-25 | 2014-05-29 | M. Scott Bunker | Distributed management |
US8995136B2 (en) * | 2011-12-23 | 2015-03-31 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Communications bladed panel systems |
TWI441578B (en) * | 2012-01-11 | 2014-06-11 | Delta Electronics Inc | Circuit board assembly |
US9075203B2 (en) | 2012-01-17 | 2015-07-07 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Fiber optic adapter block |
TWI523598B (en) * | 2012-05-29 | 2016-02-21 | Tseng Ching Chao | The wiring management structure for the cabinet |
US8873238B2 (en) * | 2012-06-11 | 2014-10-28 | The Boeing Company | Chassis system and method for holding and protecting electronic modules |
WO2014008132A1 (en) | 2012-07-06 | 2014-01-09 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Managed electrical connectivity systems |
WO2014009344A1 (en) * | 2012-07-11 | 2014-01-16 | Tyco Electronics Uk Ltd. | Slidable fibre optic module comprising a rail with electrical contacts |
US9036368B2 (en) | 2012-07-11 | 2015-05-19 | Ching-Sheng Chen | Cable management device in chassis |
US10082636B2 (en) * | 2012-09-21 | 2018-09-25 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Slidable fiber optic connection module with cable slack management |
US9195021B2 (en) * | 2012-09-21 | 2015-11-24 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Slidable fiber optic connection module with cable slack management |
RU2642523C2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2018-01-25 | Тайко Электроникс Юк Лтд. | Method of manufacture and testing of fiber-optic cartridge |
US9203198B2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2015-12-01 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Low profile faceplate having managed connectivity |
US9488788B2 (en) | 2012-09-28 | 2016-11-08 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Fiber optic cassette |
US9223094B2 (en) | 2012-10-05 | 2015-12-29 | Tyco Electronics Nederland Bv | Flexible optical circuit, cassettes, and methods |
US9971120B2 (en) * | 2012-10-31 | 2018-05-15 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Anchoring cables to rack with cable clamp arrangements |
CN104956621B (en) * | 2012-12-05 | 2018-01-09 | 西门子加拿大有限公司 | The network equipment |
US8964406B2 (en) * | 2012-12-11 | 2015-02-24 | ESPi LLC | Battery backup cover system |
BR112015016789B1 (en) | 2013-01-29 | 2022-02-01 | Tyco Electronics Raychem Bvba | Optical fiber distribution element |
US9423570B2 (en) | 2013-02-05 | 2016-08-23 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Optical assemblies with managed connectivity |
US9285552B2 (en) | 2013-02-05 | 2016-03-15 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Optical assemblies with managed connectivity |
US9386723B2 (en) | 2013-02-25 | 2016-07-05 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Adjustable swinging bracket |
US9559499B2 (en) * | 2013-02-26 | 2017-01-31 | R&M Usa Inc. | Distribution panel with dual movable trays |
WO2014133943A1 (en) | 2013-02-27 | 2014-09-04 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Slidable fiber optic connection module with cable slack management |
CN110678027B (en) * | 2013-02-28 | 2021-09-07 | 甲骨文国际公司 | Out-of-band management of rack mounted field replaceable units |
EP2972537B1 (en) * | 2013-03-12 | 2019-12-18 | CommScope Technologies LLC | Optical waveguide module, system and method |
US9728945B2 (en) | 2013-03-13 | 2017-08-08 | Go!Foton Holdings, Inc. | Patch panel assembly |
US9435975B2 (en) * | 2013-03-15 | 2016-09-06 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Modular high density telecommunications frame and chassis system |
ES2719271T3 (en) | 2013-03-19 | 2019-07-09 | Adc Czech Republic Sro | Control of curvature and support of connection cables, mobile, for telecommunications panels |
CN103163612A (en) * | 2013-03-28 | 2013-06-19 | 江苏银河电子股份有限公司 | Tray guide rail unit |
KR101701665B1 (en) * | 2013-03-29 | 2017-02-01 | 미쓰비시덴키 가부시키가이샤 | Sequencer terminal block, sequencer and sequencer unit |
US9728064B2 (en) | 2013-04-03 | 2017-08-08 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Cartridge interdependence switch |
ES1148433Y (en) | 2013-04-24 | 2016-03-28 | Tyco Electronics Raychem Bvba | Cable assembly set |
DK3531179T3 (en) | 2013-04-24 | 2021-03-01 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | OPTICAL FIBER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM |
CN104166438B (en) * | 2013-05-20 | 2017-07-21 | 英业达科技有限公司 | Servomechanism and its fixed structure |
US9344776B2 (en) | 2013-05-29 | 2016-05-17 | Go!Foton Holdings, Inc. | Patch panel tray assembly |
US9462356B2 (en) * | 2013-05-29 | 2016-10-04 | Go!Foton Holdings, Inc. | Patch panel assembly |
US9088140B2 (en) * | 2013-06-06 | 2015-07-21 | Tyco Electronics Corporation | Guide features for a cable backplane system |
US9581781B2 (en) | 2013-06-24 | 2017-02-28 | Go!Foton Holdings, Inc. | Patch panel pivoting tray cable retention mechanisms |
EP3014325B1 (en) | 2013-06-28 | 2021-03-24 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Cable management structure for an optical fiber distribution rack |
CN104423491B (en) * | 2013-09-05 | 2017-09-12 | 纬创资通股份有限公司 | The rotary module of plug can be interlocked |
US10042135B2 (en) | 2013-09-23 | 2018-08-07 | Commscope Connectivity Uk Limited | Telecommunications chassis |
US20150099448A1 (en) * | 2013-10-08 | 2015-04-09 | Ge Oil & Gas Esp, Inc. | Vent box |
US9412496B2 (en) * | 2013-10-25 | 2016-08-09 | Tyco Electronics Corporation | Cable assembly for a cable backplane system |
US10116558B2 (en) | 2014-01-24 | 2018-10-30 | Fiber Mountain, Inc. | Packet switch using physical layer fiber pathways |
EP3105627B1 (en) * | 2014-02-14 | 2020-11-04 | CommScope Connectivity UK Limited | Managed connectivity in optical distribution frame |
EP3123220A4 (en) * | 2014-03-26 | 2017-11-01 | TE Connectivity Corporation | Optical adapter module with managed connectivity |
EP3123662B1 (en) | 2014-03-28 | 2020-05-06 | Fiber Mountain, Inc. | Built in alternate links within a switch |
EP3135084B1 (en) * | 2014-04-25 | 2020-09-02 | CommScope Technologies LLC | Managed connectivity in cable spool assemblies |
US10031308B2 (en) | 2014-04-28 | 2018-07-24 | Telect, Inc. | Ultra-high density frames |
CN110261976B (en) * | 2014-06-23 | 2021-03-02 | Adc电信公司 | Panel system |
SG11201700004PA (en) | 2014-07-03 | 2017-01-27 | Fiber Mountain Inc | Data center path switch with improved path interconnection architecture |
US10278298B2 (en) | 2014-07-22 | 2019-04-30 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Door hinge mechanism for telecommunications panel |
TWI521248B (en) * | 2014-08-07 | 2016-02-11 | 光興國際股份有限公司 | Optical transceiver |
US20160054527A1 (en) * | 2014-08-24 | 2016-02-25 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Led pull tabs for pluggable transceiver modules and adaptor modules |
MX355776B (en) | 2014-09-11 | 2018-04-30 | Adc Telecommunications Inc | Door hinge mechanism for telecommunications panel. |
US9690065B2 (en) * | 2014-09-12 | 2017-06-27 | Panduit Corp. | High density fiber enclosure and method |
WO2016042034A1 (en) | 2014-09-16 | 2016-03-24 | Tyco Electronics Raychem Bvba | Multi-positionable telecommunications tray |
CN107111092B (en) * | 2014-09-16 | 2020-01-21 | 康普连通比利时私人有限公司 | Rotatable jumper cable holder |
US10502917B2 (en) | 2014-09-16 | 2019-12-10 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Telecommunications tray assembly |
MX2017003380A (en) | 2014-09-16 | 2017-10-31 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Telecommunications tray with a cable routing path extending through a pivot hinge. |
US10382845B2 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2019-08-13 | Fiber Mountain, Inc. | System for increasing fiber port density in data center applications |
US9989724B2 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2018-06-05 | Fiber Mountain, Inc. | Data center network |
WO2016066614A1 (en) | 2014-10-27 | 2016-05-06 | Commscope Emea Limited | Splice module for fiber blade |
US9715795B2 (en) * | 2014-10-30 | 2017-07-25 | International Business Machines Corporation | Indicator module for modular computing units |
WO2016094331A1 (en) | 2014-12-10 | 2016-06-16 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Fiber optic cable slack management module |
US20160224503A1 (en) * | 2015-02-04 | 2016-08-04 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Adaptive, predicative, and intelligent scanning of items in a physical layer management system |
TWI518393B (en) * | 2015-02-24 | 2016-01-21 | 楊沐晨 | One-piece optical fiber adapter capable of switching connection polarity of optical fiber connectors |
USD901390S1 (en) * | 2015-03-16 | 2020-11-10 | Optiworks, Inc. | High-density optical module system |
AU2016239875C1 (en) | 2015-04-03 | 2021-06-24 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Telecommunications distribution elements |
WO2016168337A1 (en) | 2015-04-13 | 2016-10-20 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Telecommunications chassis and module |
WO2016170173A1 (en) | 2015-04-23 | 2016-10-27 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Telecommunications panel assembly with movable adapters |
US10261275B2 (en) * | 2015-05-11 | 2019-04-16 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Baffle with optical connector |
EP3329346A4 (en) * | 2015-07-29 | 2019-06-12 | Commscope Technologies LLC | Bladed chassis systems |
US9851523B2 (en) * | 2015-09-22 | 2017-12-26 | Go!Foton Holdings, Inc. | Apparatus for cable routing |
US10149402B1 (en) * | 2015-09-30 | 2018-12-04 | EMC IP Holding Company LLC | Rack-mountable IT device |
US9992903B1 (en) * | 2015-09-30 | 2018-06-05 | EMC IP Holding Company LLC | Modular rack-mountable IT device |
EP3360290B1 (en) | 2015-10-08 | 2022-11-02 | Commscope Technologies LLC | Communication media and methods for providing indication of signal power to a network entity |
DE102015118338A1 (en) * | 2015-10-27 | 2017-04-27 | Reichle & De-Massari Ag | Patch panel device and modular system for producing a patch panel device |
EP3374814A4 (en) | 2015-11-10 | 2019-07-17 | Commscope Technologies LLC | Bladed chassis systems and removable cassettes |
US10146021B2 (en) * | 2015-11-12 | 2018-12-04 | Facebook, Inc. | Modular monitored patch panel system |
US9780871B2 (en) | 2015-11-12 | 2017-10-03 | Facebook, Inc. | Monitored patch panel system |
US9690335B2 (en) * | 2015-11-13 | 2017-06-27 | Facebook, Inc. | Storage device storage tray |
US9798362B2 (en) | 2015-11-13 | 2017-10-24 | Facebook, Inc. | Storage device storage tray with leaf spring retainers |
KR102412366B1 (en) * | 2015-12-30 | 2022-06-24 | 엘지디스플레이 주식회사 | Display device having force sensor structure |
US11187616B2 (en) | 2016-01-28 | 2021-11-30 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Optical power detector and reader |
US9829666B2 (en) * | 2016-02-17 | 2017-11-28 | Telect, Inc. | Ultra-high density patch systems |
TWI619419B (en) * | 2016-02-22 | 2018-03-21 | Extension structure of server slide rail cable management frame | |
GB2547958B (en) | 2016-03-04 | 2019-12-18 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Two-wire plug and receptacle |
JP6552436B2 (en) * | 2016-03-08 | 2019-07-31 | オリンパス株式会社 | Immersion objective lens |
US11502488B2 (en) * | 2016-04-08 | 2022-11-15 | Commscope Inc. Of North Carolina | Cable management assembly for variable length cables |
US11674345B2 (en) | 2016-04-19 | 2023-06-13 | Commscope, Inc. Of North Carolina | Door assembly for a telecommunications chassis with a combination hinge structure |
WO2017184508A1 (en) | 2016-04-19 | 2017-10-26 | Commscope, Inc. Of North Carolina | Telecommunications chassis with slidable trays |
US10366034B2 (en) * | 2016-05-18 | 2019-07-30 | Commscope, Inc. Of North Carolina | Infrastructure management system with support for breakout cables |
US10215944B2 (en) | 2016-06-30 | 2019-02-26 | Panduit Corp. | Modular fiber optic tray |
US10332429B2 (en) * | 2016-07-06 | 2019-06-25 | Belden Canada Inc. | Labelling system for rackmount case for the accommodation of optical equipment |
CN107623878B (en) * | 2016-07-13 | 2022-07-15 | 康普科技有限责任公司 | Finger clip type cable management assembly |
WO2018046677A1 (en) | 2016-09-08 | 2018-03-15 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Telecommunications distribution elements |
AU2017325838B2 (en) | 2016-09-14 | 2020-11-05 | Fiber Mountain, Inc. | Intelligent fiber port management |
US10101542B2 (en) | 2016-09-27 | 2018-10-16 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Managed connectivity systems |
US10185109B2 (en) * | 2016-12-29 | 2019-01-22 | Mellanox Technologies, Ltd. | Modular system for datacenter switch systems and routers |
US10291969B2 (en) | 2017-02-14 | 2019-05-14 | Go!Foton Holdings, Inc. | Rear cable management |
US11652322B2 (en) | 2017-04-24 | 2023-05-16 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Connectors for a single twisted pair of conductors |
US10310206B2 (en) | 2017-05-22 | 2019-06-04 | Go!Foton Holdings, Inc. | Apparatus for cable routing |
WO2018226959A1 (en) | 2017-06-07 | 2018-12-13 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Fiber optic adapter and cassette |
US10670822B2 (en) | 2017-06-28 | 2020-06-02 | Afl Telecommunications Llc | High density patch panel with modular cassettes |
US10219413B1 (en) * | 2017-08-31 | 2019-02-26 | Facebook, Inc. | Air blocking panel assemblies for component racks |
CN111164479B (en) | 2017-10-02 | 2021-11-19 | 康普技术有限责任公司 | Fiber optic circuits and methods of making |
CN107742786B (en) | 2017-10-13 | 2019-11-05 | 番禺得意精密电子工业有限公司 | The sub-assembly that electric connector combination is combined with optical fiber connector |
WO2019079419A1 (en) * | 2017-10-18 | 2019-04-25 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Fiber optic connection cassette |
EP3701304B1 (en) | 2017-10-26 | 2022-05-04 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Telecommunications system |
MX2018013888A (en) * | 2017-11-13 | 2019-06-06 | Ortronics Inc | Hybridized cable assembly. |
US10591692B2 (en) * | 2017-12-27 | 2020-03-17 | Afl Ig Llc | Optical distribution frames |
US10459733B2 (en) | 2018-01-25 | 2019-10-29 | Dell Products, Lp | Power budgeting in an information handling system |
US10725251B2 (en) * | 2018-01-31 | 2020-07-28 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Cable router |
JP6691929B2 (en) * | 2018-02-09 | 2020-05-13 | 株式会社フジクラ | Optical fiber cable holder and optical wiring unit |
EP3759535A4 (en) | 2018-02-28 | 2021-11-10 | CommScope Technologies LLC | Packaging assembly for telecommunications equipment |
US10416406B1 (en) * | 2018-03-01 | 2019-09-17 | Afl Telecommunications Llc | Communications module housing |
US10485133B1 (en) * | 2018-03-16 | 2019-11-19 | Legrand France | Fastening device |
WO2019204317A1 (en) | 2018-04-16 | 2019-10-24 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Adapter structure |
WO2019201878A1 (en) | 2018-04-17 | 2019-10-24 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Telecommunications distribution elements |
US10868382B2 (en) * | 2018-04-27 | 2020-12-15 | Canon Kabushiki Kaisha | Printed circuit board and image forming apparatus having printed circuit board |
CN108871200A (en) * | 2018-06-01 | 2018-11-23 | 广东工业大学 | A kind of probe-type micro-displacement sensing system based on nano surface axial direction photon structure Echo Wall microcavity |
US10694269B2 (en) * | 2018-08-20 | 2020-06-23 | Quanta Computer Inc. | Optical cable identification tool |
EP3844547A1 (en) | 2018-08-31 | 2021-07-07 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Frame assemblies for optical fiber distribution elements |
EP3844973A1 (en) | 2018-08-31 | 2021-07-07 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Frame assemblies for optical fiber distribution elements |
WO2020043914A1 (en) | 2018-08-31 | 2020-03-05 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Frame assemblies for optical fiber distribution elements |
EP3845044B1 (en) | 2018-08-31 | 2023-02-15 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Frame assemblies for optical fiber distribution elements |
JP7084263B2 (en) * | 2018-09-14 | 2022-06-14 | 三和電気工業株式会社 | Optical connector plug connection detection mechanism |
EP3871028A1 (en) | 2018-10-23 | 2021-09-01 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Frame assemblies for optical fiber distribution elements |
US10327353B1 (en) * | 2018-10-30 | 2019-06-18 | Moxa Inc. | Wire fixing structure |
US10440852B1 (en) * | 2019-01-23 | 2019-10-08 | Ciena Corporation | Cable management system in an air-cooled housing |
US11947177B2 (en) | 2019-01-25 | 2024-04-02 | CommScope Connectivity Belgium BVBA | Frame assemblies for optical fiber distribution elements |
JP7041085B2 (en) * | 2019-02-05 | 2022-03-23 | ファナック株式会社 | Electronic device |
EP3939129A4 (en) | 2019-03-15 | 2022-12-14 | CommScope Technologies LLC | Connectors and contacts for a single twisted pair of conductors |
CN109764978A (en) * | 2019-03-22 | 2019-05-17 | 中国煤炭地质总局地球物理勘探研究院 | Temperature acquisition device and method |
CN109812681B (en) * | 2019-04-02 | 2020-09-11 | 杭州勒格网络科技有限公司 | A safe mounting fixture for communication switch |
US11237348B2 (en) | 2019-04-17 | 2022-02-01 | Afl Ig Llc | Patch panel with lifting cassette removal |
EP3977827A1 (en) * | 2019-05-24 | 2022-04-06 | CommScope Technologies LLC | Chassis panel with selectable cable management insert and cabling method therefore |
US10973147B1 (en) * | 2019-10-18 | 2021-04-06 | Quanta Computer Inc. | Rotatable cable holder module |
CN111031409B (en) * | 2019-12-11 | 2021-09-21 | 智客云科技(广州)股份有限公司 | Acquisition gateway equipment based on NB-IOT |
CN111010624A (en) * | 2019-12-11 | 2020-04-14 | 智客云科技(广州)股份有限公司 | Internet of things protocol converter device based on MQTT protocol |
US20230070605A1 (en) * | 2020-01-21 | 2023-03-09 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Managing network installation |
EP3905710A1 (en) * | 2020-04-28 | 2021-11-03 | Reichle & De-Massari AG | Cable management system |
US11169345B1 (en) | 2020-05-11 | 2021-11-09 | Google Llc | Sliding tray for fiber optic panel assembly |
CN115769442A (en) * | 2020-06-12 | 2023-03-07 | 康普技术有限责任公司 | Single-pair Ethernet multi-way connector |
CN113839263B (en) * | 2020-06-24 | 2024-06-07 | 戴尔产品有限公司 | Floating inserter |
CN113835494B (en) * | 2020-06-24 | 2024-02-13 | 戴尔产品有限公司 | Single-blade air damper for rack chassis |
WO2022061129A1 (en) | 2020-09-17 | 2022-03-24 | Panduit Corp. | Optical distribution and splice frame including cassettes |
US11971598B2 (en) | 2021-02-18 | 2024-04-30 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Tray arrangements for cassettes |
EP4295189A1 (en) | 2021-02-18 | 2023-12-27 | CommScope Technologies LLC | Communications panel system |
US11765848B2 (en) | 2021-07-29 | 2023-09-19 | Hewlett Packard Enterprise Development Lp | Host electronic device having a movable cooling component for removable electronic device |
WO2024097238A1 (en) * | 2022-10-31 | 2024-05-10 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Communications panel systems |
TWI831651B (en) * | 2023-03-17 | 2024-02-01 | 英業達股份有限公司 | Expansion frame and server including the same |
CN116113200B (en) * | 2023-04-14 | 2023-07-25 | 成都工业职业技术学院 | Blade server data storage unit |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3991960A (en) * | 1974-10-31 | 1976-11-16 | Nifco Inc. | Device for supporting electric wires, cords and other elongated bodies |
US20080175552A1 (en) * | 2007-01-19 | 2008-07-24 | Mark Smrha | Adapter panel with lateral sliding adapter arrays |
US20080230437A1 (en) * | 2007-03-22 | 2008-09-25 | High Tech Computer Corp. | Protection cover and electronic device using the same |
Family Cites Families (122)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
DE3713262A1 (en) | 1987-04-18 | 1988-11-03 | Heidelberger Druckmasch Ag | CONNECTOR CODING FOR ELECTRICAL CABLES |
US4995688A (en) | 1989-07-31 | 1991-02-26 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Optical fiber distribution frame |
US4953194A (en) | 1989-09-22 | 1990-08-28 | Network Devices, Incorporated | Automated documentation system for a communications network |
US5107532A (en) | 1989-09-22 | 1992-04-21 | Cable Management International, Inc. | Automated documentation system for a communications network |
GB2236398A (en) | 1989-09-29 | 1991-04-03 | James Alexander Carter | Self documenting patch panel |
IL97227A0 (en) | 1991-02-13 | 1992-05-25 | Bynet System Applic Ltd | Patching panel |
US5166970A (en) | 1991-06-10 | 1992-11-24 | Ward Timothy K | Multi-conductor identifier with voice communication capability |
CA2133304C (en) | 1992-04-02 | 2003-04-08 | Dennis M. Burroughs | Miniature coax jack module |
US5483467A (en) | 1992-06-10 | 1996-01-09 | Rit Technologies, Ltd. | Patching panel scanner |
AU5296993A (en) | 1992-10-05 | 1994-04-26 | Adc Telecommunications, Incorporated | Jack module assembly |
CA2081608C (en) | 1992-10-28 | 1998-05-05 | Joseph Octave Regis Morin | Distribution frame and optical connector holder combination |
US5305405A (en) | 1993-02-25 | 1994-04-19 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Patch cord |
US5393249A (en) | 1993-06-30 | 1995-02-28 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Rear cross connect DSX system |
US5418334A (en) | 1993-08-04 | 1995-05-23 | Williams; Kenyon D. | Relative position tracer lamp indicator |
US5394503A (en) | 1993-10-08 | 1995-02-28 | Data Switch Corporation | Optical fiber connection monitoring apparatus, patch panel control system and method of using same |
US5353367A (en) | 1993-11-29 | 1994-10-04 | Northern Telecom Limited | Distribution frame and optical connector holder combination |
TW232757B (en) | 1994-01-21 | 1994-10-21 | Adc Telecommunications Inc | High-density fiber distribution frame |
US5448675A (en) | 1994-06-09 | 1995-09-05 | At&T Ipm Corp. | Telecommunications distribution frame with tracing |
US5419717A (en) | 1994-08-15 | 1995-05-30 | The Whitaker Corporation | Hybrid connector between optics and edge card |
IL110859A (en) | 1994-09-04 | 1999-12-31 | Rit Techn Ltd | Interconnection monitor system for telephone network |
US5579425A (en) | 1995-08-30 | 1996-11-26 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Anti-snag duplex connector |
US5758003A (en) | 1996-03-15 | 1998-05-26 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | High density fiber management |
US5712942A (en) | 1996-05-13 | 1998-01-27 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Optical communications system having distributed intelligence |
US5754404A (en) | 1996-05-14 | 1998-05-19 | Itt Cannon Gmbh | IC card rear board-connector support |
US5685741A (en) | 1996-06-27 | 1997-11-11 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | On demand plug-in jack card and monitor frame |
US6421322B1 (en) | 1997-11-17 | 2002-07-16 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | System and method for electronically identifying connections of a cross-connect system |
US6166917A (en) | 1998-01-07 | 2000-12-26 | 3Com Corporation | Techniques of assembling modular electronic equipment |
US6002331A (en) | 1998-07-20 | 1999-12-14 | Laor; Herzel | Method and apparatus for identifying and tracking connections of communication lines |
US6116961A (en) | 1998-11-12 | 2000-09-12 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Jack assembly |
US6437894B1 (en) | 1998-12-11 | 2002-08-20 | Fitel Usa Corp. | Fiber distribution shelf assembly for a fiber administration system having integral line tracing capabilities |
US6222975B1 (en) | 1998-12-11 | 2001-04-24 | Lucent Technologies, Inc. | System and method for detecting and reporting the use of optical fibers in fiber optic cables |
TW397272U (en) | 1998-12-31 | 2000-07-01 | Hon Hai Prec Ind Co Ltd | Modular box for universal communication port |
US6330307B1 (en) | 1999-02-10 | 2001-12-11 | Avaya Technology Corp. | Display panel overlay structure and method for tracing interface modules in a telecommunications patch system |
US6522737B1 (en) | 1999-02-10 | 2003-02-18 | Avaya Technology Corp. | System and method of operation for a telecommunications patch system |
US6234830B1 (en) | 1999-02-10 | 2001-05-22 | Avaya Technology Corp. | Tracing interface module for patch cords in a telecommunications system |
US6424710B1 (en) | 1999-02-10 | 2002-07-23 | Avaya Technology Corp. | Method and device for detecting the presence of a patch cord connector in a telecommunications patch system using passive detection sensors |
US6350148B1 (en) | 1999-02-10 | 2002-02-26 | Avaya Technology Corp. | Method and device for detecting the presence of a patch cord connector in a telecommunications patch system |
US6285293B1 (en) | 1999-02-10 | 2001-09-04 | Avaya Technology Corp. | System and method for addressing and tracing patch cords in a dedicated telecommunications system |
IL145770A0 (en) | 1999-04-06 | 2002-07-25 | Cablesoft Inc | A system for monitoring connection pattern of data ports |
US6195493B1 (en) | 1999-05-21 | 2001-02-27 | Scientific-Atlanta, Inc. | Universal chassis for CATV headends or telecommunications company central office for optical electronic equipment |
US6222908B1 (en) | 1999-09-23 | 2001-04-24 | Avaya Technology Corp. | Method and device for identifying a specific patch cord connector as it is introduced into, or removed from, a telecommunications patch system |
US6499861B1 (en) | 1999-09-23 | 2002-12-31 | Avaya Technology Corp. | Illuminated patch cord connector ports for use in a telecommunications patch closet having patch cord tracing capabilities |
US6409392B1 (en) | 1999-10-19 | 2002-06-25 | Fitel Usa Corp. | Duplex clip for clipping two optical fiber simplex connectors together to form a duplex connector |
US6300877B1 (en) | 2000-03-10 | 2001-10-09 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | DSX baytracer illuminator |
US6388891B1 (en) | 2000-06-30 | 2002-05-14 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Fiber shelf assembly |
US6456768B1 (en) | 2000-10-18 | 2002-09-24 | Fitel Usa Corp. | Optical fiber cable tracing system |
EP1373910A1 (en) | 2000-11-22 | 2004-01-02 | Panduit Corp. | Network revision system with probe |
US6824312B2 (en) * | 2001-06-04 | 2004-11-30 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Telecommunications chassis and module |
US6785459B2 (en) | 2001-06-26 | 2004-08-31 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Cable management brackets and cabinet |
US6560114B2 (en) * | 2001-06-29 | 2003-05-06 | Intel Corporation | Rack-mounted server and associated methods |
US6910267B1 (en) | 2001-07-27 | 2005-06-28 | Ciena Corporation | Apparatus for telecommunications equipment |
US6621692B1 (en) | 2001-08-30 | 2003-09-16 | Emc Corporation | Computerized system having an interface apparatus with improved mounting features |
US6591051B2 (en) | 2001-11-16 | 2003-07-08 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Fiber termination block with angled slide |
US7519000B2 (en) | 2002-01-30 | 2009-04-14 | Panduit Corp. | Systems and methods for managing a network |
US6850685B2 (en) | 2002-03-27 | 2005-02-01 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Termination panel with pivoting bulkhead and cable management |
US20030185536A1 (en) | 2002-04-01 | 2003-10-02 | White Rock Networks | Systems and methods for managing optical fiber media in a communications switch component |
US6980725B1 (en) | 2002-04-30 | 2005-12-27 | Calix Networks, Inc. | Space reuse during technology upgrade in a protection area of an outdoor enclosure |
EP1361498A1 (en) | 2002-05-06 | 2003-11-12 | Hewlett-Packard Company | Latch and release mechanism for a panel of a computer hardware device |
US6808116B1 (en) | 2002-05-29 | 2004-10-26 | At&T Corp. | Fiber jumpers with data storage method and apparatus |
US6842348B2 (en) | 2002-05-31 | 2005-01-11 | Pci Technologies, Inc. | RF circuit modules and integrated chassis with power interface for RF circuit modules |
US6743044B2 (en) | 2002-08-14 | 2004-06-01 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Cross-connect jumper assembly having tracer lamp |
US7218640B2 (en) * | 2002-08-30 | 2007-05-15 | Intel Corporation | Multi-port high-speed serial fabric interconnect chip in a meshed configuration |
US20040052471A1 (en) | 2002-09-13 | 2004-03-18 | Fitel Usa Corp. | Connector systems for dynamically updating information related to a network and methods for developing the connector systems |
US6898368B2 (en) | 2002-09-13 | 2005-05-24 | Fitel Usa Corp. | Adapter systems for dynamically updating information related to a network and methods for developing the adapter systems |
US7081808B2 (en) | 2002-09-13 | 2006-07-25 | Fitel Usa Corp. | Self-registration systems and methods for dynamically updating information related to a network |
US6976867B2 (en) | 2002-11-07 | 2005-12-20 | Tyco Electronics Amp Espana, S.A. | Network connection sensing assembly |
US6626697B1 (en) | 2002-11-07 | 2003-09-30 | Tyco Electronics Corp. | Network connection sensing assembly |
IL152768A (en) | 2002-11-11 | 2008-04-13 | Rit Techn Ltd | Retrofit kit for interconnect cabling system |
JP3638933B2 (en) | 2002-11-15 | 2005-04-13 | 東京通信機工業株式会社 | Wiring device |
JP3745728B2 (en) | 2002-11-15 | 2006-02-15 | 東京通信機工業株式会社 | Adapter for memory function connector |
US6870734B2 (en) | 2003-05-30 | 2005-03-22 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Fiber containment system |
IL157203A (en) | 2003-07-31 | 2010-12-30 | Rit Techn Ltd | Management of large scale cabling systems |
US7352289B1 (en) | 2003-09-11 | 2008-04-01 | Sun Microsystems, Inc. | System and method for detecting the connection state of a network cable connector |
US6920274B2 (en) | 2003-12-23 | 2005-07-19 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | High density optical fiber distribution frame with modules |
TW200605454A (en) | 2004-01-20 | 2006-02-01 | Siemon Co | Patch panel system |
US7165728B2 (en) | 2004-04-02 | 2007-01-23 | Stratos International, Inc. | Radio frequency identification for transfer of component information in fiber optic testing |
US7137855B2 (en) * | 2004-04-16 | 2006-11-21 | National Instruments Corporation | Mechanical adapter for circuitry modules |
US7123810B2 (en) | 2004-05-04 | 2006-10-17 | Bellsouth Intellectual Property Corporation | Optical fiber connectors with identification circuits and distribution terminals that communicate therewith |
US7526171B2 (en) | 2004-07-22 | 2009-04-28 | Panduit Corp. | Front access punch down patch panel |
EP1810522A1 (en) | 2004-11-03 | 2007-07-25 | Panduit Corp. | Method and apparatus for patch panel patch cord documentation and revision |
TWI272467B (en) | 2004-11-19 | 2007-02-01 | Tyan Computer Corp | Fixing structure for interface card |
EP1829388A1 (en) | 2004-12-21 | 2007-09-05 | CommScope, Inc. of North Carolina | Methods, systems and computer program products for connecting and monitoring network equipment in a telecommunications system |
GB0504522D0 (en) * | 2005-03-04 | 2005-04-13 | Tyco Electronics Amp Es Sa | Network connection sensing assembly |
US7412147B2 (en) | 2005-03-15 | 2008-08-12 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Normal through optical panel |
US7194181B2 (en) | 2005-03-31 | 2007-03-20 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Adapter block including connector storage |
US7813143B2 (en) | 2005-04-15 | 2010-10-12 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Conversion module and chassis arrangement, and related methods |
US7388657B2 (en) | 2005-08-22 | 2008-06-17 | Tyco Telecommunications (Us) Inc. | System and method for monitoring an optical communication system |
US7234944B2 (en) | 2005-08-26 | 2007-06-26 | Panduit Corp. | Patch field documentation and revision systems |
DE102005046862A1 (en) | 2005-09-30 | 2007-04-05 | Adc Gmbh | Plug-in installation module for e.g. analog to digital converter has connector strip incorporating a series of relays |
US7226217B1 (en) | 2005-11-18 | 2007-06-05 | Stratos International, Inc. | Transceiver/fiber optic connector adaptor with patch cord ID reading capability |
US7488206B2 (en) | 2006-02-14 | 2009-02-10 | Panduit Corp. | Method and apparatus for patch panel patch cord documentation and revision |
US7934022B2 (en) | 2006-03-14 | 2011-04-26 | The Siemon Company | Methods and systems for deriving connectivity information among telecommunications devices |
AU2007229834B2 (en) | 2006-03-22 | 2011-02-03 | Adc Gmbh | Intelligent patching identification system and method |
US7627221B2 (en) | 2006-06-23 | 2009-12-01 | Stephen James Morris | Mounting system for telecommunications panels |
US7454113B2 (en) | 2006-07-20 | 2008-11-18 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Grounding device for fiber storage trays |
US7418182B2 (en) | 2006-10-10 | 2008-08-26 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Cable management drawer with access panel |
US7772975B2 (en) | 2006-10-31 | 2010-08-10 | Corning Cable Systems, Llc | System for mapping connections using RFID function |
US8264355B2 (en) | 2006-12-14 | 2012-09-11 | Corning Cable Systems Llc | RFID systems and methods for optical fiber network deployment and maintenance |
US7570860B2 (en) | 2007-01-19 | 2009-08-04 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Adapter panel with lateral sliding adapter arrays |
US7493002B2 (en) | 2007-01-19 | 2009-02-17 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Fiber optic adapter cassette and panel |
TWI327264B (en) * | 2007-01-19 | 2010-07-11 | Asustek Comp Inc | Handheld electronic device |
US7684208B2 (en) | 2007-03-29 | 2010-03-23 | International Business Machines Corporation | Adapter blade for a blade server system chassis |
JP2009032068A (en) | 2007-07-27 | 2009-02-12 | Hitachi Ltd | Mounting structure of blade server |
US7876580B2 (en) | 2007-07-31 | 2011-01-25 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Rotating cable strain relief |
JP2009104801A (en) * | 2007-10-19 | 2009-05-14 | Funai Electric Co Ltd | Liquid crystal module |
US8179684B2 (en) | 2007-10-29 | 2012-05-15 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Sliding adapter panel with living hinge and forward/rearward locking |
US8203450B2 (en) | 2008-01-02 | 2012-06-19 | Commscope, Inc. | Intelligent MPO-to-MPO patch panels having connectivity tracking capabilities and related methods |
US8270796B2 (en) | 2008-03-04 | 2012-09-18 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Multi-port adapter block |
US20100005211A1 (en) * | 2008-07-02 | 2010-01-07 | Chenbro Micom Co., Ltd. | Adapter board assembly |
CN102106157B (en) * | 2008-07-02 | 2014-08-06 | 瑞特技术有限公司 | System and method for monitoring physical layer connectivity |
US7795533B2 (en) * | 2008-07-03 | 2010-09-14 | Panduit Corp. | In-ceiling zone cabling enclosure |
US8326107B2 (en) * | 2008-08-29 | 2012-12-04 | Corning Cable Systems Llc | Rear-slidable extension in a fiber optic equipment tray |
US8452148B2 (en) * | 2008-08-29 | 2013-05-28 | Corning Cable Systems Llc | Independently translatable modules and fiber optic equipment trays in fiber optic equipment |
US8526774B2 (en) | 2008-09-23 | 2013-09-03 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Telecommunications panel and drawer arrangement |
US8070522B2 (en) * | 2008-12-12 | 2011-12-06 | Cisco Technology, Inc. | Adaptor for a router blade |
GB2467404B (en) * | 2008-12-23 | 2011-12-14 | Nexsan Technologies Ltd | Electronic apparatus |
CN104539640B (en) | 2009-02-13 | 2019-04-30 | Adc长途电讯有限公司 | The connectivity equipment, system and method for management |
US8897637B2 (en) | 2009-04-22 | 2014-11-25 | Adc Gmbh | Method and arrangement for identifying at least one object |
BRPI1012833A2 (en) * | 2009-06-08 | 2018-03-06 | Commscope Inc North Carolina | communication connection system |
WO2011049967A1 (en) | 2009-10-19 | 2011-04-28 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Managed electrical connectivity systems |
CA2789159A1 (en) | 2010-02-12 | 2011-08-18 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Communications bladed panel systems |
US8995136B2 (en) * | 2011-12-23 | 2015-03-31 | Adc Telecommunications, Inc. | Communications bladed panel systems |
-
2011
- 2011-02-11 CA CA2789159A patent/CA2789159A1/en active Pending
- 2011-02-11 EP EP11705379.3A patent/EP2534846B1/en not_active Not-in-force
- 2011-02-11 CN CN201180018498.9A patent/CN102860032B/en active Active
- 2011-02-11 WO PCT/US2011/024623 patent/WO2011100611A2/en active Application Filing
- 2011-02-11 WO PCT/US2011/024635 patent/WO2011100619A2/en active Application Filing
- 2011-02-11 WO PCT/US2011/024630 patent/WO2011100616A2/en active Application Filing
- 2011-02-11 US US13/025,743 patent/US9020319B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2011-02-11 WO PCT/US2011/024626 patent/WO2011100613A1/en active Application Filing
- 2011-02-11 CN CN201610835572.0A patent/CN107102409A/en active Pending
- 2011-02-11 US US13/025,750 patent/US8923013B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2011-02-11 US US13/025,730 patent/US8934252B2/en active Active
- 2011-02-11 EP EP11713392.6A patent/EP2534847B1/en not_active Not-in-force
- 2011-02-11 CN CN201180018500.2A patent/CN102860033B/en active Active
- 2011-02-11 CA CA2789356A patent/CA2789356A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2011-02-11 CN CN201610909463.9A patent/CN107065086A/en active Pending
- 2011-02-11 US US13/025,737 patent/US8934253B2/en active Active
-
2014
- 2014-12-18 US US14/574,596 patent/US9265172B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2014-12-18 US US14/574,663 patent/US9213363B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2015
- 2015-01-09 US US14/593,681 patent/US9198320B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2015-04-15 US US14/686,948 patent/US9223105B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
- 2015-11-20 US US14/946,931 patent/US9549484B2/en active Active
- 2015-12-14 US US14/968,398 patent/US9532481B2/en active Active
- 2015-12-28 US US14/979,912 patent/US9532482B2/en active Active
-
2016
- 2016-02-15 US US15/043,897 patent/US10123444B2/en not_active Expired - Fee Related
-
2018
- 2018-11-05 US US16/180,628 patent/US20190075676A1/en not_active Abandoned
-
2021
- 2021-03-10 US US17/197,691 patent/US20210267084A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US3991960A (en) * | 1974-10-31 | 1976-11-16 | Nifco Inc. | Device for supporting electric wires, cords and other elongated bodies |
US20080175552A1 (en) * | 2007-01-19 | 2008-07-24 | Mark Smrha | Adapter panel with lateral sliding adapter arrays |
US20080230437A1 (en) * | 2007-03-22 | 2008-09-25 | High Tech Computer Corp. | Protection cover and electronic device using the same |
Cited By (4)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US11139639B1 (en) * | 2020-07-09 | 2021-10-05 | Ge Aviation Systems Limited | Modular power distribution assembly and method of assembly thereof |
US11973325B2 (en) | 2020-07-09 | 2024-04-30 | Ge Aviation Systems Limited | Modular power distribution assembly and method of assembly thereof |
WO2022111805A1 (en) * | 2020-11-25 | 2022-06-02 | Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) | Systems for rack mountable electronic devices |
WO2023287998A1 (en) * | 2021-07-16 | 2023-01-19 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Panel systems with slidable cassettes |
Also Published As
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US20210267084A1 (en) | Communications bladed panel systems | |
US10574008B2 (en) | Managed electrical connectivity systems | |
US9348106B2 (en) | Cable management in rack systems | |
EP3730983A1 (en) | Optical assemblies with managed connectivity | |
US10101542B2 (en) | Managed connectivity systems |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., NEW YORK Free format text: TERM LOAN SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNORS:COMMSCOPE, INC. OF NORTH CAROLINA;COMMSCOPE TECHNOLOGIES LLC;ARRIS ENTERPRISES LLC;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:049905/0504 Effective date: 20190404 Owner name: JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., NEW YORK Free format text: ABL SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNORS:COMMSCOPE, INC. OF NORTH CAROLINA;COMMSCOPE TECHNOLOGIES LLC;ARRIS ENTERPRISES LLC;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:049892/0396 Effective date: 20190404 Owner name: WILMINGTON TRUST, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, AS COLLATE Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:COMMSCOPE TECHNOLOGIES LLC;REEL/FRAME:049892/0051 Effective date: 20190404 Owner name: WILMINGTON TRUST, NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, AS COLLATERAL AGENT, CONNECTICUT Free format text: PATENT SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:COMMSCOPE TECHNOLOGIES LLC;REEL/FRAME:049892/0051 Effective date: 20190404 |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED |
|
STPP | Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general |
Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED |
|
STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation |
Free format text: ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: WILMINGTON TRUST, DELAWARE Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:ARRIS SOLUTIONS, INC.;ARRIS ENTERPRISES LLC;COMMSCOPE TECHNOLOGIES LLC;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:060752/0001 Effective date: 20211115 |